AQUA

Materials and Cross Sections

SOFiSTiK | 2025
 AQUA
Materials and Cross Sections

AQUA Manual, Service Pack 2025-1.1 Build 3

Copyright © 2024 by SOFiSTiK AG, Nuremberg, Germany.

SOFiSTiK AG

HQ Nuremberg Office Garching

Flataustraße 14 Parkring 2
90411 Nürnberg 85748 Garching bei München
Germany Germany

T +49 (0)911 39901-0 T +49 (0)89 315878-0

F +49(0)911 397904 F +49 (0)89 315878-23
info@[Link]
[Link]

This manual is protected by copyright laws. No part of it may be translated, copied or reproduced, in any form or by
any means, without written permission from SOFiSTiK AG. SOFiSTiK reserves the right to modify or to release
new editions of this manual.

The manual and the program have been thoroughly checked for errors. However, SOFiSTiK does not claim that
either one is completely error free. Errors and omissions are corrected as soon as they are detected.

The user of the program is solely responsible for the applications. We strongly encourage the user to test the
correctness of all calculations at least by random sampling.
 Contents | AQUA

Contents

Contents i

1 General 1-1
1.1 Task Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Types of sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.1 Static Properties of Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.2 Standard Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.3 Freely Defined Thin-walled Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.4 Freely Defined Solid Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.5 Freely Defined FE Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.6 Selection of Section Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Creating variants of sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

2 Theoretical Principles 2-1

2.1 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Holes and Composite Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.4 Normal Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.5 Effective Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.6 Warping and Shear Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.7 Torsional Moment of Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.8 Shear Stresses in Solid Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.8.1 Finite Element Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.8.2 Boundary Element Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.8.3 Force Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.8.4 Equivalent Hollow Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.8.5 Shear Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.9 Shear Stresses in Thin-Walled Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.10 Plastic forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.11 Program Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

3 Input Description 3-1

3.1 Input Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3 Input Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.4 CTRL – Control of Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.5 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.6 NORM – Default Design Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.7 MATE – Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.8 MAT – General Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.9 FLAY – Layered Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

SOFiSTiK 2025 i
AQUA | Contents

3.10 MLAY – Layered Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

3.11 NMAT – Non-linear Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.11.1 Invariants of the Stress Tensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.11.2 Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.11.3 Non-linear State Variables (hardening parameters) . . . . . . . 3-51
3.11.4 VMIS Viscoplastic Material Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.11.5 DRUC Viscoplastic Material Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.11.6 MOHR Viscoplastic Material Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.11.7 GRAN Hardening Plasticity Soil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.11.8 SWEL Swelling Soil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.11.9 FAUL Oriented Shear Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.11.10 ROCK Material with oriented Shear Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3.11.11 UNDR Undrained Soil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.11.12 LADE Elasto-plastic Material Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.11.13 MEMB Material Law for Polyfabrics/ Textiles . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3.11.14 User Defined Material Laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.12 BMAT – Elastic Support / Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3.12.1 Derivation of bedding constants from reference material . . . . 3-82
3.12.2 Rigid Frictional Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3.13 HMAT – Material Constants HYDRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
3.13.1 Hydraulic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3.13.2 Heat Conduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3.13.3 Hydration of Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
3.14 CONC – Properties of Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
3.14.1 Eurocode / DIN 1045-1 / OEN B 4700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
3.14.2 DIN 1045 old / DIN 4227 / DIN 18806: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3.14.3 OENORM B 4700 / B 4750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
3.14.4 Swiss Standard SIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3.14.5 French BAEL-99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3.14.6 Spanish EHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
3.14.7 Swedish BBK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
3.14.8 Danish DS 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
3.14.9 Norwegian NS 3473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3.14.10 Italian design codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3.14.11 British Standard BS 8110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3.14.12 American concrete institute ACI 318M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3.14.13 Brasilian NBR 6118-2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
3.14.14 Australian AS 3600 and New Zealand NZS 3101 . . . . . . . . 3-99
3.14.15 Chinese Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.14.16 Indian Standards IS / IRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.14.17 Russian Standard SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.14.18 Linear Elastic Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.15 STEE – Properties of Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
3.15.1 Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
3.15.2 Aluminium alloy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
3.15.3 Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
3.15.4 Prestressing Steel for Cables according to EN 1993-1-11 . . . 3-123
3.15.5 Relaxation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
3.15.6 Bond Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125

ii SOFiSTiK 2025
 Contents | AQUA

3.15.7 Stress-Strain Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126

3.16 TIMB – Timber and Fibre Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
3.17 MASO – Masonry / Brickwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
3.18 SSLA – Stress-Strain Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
3.19 MEXT – Extra Material Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
3.19.1 AIR - Air Contact Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
3.19.2 CNOM - Nominal Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141
3.19.3 CRW - Crack width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141
3.19.4 EIGE - Parameters for Creep-Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141
3.19.5 EIGC, EIGS - Explicit curves for creep an shrinkage . . . . . . 3-142
3.19.6 KR - Equivalent roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143
3.19.7 TEMP - Temperature environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143
3.20 BORE – Soil or Bore Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
3.21 BLAY – Layer of the Soil Strata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-145
3.22 BBAX – Axial Beddings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
3.23 BBLA – Lateral Beddings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
3.24 BTAB – Foundation pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
3.25 SMAT – Material Properties for Springs and Beam Hinges . . . . . . . . . 3-155
3.25.1 General link material (→ SMAT LTYP IHNG or PMM) . . . . . . 3-157
3.25.2 Material type characteristics and examples . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-158
3.26 SFLA – Force-Displacement Laws and Nonlinear Properties . . . . . . . . 3-164
3.26.1 Work laws and nonlinear properties for standard spring ele-
ments
(→ SMAT LTYP STD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165
3.26.2 Work laws for general link elements
(→ SMAT LTYP IHNG or PMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
3.26.3 Performance limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
3.27 LCA – Material Definitions for Life Cycle Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-172
3.28 SVAL – Cross Section Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-173
3.29 SREC – Rectangle, T-beam, Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176
3.30 EDGB – Edge beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-181
3.31 SHRW – Shear Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-186
3.32 SCIT – Circular and Tube Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-188
3.33 CABL – Cable Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190
3.33.1 Default Cable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-191
3.33.2 Explanation of the Cable Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-192
3.34 SECT – Freely defined Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-194
3.34.1 Parametric Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-197
3.34.2 FE-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-205
3.35 CS – Construction Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-206
3.36 SV – Additional Cross Section Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-208
3.37 POLY – Polygonal Cross-Section Element / Blockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-210
3.38 VERT – Polygon Vertices in Absolute Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-212
3.39 CIRC – Circular Cross Section Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-216
3.40 CUT – Shear Cuts and Partial Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-217
3.41 PANE – Thin-Walled Cross Section Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-227
3.42 PLAT – Thin-Walled Cross Section Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-230
3.43 WELD – Shear Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-233
3.44 PROF – Rolled Steel Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-235

SOFiSTiK 2025 iii

AQUA | Contents

3.44.1 List of the Tabulated European Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-237

3.44.2 List of the Tabulated International Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-238
3.44.3 Sheet Pile Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-240
3.44.4 Additional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-241
3.44.5 Examples of Thin-walled Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-242
3.45 SPT – Geometry and Stress Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-246
3.46 NEFF – Non effective parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-248
3.47 WPAR – Parameters for Wind Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-251
3.48 WIND – Coefficients for Wind and Wave Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-253
3.49 LAY – Reinforcement Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-256
3.49.1 Properties of reinforcement elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-256
3.49.2 Rules for the treatment of layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-258
3.50 RF – Single Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-261
3.51 LRF – Line Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-262
3.52 CRF – Circular Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-264
3.53 CURF – Perimetric Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-266
3.54 TVAR – Template Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-268
3.55 INTE – Interpolation or Variants of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-270
3.56 IMPO – Import of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-272
3.57 EXPO – Ansi Export of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-273
3.58 ECHO – Extent of Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-274

4 Description of Output 4-1

4.1 Information about the Design Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3 Bedding Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.4 Overview of the Cross Section Values and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.5 Cross Section Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.6 Cross Section Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.7 Wind Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.8 Integral Equation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.9 Spring Characteristic Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Bibliography 4-21

iv SOFiSTiK 2025
 General | AQUA

1 General

1.1 Task Description

AQUA calculates the properties of cross sections of any shape and made out of any material.
The cross section properties for a static analysis are determined, as well as characteristic
magnitudes for the calculation of normal and shear stresses. Cross sections need to be defined
before input of the static system or the dimensioning with AQB.

After definition with AQUA, the cross sections can be represented graphically with Re-
sultViewer.

1.2 Types of sections

1.2.1 Static Properties of Cross Sections

All static properties of cross sections are directly specified. This includes shear deformation
areas and stress resistance values. The values may be taken from other cross sections with
a multiplication factor. These cross sections are mainly used in the static calculations. Their
usage in AQB is strongly restricted.

1.2.2 Standard Cross Sections

A standard cross section (Rolled steel shapes, Rectangle, T-beam, annular sections, cables)
is always defined with a single command. All cross sectional properties, including the torsional
moment of inertia, are available. Due to the known geometric structure, most of the property
values may be calculated in a direct way, allowing to skip the time consuming detailed analysis
of the shear or plastic resistance only available with an AQUA license. In many cases it is
also intended to have these simpler values taken from tabulated data in the literature. On the
other side variability and locations of design points are thus limited. A detailed analysis or a
combination with other cross section parts is only possible for the rolled steel shapes.

Thus all other sections do not allow neither the calculation of von Mises stresses nor the design
for fatigue.

1.2.3 Freely Defined Thin-walled Cross Sections

A freely defined thin-walled cross section may contain any number of thin elements, whose
thickness is much smaller comparative to its length. A thin element assumes that the variation
of the normal stress and most shear stresses over the thickness are negligible. This has the
consequence that the moment of inertia about the weak axis also vanishes. Available elements
are panels, standard steel shapes and welded joints, as well as reinforcements.

Section moduli for all stresses are available at all points of the cross section. Torsional moment
of inertia and warping resistance, as well as centre of shear and shear deformation areas, are
determined for open or closed shapes, but they can also be specified explicitly for special
cases. Composite cross sections can be defined.

SOFiSTiK 2025 1-1

AQUA | General

1.2.4 Freely Defined Solid Cross Sections

A freely defined solid cross section consists of any number of outer and inner perimeters in the
form of circles or polygons, as well as of reinforcement elements. Structural steel shapes can
be integrated.

Section moduli for all stresses are only available at distinct points of the cross section. The
torsional moment of inertia, the centre of shear and the shear deformation areas can be calcu-
lated, or they can be input separately. The warping resistance can not be determined. Com-
posite sections or effective widths of the polygons can be defined.

1.2.5 Freely Defined FE Cross Sections

A freely defined FE cross section will be imported from a FE mesh available in a separate
external data base. Stress points, reinforcement elements or shear cuts may be added then.
The import may also activate a temperature field for the section (e.g. hot design).

All sectional values including warping are evaluated. Section moduli for all forces and moments
are available for all element mid points. Composite sections may be defined.

1.2.6 Selection of Section Type

The user has to decide on his own authority, which type of sectional description to choose. Due
to the established restrictions a standard cross section may have more sectional data available
than a poorly defined general cross section.

A thin walled section has much in common with a standard frame analysis, while the solid
section requires a continua solution. This means that the simplifications of the thin walled
approach allow a faster, more robust and more extensive solution, but neglects local effects,
which may become visible within a continua solution with integral equations or finite elements.

For example it is to be noted, that for a thin hollow box, the shear stress of the continua solution
is not really constant across the web thickness and may have higher intensities at the corners
which might require a smoothing of the contour. On the other side a thin walled section has
problems to take account of the positive effect of the fillets of a thin rolled steel shape which
has a considerable contribution to the torsional strength.

The checks for the c/t ratio for steel sections are much more easily performed with a thin walled
section and the modelling of discrete dowels is only possible with this type of approach.

In general problems have to be expected if a section is not modelled with the optimum method.
Especially very thin plates with stiffeners modelled as polygons need a very high numerical
effort.

1.3 Creating variants of sections

Due to the fact that most cross sections are build up according to certain rules, AQUA supplies
several definition possibilities for these instances:

• You may describe the section via CADINP variables within a block, which is then used
multiple times.
• You may interpolate between two sections linearly

1-2 SOFiSTiK 2025

 General | AQUA

• You can define a cross section template consisting of several construction points. Other
points are referenced hierarchically to those original points. You can then generate other
cross sections by changing these points.
• You may describe the position of those construction points by a 3D model with curved
reference lines.

It is also possible for AQUA to update all interpolated or otherwise generated sections with a
single command (INTE).

SOFiSTiK 2025 1-3

AQUA | General

1-4 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | AQUA

2 Theoretical Principles

2.1 Materials
Properties of materials must be distinguished according to whether they are to be kept as close
as possible to real values (e.g. for dynamic calculations) or to be used with a safety coefficient
for calculating an ultimate load-bearing capacity.

A small, but subtle contradiction is given by the fact, that many design codes use a factor of
10.0 to convert the density of a material t/ m3 to the weight kN/ m3 . The US customary
   

units use the pound as base unit, the masses are converted with a nominal value of the gravity
acceleration.

To avoid any confusion and to use all the benefits of the SI-System SOFiSTiK has established
the following rules:

• All specified weights have to be specified in (kN/ m3) or (b/ ƒ t3), but they are saved as
masses to the data base. Thus a direct definition of the mass with a unit of (kg/ m3) or
(bm/ ƒ t3) is also possible.
• Masses for dynamic or densities for thermal analysis will be always determined directly
from that data.
• If the design code or the user allows for more precise loadings, the user may specify the
true value of the gravity acceleration for the reference location with the NORM record.

Somehow confusing, there is an additional density value of the raw material. This value is
relevant for many physical properties of concrete or timber, but its value is less than the value
used for self weight.

Whereas the safety factors were formerly assigned more-or-less at random, sometimes to the
load and sometimes to the material, more recent regulations (Eurocode) provide a clearer
separation between safety factors for the loads and factors for the material.

Since the material safety factors still depend on the nature of the load or the type of design,
AQUA generates and stores only the genuine properties of the material. However, AQUA
accounts for some safety factors which are independent of the particular loading case, such as
long term reduction factors.

Nevertheless, a safety coefficient can be entered in AQUA for each material; this is used in
AQUA for calculating the full plastic section forces and moments, and can be used in AQB for
the strain checks.

2.2 Holes and Composite Sections

Any type of hole will be generated automatically if polygons or circles overlap. A true hole is
now defined with material number 0. To avoid any ambiguities, some rules have to be followed
however:

• A polygon/circle may create a hole in another area only if it has a different material number
and at least one vertex of the periphery within the other area. The latter is only true provided
that the edges of the two polygons maintain a minimum distance of 0.5 [ mm] apart.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-1

AQUA | Theoretical Principles

• If a polygon/circle is completely within another area, it will always create a hole, if the areas
overlap partly the sequence of the input will decide: The area defined last will be considered
”in front of” and will create a hole in the area laying behind.

2.3 Coordinate System

Cross sections are described according to DIN 1080 in the local y-z coordinate system of the
beam. Here the x-axis points in the longitudinal direction of the bar. The observer is looking in
general at the positive boundary of the section (from the end of the bar to the beginning).

The coordinate system of the section is identical with the local beam coordinate-system, i.e.
the local x-axis is along the beam on the line between the nodes, the y- and the z-axis are right
handed perpendicular to it. The z-axis defines the main bending direction and is in general
oriented downwards in the gravity direction.

For the description of the forces and moments and the support conditions, three points along
the beam have to be distinguished within a section:

• Centre of gravity (G) - This is the physical meaning of centre and is used for the calculation
of the self weight and masses.
• Elastic reference (S) - This is the centre weighted with the elasticity modulus of the gross
section. For homogeneous material it is identical with the centre of gravity, thus often just
named ”centre”. This value may include the basic reinforcements.
• Elastic centre (N) - This is the mechanical point where the normal force is acting. Stresses
induced by a constant strain within the total section will not generate any moments refer-
ence to that point. It differs from the elastic centre by the inclusion of holes and the current
reinforcements. Quite often it is also called the centre of the net or ideal section.
• Effective bending centre (B) - If some parts of the section do not take fully part due to
shear deformations, this may be accounted for bei noneffective areas for bending. This
has the consequence, that the bending strains and stresses are relative to the effective
centre. As a moment can be freely moved around, no additional forces are introduced by
this operation.
• Shear centre (M) - This point may be defined in several ways: A shear force acting at this
point does not create torsion. A section with torsion will rotate about this point. Thus if an
explicit rotation axis should be described, this point has to be defined explicitly.
• Beam axis - The beam axis is the (straight) connection between the beam nodes. The
section of the beam have to be defined at a specific location in the system, to allow the
correct treatment of all eccentricities. The sectional point on the beam axis is preferred to
be the origin of the sectional coordinate system (beam with reference axis). Alternatively
the elastic center may be used instead.
Hint
– Hinges are always defined at the elastic centre or shear centre.
– Enforced rotational axis must coincide with the beam axis.

Differences between these points will create changes in the forces and moments. On the other
side it is possible to describe a complete geometry with any eccentricities and unsymmetrical
haunched beams and construction stages with ease.

2-2 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | AQUA

S
M

Figure 2.1: Coordinate system

Figure 2.1 depicts beam and sectional coordinate systems:

x, y, z Local beam coordinate system, freely selectable, is defined relative to the global
coordinate system by the definition of the beam.
y’, z’ sectional coordinate system for minimum moment of inertia (=coordinate system
shifted to the elastic centre)

For rotations the sign is always defined by the rotation about the local x-axis. This is clockwise
if you look in the direction of the beam and it is counter clockwise if looking on the positive face.
Sections will be saved in the database with the periphery in that same orientation. The sign of
the radius of a circular arc is defined positive if the area is increased compared to the secant,
and it is negative if the area is decreased as in the case of a fillet.

2.4 Normal Stresses

The load-bearing behaviour of a generic bar without foundation according to the 1st order
theory, yet with warping, can be described with a differential equation matrix:
     
  
F Fy Fz F 

  


 p 


     
 V 
  
 Fy

Fyy Fyz Fy 

y
 
py 
E ·   · = (2.1)
zV  pz
 Fz Fyz Fzz Fz  
   
 

 
 
 
 

   
F Fy Fz F
 V  
m + Gt ϑ
ϑ
 

with the following definitions:

 , y , z displacements parallel and perpendicular to the bar

Θ rotation about the axis of the bar
p , py , pz loads parallel and perpendicular to the bar

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-3

AQUA | Theoretical Principles

m torsional load

The rest of the parameters are static properties of the cross section (geometrical area mo-
ments). Since it is impractical to incorporate all of the static properties into the calculation,
certain standardisations are normally adopted:

• The axial force refers to the elastic centre of the beam, i.e.

Fy = Fz = 0 (2.2)

• Bending takes place about the principal axes, i.e.

Fyz = 0 (2.3)

• Warping can occur freely in the cross section, i.e.

F = 0 (2.4)

• The torsional moment and the shear forces refer to the centre of shear, i.e.

Fy = Fz = 0 (2.5)

Conversely, the conditions in 2.2 through 2.5 can be used in determining the elastic centre, the
orientation of the principal axes, the free moduli of warping and the centre of shear.

The determination of the area moments is relatively simple and shall not be described in any
further detail.

The normal stresses of a bar cross section can be described by means of Swain’s expression
and the normalized warping:

My z + Mz yz



N Mz y − My yz Mb
σ = +   ·z−   ·y+ · (2.6)
A 2
y z − yz 2
y z − yz CM

2.5 Effective Width

The so-called effective widths are used for modeling the effects which derive from the di-
aphragm action of the plate of a T-beam or a box cross section. The concept of an equivalent
substitute width with constant normal stress naturally demands different approaches depend-
ing on the task at hand (statics, design).

Effective width are also used for metallic sections of class 4, where parts of the section buckle
and do not allow any longitudinal stress.

AQUA is able to define the non-effective areas by means of rectangular regions with selectable
effectivity for different forces or moments. AQUA then stores the cross section values for the
total cross section as well as for the effective cross section.

Static analysis usually refers to the stiffness of the effective parts, whereas the normal force
(e.g. prestressing) refers to the center of the total cross section.

2-4 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | AQUA

For the design the stresses from the normal force on the total section are then combined with
stresses from the bending moments on the effective section.

The non effective parts remain effective for shear stress calculations due to many consistency
reasons. But as the longitudinal stress is zero, the shear stress is always constant within an
element.

2.6 Warping and Shear Stresses

In case of warping due to torsion (primary or secondary) and shear force, the cross section no
longer remains plane. A deflection  occurring at the cross section in the longitudinal direction
induces shear stresses.

All the problems of the elasticity theory can be analysed by use of the force method or the
displacement method. While the force method is frequently used in calculations by hand, the
displacement method is better suited for processing with the computer. Both procedures are
implemented in AQUA for solid cross sections. The latter are by default computed by means
of the displacement method and in particular the Finite Element Method (FEM). Alternatively,
the Boundary Element Method (BEM) could be also activated. Certain simplifications of the
following equations can be made in case of thin-walled sections which facilitate a quick solution
of all tasks. These sections are therefore always analysed by the matrix displacement method.

A general formulation for the cross section warping  according to the displacement method
conforms to the equilibrium condition
‚ 2
∂2 
Œ
∂  ∂σ
G· + = − (2.7)
∂y 2 ∂z 2 ∂

and the boundary condition

τy ny + τz nz = 0 (2.8)

where the shear stresses are given by

∂ ∂ϑ
 
τy = G · −z· (2.9a)
∂y ∂
∂ ∂ϑ
 
τz = G · +y· (2.9b)
∂z ∂

The right side of 2.7 can be computed for example by 2.6. Assuming constant normal force
and constant cross section properties, one gets:
∂σ Vz z − Vy yz Vy y − Vz yz Mt2
− = · z + · y + ·  (2.10)
∂ y z − 2
yz y z − 2
yz CM

These equations will be approximated by AQUA either with the Boundary Element Method
(BEM) or the Finite Element Method (FEM).

For the Saint Venant’s torsion problem (∂Θ / ∂ = 1) the right side of 2.7 is identical to zero

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-5

AQUA | Theoretical Principles

and the following boundary condition applies:

∂
= z · ny − y · nz . (2.11)
∂n

2.7 Torsional Moment of Inertia

The torsional moment of inertia according to the displacement method t is derived by
Z Z
” —
t = y 2 + z 2 − (∂/ ∂y)2 − (∂/ ∂z)2 dF (2.12)

As long as AQUA does not solve the differential equation 2.7, only an estimate of the torsional
moment of inertia is possible. The last equation shows that the polar moment of inertia can be
substituted for t in case of warp-free cross sections

t ≤ p = y + z . (2.13)

For all cross sections Eq. 2.13 provides an upper limit, which e.g. is about 10% above the
exact value for a square.

A better approximation is given by Saint Venant:

A4
T =  (2.14)
4 · π 2 · y + z



This value is exact for circular and elliptical cross sections. For compact solid cross sections
this value provides a good approximation.

In case of open sections, however, it is sensible to consider a correction according to Wienecke

[1] in consideration of the cross section perimeter, which has been implemented in AQUA.

Deviations in rectangular cross sections with sides a and b:

a/b 1/1 2/1 10/1

exact 0.140 0.458 3.13 ×b4
Saint Venant 0.152 0.486 3.01 ×b4
Wienecke 0.124 0.418 3.24 ×b4

For hollow cross sections with more than 30% inner perimeters, an equivalent hollow cross
section based on the external and internal perimeters is used for a more refined estimate.

For composite sections Eq. 2.14 is used for each partial cross section and the components are
added.

2.8 Shear Stresses in Solid Sections

The calculation of shear stresses for solid sections in AQUA requires that the user specifies
the method to be used and the positions that have to be checked. This challenging problem

2-6 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | AQUA

can be solved with a variety of methods, which is controlled by the CTRL option STYP:

CTRL STYP FEM Finite Element Method - for all shear related cross-sectional prop-
erties (default)
CTRL STYP FEMX Finite Element Method as described above, but with a secondary
database containing the section mesh in a subfolder
CTRL STYP BEM 1 Boundary Element Method only for t and location of shear centre
ysc ,zsc
CTRL STYP BEM 2 Boundary Element Method for torsion and Force Method for shear
using shear cuts
CTRL STYP BEM 3 Boundary Element Method for torsion, shear deformation areas are
also determined
CTRL STYP FORC Force Method

Hint
The default of version 2014 can be set with CTRL STYP BEM.

In post-cracking (state II) analysis, AQB always employs the force method with proportional
axial force. In case of composite cross sections options BEM 2 and BEM 3 should be used
with caution. The input of explicit shear sections is required as a rule.

2.8.1 Finite Element Method

Basics
The Finite Element Method for solid (thick) sections is an innovative approach which uses a
2D discretisation of the cross-sectional domain, thus formulating the main differential warping
problem into a discrete system of equations using the connectivity of the mesh (AQUA pro-
duces only quadrilateral ”QUAD” meshes). AQUA solves the four main unit warping problems
(MT1 = 1.0, Vy = 1.0, Vz = 1.0 and MT2 = 1.0) and derives from that the unit shear stress
distributions resulting under each loading condition. These results are then being used for
obtaining several entities such as:

• T torsional resistance (for primary torsional moment MT1 )

• Cm warping resistance (for bi-moment Mb )
• Cms warping shear resistance (for secondary torsional moment MT2 )
• Ay shear deformation area in the y-direction (for Vy )
• Az shear deformation area in the z-direction (for Vz )
• Ayz shear deformation area in the yz-plane
• ysc , zsc location of the shear centre
• mn , m minimum and maximum warpings
• higher quantities such as Ay , Az , Ayy , Azz , ry , rz
(required for second order analysis)

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-7

AQUA | Theoretical Principles

Hint
The Finite Element Method is the default method of computation in version 2016 for all
polygonal thick cross-sections.

If necessary, one could switch to any of the remaining analysis methods by means of the CTRL
option prior to the definition of a cross-section or in the cross-section editor.

It is also worth noting that cross-sections defined in version 2014 when reopened in version
2016 will automatically be converted by default to FEM cross-sections with the following con-
version scheme:

CTRL STYP 0 ⇒ CTRL STYP FORC

CTRL STYP 1 to 3 ⇒ CTRL STYP FEM
CTRL STYP 15 ⇒ CTRL STYP FEMX
CTRL STYP 5 ⇒ CTRL STYP BEM 1
CTRL STYP 6 ⇒ CTRL STYP BEM 2
CTRL STYP 7 ⇒ CTRL STYP BEM 3

General Advantages
The Finite Element Method has several numerical and performance-related advantages over
the methods previously available in AQUA:

• provides a more stable and accurate approach for the elastic computation of torsional,
shear force and warping dependent properties and stresses
• provides a nonlinear incremental approach for the computation of plastic and other
nonlinear properties. FEM yields plausible values for the plastic shear forces and the
plastic torsional moment
• provides a more accurate estimation of the elastic limit forces Ne , My,e , Mz,e , Mb,e for
general cross-sections
• allows the direct computation of arbitrary geometry and complexity of hot sections with
HYDRA (thermal time-dependent analysis)
• provides symmetrical meshing of singly or doubly symmetrical cross-sections, thus en-
suring that symmetry of results is maintained and reduces numerical fluctuations of
derivatives (centroid, shear centre, points of symmetrical warping etc.)
• enables a detailed visualization of stresses and warpings with WINGRAF / Result
Viewer over the entirety of the domain

As with the remaining methods, one can also define none-effective parts, various isotropic /
anisotropic material models, shear cuts, reinforcements and construction stages which shall
be taken into account when constructing and meshing, interpolating, computing and post-
processing the model.

Secondary CDB
Upon activating the extended control option CTRL STYP FEMX the generated cross-sectional
mesh shall be saved into a databank which is located in a subdirectory pertaining to the project,

2-8 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | AQUA

entitled projectname_sections. For example, Section 1 would then be saved in the following
database: projectname_sections\section_0001.cdb. The created database is an important
feature which is necessary for HYDRA if the section is to be later on used in a thermal analysis
or in a column design. It is not recommended to activate this option unless one is explicitly
interested in the physical output details of the analysis as its creation may demand considerable
additional HDD space and writing time. Out of optimization reasons, the default setting is CTRL
STYP FEM ensuring that the mesh for each cross-section shall be created and kept only for
the period of the analysis.

Databases with meshes could be also imported into AQUA using the SECT FEM definition for
a freely defined cross-section. The user is also allowed to import sectional systems meshed
by SOFiMSHC 2D as a whole or group-wise via the same principle.

Graphical Results Output

If the input option SECT LTAU is defined by the user, WINGRAF could access the secondary
CDB containing the mesh and visualize the therein saved unit shear stresses over the entire
domain of the cross-section. The four unit shear stress profiles (MT1 = 1.0, Vy = 1.0 , Vz = 1.0
, MT2 = 1.0) shall be then grouped as load cases starting with the predefined LTAU number and
consequently each further increasing by one. WINGRAF allows in addition to that the definition
of shear cuts in the section, along which the unit results could be colourfully displayed.

The Animator could be used for a general graphical overview too. For most general pur-
poses, the Result Viewer would always extract the boundary warpings/stresses along those
quad edges belonging to the outer contours of the domain and save them in the main project
database, ready for visualization under the tree.

Hint
Explicitly defined stress points and single reinforcement bars shall not necessarily be
meshed in such a way that AQUA will always create a FE node at those locations. There-
fore results at those points are usually obtained via interpolation of results belonging to
the surrounding quads.

Mesh Quality
The quality of the FEM analysis depends entirely on how fine the underlying model is to be
discretized, i.e. the number of quad elements the mesh consists of. By default, AQUA aims at
providing a sufficiently reasonable mesh in order to obtain mechanically reasonably accurate
results for all cross-sectional elastic and plastic values, especially for steel shapes. One has
to however note that the last requirement is very difficult to be fulfilled for any possible input. It
is also a matter of compromise between accuracy, computational time and demand. More ge-
ometrically complex and involving, especially multi-domain / multi-material composite sections
might need further mesh densification in the zones of stress concentration, interfaces and fil-
lets. Same applies to sections which are to be subsequently undergoing thermal analysis with
HYDRA, where acceptable results can only be obtained with finer meshes. Before meshing a
model, AQUA determines for each subregion of the domain a corresponding mesh size which
is to be applied, also termed ”h-value”.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-9

AQUA | Theoretical Principles

Hint
The cross-sectional FE-mesh provided by AQUA using the default mesh parameters is
in most cases sufficient to obtain mechanically reasonably accurate results of all cross-
sectional elastic and plastic values.

For the cases where a denser or a coarser mesh is required on an overall level, a control option
is provided by means of which the user could :

• factorize the ”h-values” of all geometrical regions by the same predefined factor CTRL
HDIV factor [ -] . For example a factor of 0.5[ -] would mean that each subdomain is to be
scaled down to 50% of its originally defined by AQUA mesh density. Same effect could
be achieved by the alternative input 50 [ %] . A factor greater than 1.0[ -] or 100[ %] can
be also applied.
• a direct input of a global mesh size by CTRL HDIV mesh size [ mm or m] . In this case
AQUA determines the ratio of the input value to the internally computed ”h-value” and
applies the quotient as a factor on that region.

Since the mesh size cannot be uncontrollably rescaled, AQUA has fixed allowable internal
limits in the range [ 0.1 ... 5.0] or [ 10% ... 500%] . Any value inputted beyond this scope forces
the program to rescale it to the nearest extreme and yield a warning.

It is more than recommended to use the first option since an estimate of the ”h-values” is quite
cumbersome and is a function of several complex invariable criteria.

Hint
Reducing the mesh could result in overwhelmingly long analysis time, large databases
and excessive data output.

In order to avoid various meshing problems, one should bear in mind that polygons must not
intersect each other at one or more singular points. It is thoroughly possible for polygons to
intersect each other in various fashions, provided that the intersections are continuous and
generated intersection points are not singular points.

Integration Schemes
When integrating any FE-related properties, AQUA/AQB would always employ a Lobatto-
integration scheme. For some very special cases, further integration schemes are available
using CTRL SINT. The options are :

1 Integration scheme using only quad mid points (useful for fine meshes)
2 Integration scheme using only quad nodes
3 Lobatto-integration scheme with nodes and quad mid-points (default)

Hint
It is always recommended to use the Lobatto-Integration scheme (default setting) in order
to achieve optimum result accuracy at the cost of a negligibly higher computational time.
Nevertheless, the user should be aware that this option also produces the most output as

2-10 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | AQUA

(Hint continued...)

both FEM quad nodes and quad mid-points are being considered and additionally saved
into the database.

Advanced FEM analysis

The FEM method also allows for several far more complex effects such as plasticity to be
considered by the analysis of a cross-section:

1. CTRL OPT PLAS

The analysis of the shear related plastic properties (MT1,p , Vy,p , Vz,p , MT2,p ) for thick
(solid) FEM cross-sections is a complex task, especially if these values are to be computed
in a mechanically exact manner. It should be noted that in real engineering applications,
shear does not exist on its own and plastic values, required for interaction purposes and
checks, are often of controversial nature and in many cases it is recommended to refer to
standard tabulated values. There is a handful of resources on the topic, but it is in nearly
all the cases left to the engineer to take an adequate decision as to which plastic forces
and moments would mostly suit the nature of his needs. In order to allow for that, the
following two methods have been implemented into AQUA for CTRL OPT PLAS:
0 take all plastic values from standard cross-sectional tables
1 compute plastic shear-related properties using a FE-method of scaling the elas-
tic shear stresses flux (default)
+1*16 replace current method’s computed Vy,p and Vz,p by plastic forces based
on the scaled elastic shear areas
It is of importance to note that:
• Standard steel (solid) profiles PROF obtain their plastic values by default directly from
section tables, if they are defined without SECT (default CTRL PLAS 0):

PROF 1 MNO 1 TYPE IPE 300

PROF 2 MNO 1 TYPE IPE 300 DTYP S

If SECT is given before PROF, the plastic shear values are also taken from section
tables (default CTRL PLAS 0)

SECT 3 MNO 1
PROF 3 TYPE IPE 300 DTYP S

However, with an explicit input of CTRL PLAS 1 the method of the determination of
the plastic shear values can be modified to FE-method.

• Freely defined sections with SECT obtain their plastic values by default according to
the method they are computed with:

CTRL STYP FEMX

CTRL PLAS 17
SECT 7 MNO 1
PROF 7 TYPE IPE 300
POLY OPZ MNO 2
VERT 1 200 -200

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-11

AQUA | Theoretical Principles

VERT 2 200 +200

CTRL STYP BEM 3

SECT 8 MNO 1
PROF 8 TYPE IPE 300
POLY OPZ MNO 2
VERT 1 200 -200
VERT 2 200 +200

Section 7 will be handled by FEM with the enforced condition of using the standard
method PLAS 1 (default if nothing else specified) in combination with the condition of
using elastic shear areas for Vy,p and Vz,p . Section 8 shall be computed by BEM,
therefore none of the PLAS controls related to FEM is relevant here.
If the CTRL PLAS 0 option is explicitly activated for the sections above, section 7 will
obtain only the plastic values of the PROF definition in them, disregarding any further
elements in the section definition which might lead to dangerously small and thus
erroneous plastic values. Users are thus advised to use PLAS 0 only in cases where
a single profile is to be analyzed. Finally, section 8 will remain unaffected.
• Any of the obtained in AQUA plastic characteristic values can be overwritten or
rescaled if needed as per cf. SV.
The example input below illustrates the activation of the advanced algorithm with the
forced condition of overwriting the computed plastic shear forces with the ones obtained
from the elastic shear areas. Example input file: [Link]/english/fem_plastic.dat

Thermal FEM analysis

FEM cross-section of arbitrary shape and material composition can be easily used for time-
dependent thermal analysis with HYDRA. The user is kindly advised to consult the manual
of HYDRA and in particular the definitions of SECT and MEXT in AQUA for more detailed
information on the underlying workflow.

2.8.2 Boundary Element Method

The analysis with the displacement method may be also done with the Integral equation method
(also termed Boundary Element Method) developed by Katz [2]. Only the cross section contour
is discretized into multiple so-called ”boundary elements”. A linear formulation of the warping is
made for each element and the boundary condition is satisfied by a Galerkin weighted residual.

The number of elements determines the accuracy of the solution. In the case of a square,
for instance, the unit lateral warping on all the axes of symmetry is zero. A non-vanishing
solution can therefore be obtained only by defining at least four elements per side. AQUA
uses each polygon edge as one element, which can be further subdivided depending on its
size. Duplicate edges are automatically removed. As the results along the edges will vary only
linearly, it is strongly recommended to use the input value CTRL HMIN or the item SMAX in
POLY in order to have a coarse subdivision visible.

Internally a finer subdivision is however needed. Since a finer subdivision increases the com-
putational time with a power of two or three, the subdivision should not be made too fine. The
user can control the mesh size as absolute or relative by CTRL HDIV / SDIV.

2-12 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | AQUA

CTRL SDIV 0 No subdivision

CTRL SDIV 1 maximum 1/2
CTRL SDIV 2 maximum 1/4
CTRL SDIV 3 maximum 1/8
CTRL SDIV 4 maximum 1/16
CTRL SDIV 5 maximum 1/32
etc.

Under no circumstances are the results of this method to be accepted uncritically. It is a

numerical approximate method. Local singularities of the shear stresses, such as those at
re-entrant corners for example, can generate rather high stresses.

2.8.3 Force Method

The force method is implemented in AQUA/AQB only for ”statically determinate”, i.e. simply
connected cross sections.

The shear force components are then calculated by the classic formula
V S
τ = · (2.15)
 b

However, each of the four initial values is inadequate in this formula:

• V is only valid for prismatic beams with constant normal force

• I has to be generalized with Swains formula
• For S the separated part of the cross section is not known for multiple connected sections.
• Shear stress does not need to be constant across the width b

The separated part of the cross section is defined on the positive side of a shear cut, which is
to the left of the cut’s direction for the positive face of the section. It is extremely important to
input the sections correctly, and especially to maintain their sequence.

For multiple connected cross sections, the difference of the normal stress is in equilibrium
only with the sum of all shear stress. Thus the user must either know the location of zero
shear stress or specify the distribution factors of the shear to the multiple segments of the cut.
Problematic are those where the modulus of the sectional part is very small.

Since in cracked sections the common usage is only based on the force method, these dis-
tribution values FVY and FVZ are needed in any case for reinforced concrete sections. The
displacement method allows however to establish reasonable estimates for many cases. Then
the entering and leaving shear stresses have different signs but nearly the same value. Thus
very large distribution factors are obtained, even if the sum of these still should remain 1.0

Torsional stress analysis is not elementary even for the force method (stress function with soap
film analogy). The resistance areas for the torsional shear stresses are therefore prescribed
by two values per section. The first value defines the shear at mid-area (Bredt’s equivalent
section). The second value defines the increase along the cut.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-13

AQUA | Theoretical Principles

2.8.4 Equivalent Hollow Cross Sections

The shear is primarily defined by resistances for the shear stresses in variant locations. While
the old DIN 1045 relied on elastic stress values, most modern design codes use equivalent
mean stress values in an equivalent section.

The recommended width of the equivalent section is in general twice the distance of the re-
inforcement to the outer edge. If the width is small, the kernel area is larger an the required
reinforcement areas are smaller. However the compressive stress in the concrete is larger and
if the allowed limits are exceede, the user should specify a larger width explicitly.

For the design of an equivalent hollow section we have additional integral values:

• A mean torsional shear stress which, after being multiplied by the width of the partial sec-
tion, must be covered by reinforcement. This corresponds to a section modulus for the
shear flow.
• A mean effective transverse shear or an effective width to be multiplied with the shear stress
at the mid of the equivalent hollow section to obtain the design shear flow from shear force.

To obtain these values in AQUA with CTRL STYP FEM/FEMX or BEM 2/3 the elastic shear
stresses are integrated over the total width. For a true hollow sections, this is the design value
directly, for an equivalent hollow section, the moment of the shear components is converted to
a constant shear flux across the width of the equivalent section (Figure 2.2).

beff

btot
Figure 2.2: Elastic and constant design shear in equivalent hollow cross section

Mt
Z
Ms = τs · r · dr = Mt · 1/ Wtm · btot − beƒ ƒ



≤ · btot − beƒ ƒ (2.16)
2Ak

These values will be slightly larger in general as the equivalent hollow section will have smooth
corners in the elastic analysis. If a distinct value of Ak is defined or Ak is given with a torsional
reinforcement in a section, this value will be used to establish an upper limit on the torsional
shear flow.

The principal compressive stress will be calculated with the equivalent width from the design
shear flow.

2.8.5 Shear Cuts

The user normally uses the command CUT to define a so called cut through the sectional
geometry where a check of the shear stresses should take place. Each cut is assigned an

2-14 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | AQUA

identification, which consists of three characters. The cut can be defined parallel to an axis or
as a free form polygon line. Every segment has its own material number and it will only cut
through cross section elements with the same material number. Gaps between the segments
will be closed by means of virtual connections. The width of the substitute torsional cross
section is available as a special option for the description of equivalent hollow cross sections
of reinforced and prestressed concrete. Two partial cuts are generated for each section in this
case.

If the user does not supply any input, one or two axis-parallel cuts will be created through the
elastic centre. This is generally not sufficient even for a simple T-Beam, nor for composite
sections, where the reference material number of the section is not necessarily represented at
that location. The user will see a warning for general sections therefore.

CTRL SCUT allows the user to control how many of these standard cuts will be generated
(0/1/2).

The cut can dissect the cross section at several locations creating partial cuts. Each partial cut
has a direction s and three defined points of interest: beginning (A), middle (M) and end (E):

T M
s z
E E A
n
N
A
M

Sign convention Thin wall equivalent

cross section

Figure 2.3: Shear section

The internal forces perpendicular to the cut M and N act in such way that positive axial forces
cause tensile stresses across the cut, and positive moments cause tensile stresses at the
End-Point.

Multiply connected cross section types require special considerations:

Several polygons of the same material are united before the sectional check. In case of com-
posite cross sections it may be helpful to pay attention to the cut direction.

In the definition of cuts across several materials the user must take care that each segment of
the cut has the correct material number, because a cut will dissect only parts having the same
material number. It makes a difference for the horizontal shear in a composite flange if a dowel
is before or behind the cut.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-15

AQUA | Theoretical Principles

Not solvable, no detached part.

Solvable, the shear force is distributed

right and left. Not optimal for biaxial
loading.

Solvable, however the contour cut must

be located at the zero point of the shear
force. Not suitble for biaxial loading.

Solvable, however the user must specify

the the component factors. Suitable for
biaxial loading.

Figure 2.4: Shear sections in hollow cross section

Cuts through cross sections with ”open air” between their parts can not be analysed as the
section does not hit any elements. A similar problem occurs if a cut has the wrong material
number. This may happen especially with the standard cuts through the elastic centre.

Not solvable, since the cut does not in-

tersect any elements of the section.

Figure 2.5: Problem case

Some additional advice applies to oblique cuts. Since the shear force at an oblique cut does
not vary significantly compared to the straight cut, however the width of the cut does. Since the
selection of an inappropriate cut direction can result in the analysis of too small shear stresses.

2.9 Shear Stresses in Thin-Walled Sections

The calculation of shear stresses in thin walled sections is however much easier as opposed
to the shear analysis of solid continua. i.e. there are closed solutions possible which do not
depend on the subdivision of elements. The theoretical background has been developed and
published by Schade [3].

2-16 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | AQUA

AQUA uses the deformation method in the frame of a simplified FE model for thin-walled sec-
tions in all cases. The CTRL option STYP has in here no effects at all, but you may specify
explicit values via SV.

2.10 Plastic forces

The calculation of fully plastic forces is a very complex task. The single values for each force
component may be evaluated easily, but the interaction of all forces and moments is a rather
extensive numerical problem. With AQUA/AQB one has the following choices:

• Estimates for standard sections

Plastic normal force and bending moments can be evaluated precisely. For the plastic shear
force Vy,p the plastic shear area is taken according to Eurocode including the additional
fillet areas, which is a deviation from the simpler formulas given in DIN 18800 for steel
shapes. For Vz,p the fillets are ignored. For Mt,p a more conservative approximation
is used for thin walled sections, whereas for thick sections, the exact solution given by
Bäcklund/Akesson is used. It should be also noted that plastic forces and moments for
tabulated profiles shall always be transformed into the rotated system if the profiles are
rotated around their default state.
• Evaluation of plastic forces using the real geometry (AQUA - Full Version)
For thin walled sections of arbitrary shape and composition, the plastic normal force and
bending moments are evaluated precisely. Plastic shear forces Vy,p , Vz,p may be eval-
uated rather well (neglecting some plastic shear centre effects). The method that AQUA
currently uses for this purpose is based on scaling the elastic stresses to their yield limit,
which does in the general case provide a slight, but negligible overestimation of the exact
theoretical values, as in the case of Mt,p .
For solid sections of arbitrary shape and composition, either computed by BEM or FEM,
the plastic normal force and bending moments are evaluated precisely. For torsion how-
ever, it is difficult in the very general case to clearly distinguish between open and closed
sections. For thick polygonal sections, a pure sum of areas would lead to significantly
overestimated values for all shear problems.
With standard BEM, as well as with FEM solely in combination with CTRL PLAS +16, AQUA
will use the shear deformation area for Vy,p and Vz,p , being up to 20% on the safe side.
If standard FEM is used (PLAS 1), AQUA will apply a scaling based on the elastic torsional
and shear stress in the section, thus partially overestimating both torsional and shear plastic
values (see also Section 2.8.1). It is very often questionable how these values (in particular
the plastic shear) compare to standard tabulated values. In reality, each resource uses a
slightly different mechanical definition of the area that is to be considered as fully plastic
and active. Nevertheless, using the PLAS 1 method is for design purposes adequate, safe
and computationally not expensive.
Finally, enforcing PLAS 0 for standard steel sections (also default in AQUA) is highly rec-
ommendable for design purposes.
• Evaluation of nonlinear interaction values for the real cross-section geometry (AQB - record
NSTR)
With this method, all prerequisites like compatibility, yield criteria and equilibrium are ful-
filled. However the evaluation is always done for a distinct force/moment combination. Thus

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-17

AQUA | Theoretical Principles

the limiting value has to be found iteratively.

2.11 Program Limits

The following program limits hold:

Materials 999
Materials per cross section 31
Cross sections 9999
Longitudinal reinforcement layers 10
Polygon vertices per polygon 255
Shear sections per cross section 255
Shear reinforcement layers 15
Construction stage per cross section 31

2-18 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3 Input Description

AQUA allows the user to define general cross sections with arbitrary geometry and materials.
For simple sections and materials you do not need a special license, but for all sections starting
with record SECT you need a license for AQUA.

Before defining a section you have to specify the materials. Materials are addressed by an
arbitrary number. Please note, that by keeping track of construction phases in AQBS, it is
assumed that materials with higher material numbers were added at a later time.

A standard section is defined by just one input record. All sectional values will be calculated
including torsional and shear properties. The maximum components for all stresses are known,
but a detailed analysis at different locations within the section will not take place.

SVAL Sections without geometry

SREC Rectangular section, plate, T-beam and suspender beam
EDGB Edge beam
SHRW Shear wall
SCIT Circular and annular sections via Diameter / Thickness
PROF Rolled Steel shapes
CABL Cable sections
SECT General section (AQUA licence required)

With AQUA cross sections can be redefined at any time during the processing of the project
without affecting other defined sections. However if any material definition is made, all existing
cross sections are deleted. The distributions of reinforcements and stresses are deleted too,
unless otherwise specified with CTRL REST.

Freely defined cross sections always start with the record SECT, which specifies the cross
section number. All subsequent input records describe this one cross section, which may
consist of several partial cross sections (external perimeter, inner perimeter, reinforcement
layout etc.). The input for a cross section is concluded either by the next SECT record or by
two END records.

3.1 Input Language

The input occurs in a free format with the CADINP input language (see the general manual
SOFiSTiK: ’Basics’).

3.2 Units
SOFiSTiK programs offer the possibility to carry out all input and output of data in engineering
units. A number of unit sets are provided for this purpose, which are preset according to
the design code used in the given project. This default can additionally be changed for each
program run separately using the keyword PAGE. More information about unit sets can be
found in the general SOFiSTiK manual, section ’Units’.

Three categories of units are distinguished:

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-1

AQUA | Input Description

mm Fixed unit. Input is always required in the specified unit.

[mm] Explicit unit. Input defaults to the specified unit. Alternatively, an explicit as-
signment of a related unit is possible (eg. 2.5[m] ).

[mm] 1011 Implicit unit. Implicit units are categorised semantically and denoted by a cor-
responding identity number (shown in green). Valid categories referring to the
unit ”length” are, for example, geodetic elevation, section length and thickness.
The default unit for each category is defined by the currently active (design code
specific) unit set. This input default can be overridden as described above. The
specified unit in square brackets corresponds to the default for unit set 5 (Eu-
rocodes, NORM UNIT 5).

For sections the units for all dimesnions are expected in [ mm] in general, the unit sets 0, 3 and
4 expect [ m] , the Unit-Set 1 [ cm] . For reinforcement areas values are expected in [ cm2 ] ,
the unit sets 6 and 7 expect [ mm2 ] .

The following unit sets are provided:

0= Standard units (m, kN, sec with some historic deviations)

1= German buildings (sections in cm, system in m)
2= German steel construction, (sections mm,cm2 ,dm4 , system in m)
3= Bridge construction (like 0 but internal forces in MN instead of kN)
4= Soil Mechanics (m, kN, sec)
5= Structural Engineering (sections in mm, system in m)
6= Metric system (All dimensions in mm, loads in kN)
7= Mechanical (All dimensions in mm, loads in N)
8= U.S. Customary Units (AASHTO)
9= U.S. Customary Units (ACI/AISC)

The default unit set (UNIT) of a corresponding design code is described in the record NORM
at the respective design code in the tables.

3.3 Input Records

The following records are defined:

Record Items
CTRL OPT VAL VAL2
NORM DC NDC COUN CAT ALT WIND SNOW
SEIS
MATE NO E MUE G K GAM GAMA
ALFA E90 M90 OAL OAF SPM FY
FT TYPE TITL
MAT NO E MUE G K GAM GAMA
Table continued on next page.

3-2 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Record Items
ALFA EY MXY OAL OAF SPM TITL
FLAY NO T MNO BETA TITL
MLAY NO T0 NR0 T1 NR1 T2 NR2
T3 NR3 T4 NR4 T5 NR5 T6
NR6 T7 NR7 T8 NR8 T9 NR9
TITL
NMAT NO TYPE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12
BMAT NO C CT CRAC YIEL MUE COH
DIL GAMB TYPE MREF H
HMAT NO TYPE TEMP KXX KYY KZZ KXY
KXZ KYZ S NSP A B C
QMAX TK TITL
CONC NO TYPE FCN FC FCT FCTK EC
QC GAM ALFA SCM TYPR FCR ECR
FBD FFAT FCTD FEQR FEQT GMOD KMOD
GC GF MUEC TITL
STEE NO TYPE CLAS FY FT FP ES
QS GAM ALFA scm EPSY EPST REL1
REL2 R K1 FDYN FYC FTC TMAX
GMOD KMOD QS TITL
TIMB NO TYPE CLAS EP G E90 QH
QH90 GAM ALFA SCM FM FT0 FT90
FC0 FC90 FV FVR FVB FM90 OAL
OAF KMOD KMO1 KMO2 KMO3 KMO4 KDEF
TMAX RHO TITL
MASO NO STYP SCLA MCLA E G MUE
GAM ALFA SCM E90 M90 OAL OAF
FCN FC FT FV FHS FTB TITL
SSLA EPS SIG TYPE TEMP EPST TS MUET
MNOC FCTF
MEXT NO EXP TYPE VAL VAL1 VAL2 ...
VAL9
BORE NO X Y Z NX NY NZ
ALF TITL
BLAY S MN0 ES MUE DES VARI PMAX
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-3

AQUA | Input Description

Record Items
PMAL C PHI
BBAX S1 S2 K0 K1 K2 K3 M0
C0 TANR TAND KSIG D0 D2 CA0
CA2
BBLA S1 S2 K0 K1 K2 K3 P0
P1 P2 P3 PMA1 PMA2 CL0 CL1
CL2 CL3 SM0 SM2
SMAT NO LTYP MTYP P+ P- VY+ VY-
VZ+ VZ- MY+ MY- MZ+ MZ- ALPH
P1 P2 TITL
SFLA NO U F S SH FP TYPE
LEV TITL
LCA NO TYPE PHAS VAL
SVAL NO MNO A AY AZ IT IY
IZ IYZ CM YSC ZSC YMIN YMAX
ZMIN ZMAX WT WVY WVZ NPL VYPL
VZPL MTPL MYPL MZPL BCYZ TITL
SREC NO H B HO BO SO SU
SS MNO MRF MRFL RTYP ASO ASU
DASO DASU DASS A AMIN AMAX ASL
INCL REF YM ZM IT AY AZ
BCYZ SPT INTE CINT MUE BEFF BDL
TITL
EDGB NO H B HO BO SO SU
SS MNO MRF MRFL REF YM ZM
FSYM FLIP ASO ASU DASO DASU DASS
A AMIN AMAX PASU ASL INCL IT
AY AZ SPT CUTZ CUTF INTE CINT
MUE BEFF BDL TITL
SHRW NO B L SS SZ+ SZ- MNO
MRF MRFL A D RTYP LZ+ AZ+
DZ+ RZ+ LZ- AZ- DZ- RZ- TITL
SCIT NO D T SA SI MNO
MRF MRFL RTYP ASA ASI DAS A
ASL IT AY AZ TITL
CABL NO D TYPE INL MNO F K
Table continued on next page.

3-4 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Record Items
W KE REF GAMR TITL
SECT NO MNO MRF ALPH YM ZM FSYM
BTYP BCY BCZ KTZ TITL
- CS NO TITL ATIL
- SV IT AK YSC ZSC CM CMS AY
AZ AYZ LEVY LEVZ MNO DEFF FACE
FACG AG
- POLY TYPE MNO YM ZM DY DZ SMAX
EXP REFP REFD REFS
- - VERT NO Y Z R PHI TYPE EXP
REFP REFD REFS
- CIRC NO Y Z R MNO EXP
REFP REFD REFS REFR
- NEFF TYPE YMIN ZMIN YMAX ZMAX MNO WIDT
NO SMIN SMAX
REFI RFDI RFSI REFA RFDA RFSA
- CUT NO YB ZB YE ZE NS MS
WTM WTD MNO MRF LAY ASUP
OUT TYPE VYFK VZFK INCL BMAX
BRED BCT MUE SXE TANA REFA
RFDA RFSA REFE RFDE REFS
- PANE NO YB ZB YE ZE T MNO
REFA RFDA RFSA REFE RFDE RFSE
R PHI OUT FIXB FIXE TYPE
AS ASMA LAY MRF TORS DAS
A
- PLAT NO YB ZB YE ZE T MNO
REFA RFDA RFSA REFE RFDE RFSE
R PHI OUT FIXB FIXE TYPE
- WELD NO YB ZB YE ZE T MNO
REFA RFDA RFSA REFE RFDE RFSE
- PROF NO TYPE Z1 Z2 Z3 MNO ALPH
YM ZM REFP REFD REFS REFR
DTYP SYM REF MREF VD VB
VS VT VR1 VR2 VB2 VT2
CW BCYZ WU1 WU2 WU3
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-5

AQUA | Input Description

Record Items
- SPT NO Y Z WTY WTZ WVY WVZ
SIGY TEFF CDYN SIGC TAUC MNO
FIX REFP REFD REFS
- SFLA NO U F S SH FP TYPE
LEV TITL
- WPAR CS KR ICE TRAF YMIN YMAX ZMIN
ZMAX YREF ZREF CW ALF
REFI RFDI RFSI REFA RFDA RFSA REFP
- WIND ALPH CWY CWZ CWT REF CHYD CLAT
S AG VR0 V0 ... VR19 V19
- RF NO Y Z AS ASMA LAY MRF
TORS D AR SIG TEMP REFP
REFD REFS
- LRF NO YB ZB YE ZE AS ASMA
LAY MRF TORS D A DIST AR
REFA RFDA RFSA REFE RFDE RFSE
R PHI
- CRF NO Y Z R PHI AS ASMA
LAY MRF TORS D A DIST AR
REFP REFD REFS REFR
- CURF H EXP AS ASMA LAY MRF
TORS D A DIST AR CENT
TVAR NAME VAL SCOP CMNT
INTE NO NS0 NS1 S NREF ICS ...
ICS9
IMPO MAT SECT FROM
EXPO MAT SECT TO PASS
ECHO OPT VAL VAL2

The records HEAD, END and PAGE are described in the general manual SOFiSTiK: ’Basics’.

3-6 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

ECHO general parameters

CONC

SSLA
Definitions of materials (can be
skipped, if not all cross sec-
STEE
tions are redefined)

SSLA

TIMB
Type of cross section

SECT SECT SREC EDGB SHRW SCIT

SV SV

POLY PANE

VERT PLAT

CURF PROF

PROF WELD

CIRC

SPT SPT

CUT

RF RF

LRF LRF

CRF

END

Figure 3.1: General parameters

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-7
AQUA | Input Description

3.4 CTRL – Control of Analysis

CTRL

Item Description Unit Default

OPT A literal from the following list: LT FULL

REST Restart options
(like deletion of data at restart)
FACE Standard view on section
POS = positive face
NEG = negative face
or numerical value
RFCS Basic reinforcement for computing ideal
cross section values
HMIN max. length of polygon edges
HDIV Mesh density scaling for FEM / max. ele-
ment size for BEM
SDIV relative element size for BEM
SINT Special Options for FEM / BEM
HTOL max. stitch of circular arcs
STYP Method of shear computation for solid sec-
tions
PLAS Method of plastic shear computation for FE
solid sections
FORC Method of (plastic) limit forces
SCUT Number of standard shear sections
FIXL max. factor for thickness step for buckling
panel detection
REFD Control for the input of references

VAL The value of the option − *

VAL2 Additional value for the option − *

The CTRL options may be defined at any location within the input data. However if they are
intended to be different for individual sections it is mandatory to define them before the sections
intended to use them. Within a restart CTRL REST 3 all defined options will be effective for all
reanalyzed sections.

CTRL REST controls what AQUA should do with existing data in the database. As default
AQUA will erase everything if materials are defined, and only the basic reinforcements, limit
stresses and beam stiffness if only sections are defined. This is usually the best choice to

3-8 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

avoid unforeseeable results. In some cases though it is desirable to process these results
further. This can take place without problems only, if the assignment of the layers and the use
of the material numbers in the individual cross sections are not changed.

0 deletes all materials, cross sections and all beam design results of the following pro-
grams in the database (default)
1 keeps all materials and cross sections and all beam design results of the following
programs in the database
2 re-calculation of all cross sections and materials only when a material is input and
also retention the beam design results in the database. When no material is new
defined only the new defined cross sections are calculated and retention the beam
design results in the database.
CTRL REST 2 nn also forces the calculation of the cross-section nn.
3 re-calculation of all cross sections and materials even when no material is new de-
fined and retention the beam design results in the database

CTRL FACE defines the standard view on the section. While the physical orientation in space
is only specified by the orientation of the local beam coordinate system, the possible values for
graphical views on the section are defined that the literal POS and all positive numbers define
a view on the positive face (i.e. in the inverse direction of the beam or axis) while the literal
NEG and all negative values define a view on the negative face (ie. along the direction of the
beam or axis) :

POS y-axis to the left, z-axis downwards (default for AQUA)

NEG y-axis to the right, z-axis downwards (default for Cross Section Editor)
1,3 rotation by 0 or 180 degrees (y-axis horizontal)
2,4 rotation by 90 or 270 degrees (y-axis vertical)
>4 rotated against the default by VAl degrees

CTRL RFCS controls whether the basic reinforcement should be considered in the calculation
of the cross section values:

0 do not consider
1 do not consider for Boundary Element Method ("CTRL STYP BEM"), otherwise con-
sider for sections with more than one material (default)
2 consider for all sections (also for circular sections SCIT and edge beam section
EDGB, but not for rectangular sections SREC)
3 consider also effect on dead load (the weight of the concrete should be reduced in
that case)

HMIN defines a maximum allowed length for linear or circular polygon edges. (Default: no limit)

HTOL defines the maximum allowed stitch (error) of an approximation of a circular arc by a
polygon. This is applicable to fillets and arcs. Default is: 0.0035. There are two alternative
ways of defining an allowed stitch:

• HTOL factor [ -] - define the stitch in the way that all circles will use the same angular
resolution, which is nicer for visualization. But for a small radius below 50 mm the angle
of the segments will be enlarged up to a factor of 6.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-9

AQUA | Input Description

• HTOL stitch size [ mm or m] - a direct input of a stitch size.

In both cases the angles of the segments will not be taken less than 1 degree or larger than 30
degrees.

HDIV defines a maximum element length for the boundary elements (BEM). In case of FE
cross-sections, HDIV shall be interpreted as mesh density scaling. There are two alternative
ways of applying a scale factor on the mesh density:

• HDIV factor [ -] - for example a factor of 0.5 [ -] would mean that each subdomain
is to be scaled down to 50% of its originally defined by AQUA mesh density. Same
effect could be achieved by the alternative input 50[ %] . A factor greater than 1.0 [ -] or
100[ %] can be also applied.
• HDIV mesh size [ mm or m] - a direct input of a global mesh size.
In this case AQUA determines the ratio of the input value to the internally computed
”region element size” and applies the quotient as a factor on that region.

Since the mesh size cannot be uncontrollably rescaled, AQUA has fixed allowable internal
limits in the range [ 0.1 ... 5.0] or [ 10% ... 500 %] . Any value inputted beyond this scope
forces the program to rescale it to the nearest extreme and yield a warning.

SDIV defines a relative desired element length per edge for the boundary elements. For finite
elements this should be kept to the default of 0 and if not so, the value will be ignored.

0 no explicit subdivision
1 maximum 1/2
2 maximum 1/4
3 maximum 1/8
4 maximum 1/16
5 maximum 1/32 (Default BEM)

A snap distance (always in m) for the detection of cross section parts connecting together can
be defined additionally at item VAL2. The value SDIV 4 0.001 defines 1 mm, as snap measure.

The detailed background of STYP and SCUT are explained in Section 2.8.

STYP controls the analysis of shear stresses in general solid sections:

STYP FEM Finite Element Method - for all shear related cross-sectional properties
(default)
STYP FEMX Finite Element Method as described above, but with a secondary
database containing the section mesh in a subfolder
STYP BEM Boundary Element Method with default sub option: 1 for concrete, 3 oth-
erwise)
STYP BEM 1 Boundary Element Method only for It and location of shear centre ysc ,zsc
(Default for concrete)
STYP BEM 2 Boundary Element Method for torsion and Force Method for shear using
shear cuts

3-10 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

STYP BEM 3 Boundary Element Method for torsion, shear deformation areas are also
determined
STYP FORC Force Method

Hint
The default of version 2014 can be set with CTRL STYP BEM. However, for rectangular,
T-Beam and circular explicit concrete sections, the values Ay and Az must be set to 0.0
explicitly if required.

PLAS defines the method of plastic shear computation:

0 Take all plastic values from standard cross-sectional tables

1 Compute plastic shear-related properties according to the selected computational
method at CTRL STYP (default)

For FE solid sections a FE-method of scaling the elastic shear stresses flux is
used.

+1*16 Replace current method’s computed Vy,p and Vz,p by plastic forces based on
the scaled elastic shear areas
For more information the user is kindly advised to consult Sections 2.8 and 2.10
of the AQUA manual for a detailed description of the control options and their
peculiarities.

FORC defines the method of (plastic) limit forces computation:

- Computation of positive limit forces. Negative forces are computed if tensile

strength and compression strength are different or a negative normal force (com-
pression) was defined via SV NPLC (default)
TENS Only computation of positive limit forces (even if the strengths are different)
COMP Always computation of negative limit forces too (even if the strengths are equal)

By specifying the additional literal BUCK at item VAL2 it is possible to activate the
considering of buckling (reduction of cross section area) of thin walled elements
for a negative normal force -N (compression) or in the compression zone of the
bending moment My or Mz. Considering of buckling is not the default setting
because bracings are normally not applied in the design phase.

By specifying the additional literal GAM at item VAL3 it is possible to define the
material safety factor for the design forces via item VAL4:
- Material safety for cross sectional design (γM0 of steel) (default)
M0 Material safety for cross sectional design (γM0 of steel)
SCM Material safety for stability check
The material safety of single materials can be modified via the material records,
e.g. for γM0 of a steel with ’STEE SCM0 ...’.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-11

AQUA | Input Description

Input example for negative limit forces considering buckling with material safety for stability
check (γM1 ):

CTRL FORC COMP BUCK GAM SCM

The basic reinforcement is applied if it is switched on (CTRL RFCS, 3.4).

For a composite section according to EN 1994-1-1, ch. 6.7. the concrete is used with 0.85*fcd
in the compression zone of Npl and Mpl (ch. [Link], [Link]). There are similar requirements
in the codes SIA, AASHTO, DECRETO MINISTERIALE and so on. A composite section is
detected if there are only steel and concrete materials and if the reference material is a steel
material.

A concrete section is detected if the reference material is a concrete material. Then no plastic
limit forces are computed, except of in case of a ’hot’ design (temperatures from program
HYDRA), even if steel materials exists.

SINT controls for the type of FEM integration scheme:

1 element center only (useful for fine meshes)

2 element nodes only
3 Lobatto integration with nodes and element centers (Default)
4 Gauss-Legendre integration, gauss integration points only
5 Gauss-Legendre integration and element centers

Thin walled sections are always calculated with a FEM-type method. For solid sections the
more advanced algorithms may create high stress values at singularities. To disable these
values for the design, it is possible to select STYP with option 1, defining that for all shear cuts
the simplified values according to the force method are used. If options 2 or 3 are used, the
integral mean values will be used for this case and all other stress points will get the calculated
values.

SCUT controls the generation of the two standard cuts parallel to the coordinate axis and the
standard stress points for solid cross-sections:

+0 do not generate default shear cuts

+1 create main shear cut (horizontal cut for Vz) at elastic center in concrete cross-
sections
+2 create both default shear cuts (horizontal cut for Vz, vertical cut for Vy) at elastic
center in concrete cross-sections
+8 shear is evaluated according to the force method for the gross section instead of
the effective section.

and the control for stress points (VAL = VAL+16*nn)

+0 do not generated stress points

+1 corner points with maximum distance in original coordinate system (Points 1:4)
+2 Intersection of principal axis with section (Points 5:8)
+4 Intersection of principal axis with convex hull (Points 5:8)

3-12 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

+8 with original coordinate system instead of principal axes (Points 5:8)

+16 use only z-ordinates (uni-axial bending) (Points 5:8)
+32 principal axes instead of original coordinate system (Points 1:4)

As the input of references is best done with relative offsets (default: CTRL REFD 1), the
export however with the actual absolute coordinates, the input CTRL REFD 0 allows to change
the default to the definition in absolute coordinates. In that case it is also allowed to make
a reference to an element defined later in the input stream, but all coordinates will be taken
exactly as they have been specified. Reference IDs should be unique within every element
type. As long as the sections are only defined via CADINP in specified sequence, same Ids
may be used however. With CTRL REFD 2+xx the algorithm may be changed to the old purely
sequential scheme for test purpose.

3.5 Materials
SOFiSTiK supports a large number of different material descriptions. All will be addressed by
a unique material number and should in general be usable everywhere. The default for the
material type and any national deviant parameters is established dependent on the selected
design code NORM. In some cases parameters may be also changed by the selection of a
country code. All values may be modified explicitly if required.

The basic properties are entered via the records:

NORM Selection of a design code or a design code family

MATE General material definition including strength
CONC Concrete material
STEE Steel and other metallic materials
TIMB Timber/lumber and Fibre materials
MASO Masonry / Brickwork
FLAY Layered composite material for QUAD elements

For any material CONC, STEE, TIMB and MASO a unique literal for the material subtype and
a class value are required. The class is always a string with integer numbers and/or optional
characters. In general these two values define all material properties (Some require also a
density or a thickness) It is then possible to change any value individually, although there are
a few implicit dependencies.

These records are mutually exclusive but may be enhanced by other records:

BMAT Elastic support

NMAT Non-linear material properties for MAT/MATE (ASE/TALPA for QUAD and BRIC
elements)
HMAT Material definitions for HYDRA (Thermal or Seepage problems)
SSLA Uniaxial strain-stress law for materials CONC/STEE/TIMB/MASO
MEXT Special material properties

Input of material is possible in all parts of the program system. However, it is self-evident that
not all parameters are used for all types of analysis or system. Each material has a standard

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-13

AQUA | Input Description

name given by its classification, which might be extended by the user. If the user wants to
replace the standard completely, he has to start his own text with an exclamation mark (e.g.
’!my own Text’) or to quote it a second time (eg. " ’my own Text’ ").

Properties of materials must be distinguished according to whether they are properties which
are close to the realistic behaviour (e.g. for dynamic calculations) or to which have some
lower or upper limit to be multiplied with a safety factor for the calculation of an ultimate load-
bearing capacity. Whereas the safety factors were formerly assigned more-or-less at random,
sometimes to the load and sometimes to the material, more recent regulations (Eurocode)
provide a clearer separation between safety factors for the loads and factors for the material.
However, since the material safety factors still depend on the nature of the load or the type of
design, it will not be possible to define all safety factors with the material itself.

SOFiSTiK provides therefore the definition of:

• Properties and safety factors for the standard design

• Mean values or calculation values and safety factors for nonlinear serviceability and defor-
mation analysis

If some design codes (DIN 18800, DIN 1045-1) apply additional safety-factors to the mean
values, this may be defined with the stress-strain relation via SSLA. The safety factor defined
with the material will thus be used only for the full plastic forces in AQUA.

Note: The following pages are valid in all details only for AQUA, for other programs
(SOFiMSHB) deviations are possible due to older versions with missing or changed items.

Note: Hints for material properties of strange materials may be found on the internet at www.
[Link] (The A to Z of Materials).

3-14 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.6 NORM – Default Design Code

NORM

Item Description Unit Default

DC Design code family LT EN

EN Eurocodes
DIN German Standard
OEN Austrian Standard
SIA Swiss Standard
AS Standard
BS British Standard
IS Indian Standard
US US Standards (ACI etc.)
GB Chinese Building Codes
NF French Standard
UNI Italian Standard
UNE Spanish Standard
SS Swedish Standard
DS Danish Standard
NS Norwegian Standard
SP Russian Standard
NZS New Zealand Standard
SFS Finnish Standard
NEN Netherlands Standard
NBN Belgian Standard
NBR Brazilian Standard
ZA South African Standard

NDC Designation of a specific design code Lt16 -

COUN Country code for boxed values within EN − *
CAT Category or Class Lt4 -/!

LON Geographic longitude ◦ 0

LAT Geographic latitude ◦ 45
G Gravity acceleration m/ sec2 *
ALT Altitude above sea level m 0.0
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-15

AQUA | Input Description

Item Description Unit Default

WIND Wind zone Lt4 *

SNOW Snow zone Lt4 *
SEIS Seismic zone Lt4 *
WCAT Terrain category for wind Lt4 *

UNIT Selection of a set of units − *

LANG Selection of a output language default − *

Many defaults for materials, superposition and design are selected according to the selected
design code and an optional country code and all the other data provided with this record. It is
therefore requested to specify this data with the beginning of the project.

A redefinition of the design code after the definition of actions or load cases have been
defined or the editing of the INI-File to include ”missing” materials does not comply with
the provisions of SOFiSTiK for a proper use of the software.

It is possible to redefine the design code NORM temporarily for the design (eg. concrete / steel)
if the parameters of the actions remain the same. As this might have some special risque, the
user should use this option thoroughly.

Although there are still explicit code fragments in the software unavoidable, many of the defaults
are specified in so called INI-Files located in the SOFiSTiK directory. The name of the matching
INI-file is derived from the given data as DC_NDC.INI.

Some properties (e.g. Eurocode) are dependant on national variants (boxed values). Corre-
sponding INI-files to EN 1992-2004 and EN 1993-2005 and the country code may be used to
select those values, as far as we have got notice of them. The country code for example is valid
for deviations in Hong Kong to the British Standard 8110, 5400, 5950 or similar. Examples for
the country code:

00 General EN
HK / 852 Hong Kong

The ”boxed values” can be modified manually with the record TVAR.

Some codes require or allow the selection of a category or class. This can then be specified
with CAT. The possible items are given in the INI-File. For evaluations with historic design
codes not available with an INI-file, the definition of CAT USER allows to specify any name of
the design code.

In the case of a subsequent modification of these classes or categories the input which
depends on the design code has to be checked and adapted if necessary.

The extend to which the specified latitude, altitude, wind/snow or earthquake zone definitions
are accounted for is described in the program manuals of the modules using those values. The
user should never assume that all regulations of the design codes are automatically fulfilled
when selecting such a value. The possible items and defaults are given in the matching INI-

3-16 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

File. The resultant values which result from the altitude or the wind/snow/earthquake zones
have to be checked in the corresponding programs in the case of a subsequent modification.
E.g. for some design codes the combination coefficients of the snow depend on the altitude.
In the case of a modification of the altitude combination coefficients have to be adapted by the
user if necessary.

If the user wants to suppress such a value completely he may specify it with ”NONE”. The
load case of self weight is always accounted for following the definitions of the design codes,
an explicit definition of G has to be done only in those cases where the true local value should
be applied.

The item UNIT or d LANG will be processed only in AQUA or TEMPLATE. With a definition of
UNIT a set of units will be selected globally for all input and output data in all other modules.
The default is specified in the INI-file. Definitions with record PAGE will be active only within
the current module.

The following design codes are available as INI-Files and/or special program code has been
created to cope with special regulations. The marks A and B indicate if this code has been
implemented in AQB and BEMESS. For more detailed information, especially which provisions
of the codes have been implemented, please check the manuals and the HTM-files of the
design programs. In many cases it is possible to add some clauses within short time within the
program or with CADINP.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-17

AQUA | Input Description

EN - Eurocodes

Description UNIT Design

EN 199X-200X Eurocode Building Construction 5 A,B

EN 1992-1-1 Design of concrete structures
EN 1993-1-1 Design of steel structures
EN 1994-1-1 Design of composite steel and
concrete structures
including actions and combinations according
to:
EN 1990
EN 1991-1-x
including materials according to:
EN 1995-1-1 Timber
EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
COUN country code Israel for load trains only
IL/972
EN 199X-200X-BRIDGE Eurocode Bridge Construction 5 A,B
EN 1992-2 Design of concrete structures
EN 1993-2 Design of steel structures
EN 1994-2 Design of composite steel and con-
crete structures
including actions and loads according to:
EN 1990
EN 1991-2
including materials according to:
EN 1995-2 Timber
EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT B/C/D road bridges / footbridges / rail-
road bridges
with actions and design values (boxed
values) for bridges
COUN country code Israel for load trains only
IL/972

3-18 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

DIN - Deutsche Norm

Description UNIT Design

DIN EN199X-200X Nationale Anwendungsdokumente DIN 5 A,B

Hochbau
DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA:2013 Stahlbetontrag-
werke
DIN EN 1993-1-1/NA:2018 Stahlbauten
DIN EN 1994-1-1/NA:2010 Verbundtragw-
erke
einschließlich Einwirkungen, Kombinatio-
nen nach:
DIN EN 1990/NA:2012
DIN EN 1991-1-x/NA:201x
einschließlich Materialien nach:
DIN EN 1995-1-1/NA:2013 Holz
DIN EN 1996-1-1/NA:2019 Mauerwerk
DIN EN 1999-1-1/NA:2007 Aluminium
DIN EN199X-200X-BRIDGE Nationale Anwendungsdokumente DIN 5 A,B
Brückenbau
DIN EN 1992-2/NA:2013 Stahlbetontragw-
erke
DIN EN 1993-2/NA:2014 Stahlbauten
DIN EN 1994-2/NA:2010 Verbundtragwerke
einschließlich Einwirkungen, Lasten nach:
DIN EN 1990/NA:2012
DIN EN 1991-2/NA:2012
einschließlich Materialien nach:
DIN EN 1995-2/NA:2011 Holz
DIN EN 1996-1-1/NA:2019 Mauerwerk
DIN EN 1999-1-1/NA:2007 Aluminium
CAT B/C/D Straßenbrücken / Fußgänger-
brücken / Eisenbahnbrücken
mit Einwirkungen und Bemes-
sungswerte für Brücken (boxed
values)
DIN 1045-2008 DIN 1045-1 (2008) 0 A,B
CAT -/A/B/C/D/E/F (Tab. 18)
Klassifizierung von Nachweisbedin-
gungen
DIN FB102-2009 DIN Fachbericht 102 (2009) 0 A,B
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-19

AQUA | Input Description

Description UNIT Design

CAT A/B/C/D/E (Tab. 4.118) Klassi-

fizierung von Nachweisbedingungen,
keine Voreinstellung von Kombinatio-
nen
DIN FB103-2009 DIN Fachbericht 103 (2009) 2 A
DIN FB104-2009 DIN Fachbericht 104 (2009) 0 A
DIN 18800 Stahlbau (Nov. 2008) 2 A
CAT A voreingestellte Überlagerung DIN
18800
CAT B voreingestellte Überlagerung DIN
1055-100
DIN 1052-2008 Holzbau (2008) 0 A
CAT 1/2/3 Nutzungsklassen
DIN 1045-1 DIN 1045-1 (2001) 0 A,B
CAT -/A/B/C/D/E/F (Tab. 18) Klassi-
fizierung von Nachweisbedingun-
gen
DIN FB102-2003 DIN Fachbericht 102 (2003) 0 A,B
CAT A/B/C/D/E (Tab. 4.118) Klassi-
fizierung von Nachweisbedingun-
gen
DIN 1045 Alte Norm (1988) 0 A,B
DAfStb [Link] (1995) A
DIN 4227 Alte Spannbetonnorm + Anhang A1 (1995) 0 A
DIN FB103-2003 DIN Fachbericht 103 (2003) 2 A
DIN FB104-2003 DIN Fachbericht 104 (2003) 0 A
CAT -/A/B/C/D/E/F (Tab. 4.118 des FB
102), Klassifizierung von Nachweis-
bedingungen
DIN 18800-1990 Stahlbau (1990) 2 A
DIN 1052-1988 Holzbau (1988) 0 A

3-20 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

OEN - Österreichische Norm

Description UNIT Design

OEN EN199X-200X Nationale Anwendungsdokumente OEN 5 A,B

Hochbau
OEN EN 1992-1-1/NA:2011 Stahlbeton-
tragwerke
OEN EN 1993-1-1/NA:2007 Stahlbauten
OEN EN 1994-1-1 Verbundtragwerke
einschließlich Einwirkungen, Kombinatio-
nen nach:
OEN EN 1990/NA:2004
OEN EN 1991-1-x/NA:201x
einschließlich Materialien nach:
OEN EN 1995-1-1 Holz
OEN EN 1996-1-1 Mauerwerk
OEN EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
OEN EN199X-200X-BRIDGE Nationale Anwendungsdokumente OEN 5 A,B
Brückenbau
OEN EN 1992-2/NA:2004 Stahlbetontrag-
werke
OEN EN 1993-2/NA:2014 Stahlbauten
OEN EN 1994-2 Verbundtragwerke
einschließlich Einwirkungen, Lasten nach:
OEN EN 1990/NA:2012
OEN EN 1991-2/NA:2011
einschließlich Materialien nach:
OEN EN 1995-2 Holz
OEN EN 1996-1-1 Mauerwerk
OEN EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT B/C/D Straßenbrücken /
Fußgängerbrücken / Eisenbahn-
brücken
mit Einwirkungen und Bemes-
sungswerte für Brücken (boxed
values)
OEN 4700 Stahlbeton OENORM B 4700 (2001) 0 A,B
OEN 4750 Spannbeton OENORM B 4750 (2000) 0 A
OEN 4300 Stahl OENORM B 4300 (1994) 0 A

For the old design codes OEN 4200, OEN 4250, OEN 4253 no INI files exist. The program
AQB is so programmed that the appropriate design is done with input of the design code. As

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-21

AQUA | Input Description

materials BOE is input for concrete and BSOE for steel.

SIA - Schweizer Norm

Description UNIT Design

SIA 26X Schweizer Normen 0 A,B

SIA 262 Betonbauten (2013)
SIA 263 Stahlbau (2013)
SIA 264 Stahl-Beton-Verbundbau
einschließlich Einwirkungen, Kombinationen nach:
SIA 260 Grundlagen der Projektierung
SIA 261 Einwirkungen auf Tragwerke
einschließlich Materialien nach:
SIA 265 Holzbau mit Serviceklassen 1,2,3 - Angabe beim Holz-
material

BS - British Standard

Description UNIT Design

BS EN199X-200X National Annexes BS building construction 6 A,B

BS EN 1992-1-1/NA:2005 Design of con-
crete structures
BS EN 1993-1-1/NA:2008 Design of steel
structures
BS EN 1994-1-1/NA:2008 Design of com-
posite steel and concrete structures
including actions and combinations accord-
ing to:
BS EN 1990/NA:2009
BS EN 1991-1-x/NA:200x
including materials according to:
BS EN 1995-1-1 Timber
BS EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
BS EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
BS EN199X-200X-BRIDGE National Annexes BS bridge construction 6 A,B
BS EN 1992-2/NA:2007 Design of concrete
structures
BS EN 1993-2/NA:2012 Design of steel
structures
BS EN 1994-2/NA:2007 Design of composite
steel and concrete structures
Table continued on next page.

3-22 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Description UNIT Design

including actions and loads according to:

BS EN 1990/NA:2009
BS EN 1991-2/NA:2008
including materials according to:
BS EN 1995-2 Timber
BS EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
BS EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT B/C/D road bridges / footbridges / rail-
road bridges
with actions and design values (boxed
values) for bridges
BS 8110 British Standard Concrete (1997) 6 A,B
COUN country code Hong Kong
HK/852
BS 5400 British Standard Concrete Bridge (1990) 6 A
CAT 0 without Prestress
CAT 1/2/3 Prestress for Class 1/2/3
COUN country code Hong Kong
HK/852
COUN country code Israel
IL/972
BS 5950 British Standard Steelwork (2001) 6 A
COUN country code Hong Kong
HK/852

US - American Standards and Unified Building Code

Description UNIT Design

US ACI-318-19 American Standard ACI 318-19 (22) / UBC 9 A,B

US ACI-318-14 American Standard ACI 318-14 / UBC 9 A,B
US ACI-318-08 American Standard ACI / UBC (2008) 9 A
US AASHTO-2020 American Highway (2020) 8 A
US AASHTO-2014 American Highway (2014) 8 A
US AASHTO-2010 American Highway (2010) 8 A
US AASHTO-2004 American Highway (2005) 8 A
US AISC-2005 American Standard AISC (Steel) 2005 9 A

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-23

AQUA | Input Description

SP - Russian Standard

Description UNIT Design

SP 63-13330 SP 63.13330.20112 (Concrete) 0 A,B

SP 16-13330 SP 16.13330.2011 (Steel) 2 A

IS - Indian Standard

Description UNIT Design

IS 456 Indian Standard (2000) (Concrete) 6 A

IS IRC112 Indian Roads Congress: Code of Practice for Concrete Road 6 A
Bridges (2011)

AS - Australian Standard

Description UNIT Design

AS BUILDING AS for building construction 6

for concrete and steel stuctures
without member design, default to superpositions
AS 3600 Concrete Structures (2009) 6 A,B
AS 4100 Structural Steel (1998) 6 A
AS 5100 Bridge Design (2004) 6 A

UNE - Instrucciones Espaniola

Description UNIT Design

UNE EHE Instrucion de hormign estructural 0 A,B

Nivel de control de ejecucin:
EHE Normal
EHE_INTENSIO Intensio
EHE_REDUCIDO Reducido

UNI - Decreto Ministeriale Italiane

Description UNIT Design

UNI DM-2018 Decreto Ministeriale 2018: Norme Tecniche per le 5 A,B

Costruzioni
CAT A Costruzioni Civili
Table continued on next page.

3-24 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Description UNIT Design

CAT B Ponti Stradali

CAT C Ferroviari

NF - AFNOR Association Francaise de Normalisation

Description UNIT Design

NF EN199X-200X Annexes Nationales NF construction de bâti- 5 A,B

ments
NF EN 1992-1-1/NA:2016 Calcul des struc-
tures en béton
NF EN 1993-1-1/NA:2007 Calcul des struc-
tures en arcier
NF EN 1994-1-1/NA:2007 Calcul des struc-
tures mixtes acier-béton
including actions and combinations accord-
ing to:
NF EN 1990/NA:2004
NF EN 1991-1-x/NA:200x
including materials according to:
NF EN 1995-1-1 Bois
NF EN 1996-1-1 Maçonnerie
NF EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
NF EN199X-200X-BRIDGE Annexes Nationales NF construction de 5 A,B
ponts
NF EN 1992-2/NA:2007 Calcul des struc-
tures en béton
NF EN 1993-2/NA:2007 Calcul des struc-
tures en arcier
NF EN 1994-2/NA:2007 Calcul des struc-
tures mixtes acier-béton
including actions and loads according to:
NF EN 1990-A1/NA:2007
NF EN 1991-2/NA:2007
including materials according to:
NF EN 1995-2 Bois
NF EN 1996-1-1 Maçonnerie
NF EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT B/C/D ponts routiers / passerelles /
ponts ferroviaires
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-25

AQUA | Input Description

Description UNIT Design

with actions and design values (boxed

values) for bridges
NF BAEL Règles techniques de conception et de cal- 0 A,B
cul des ouvrages et constructions en béton
armé suivant la méthode des états limites.
BAEL/BPEL 91 revises 99
CAT B bâtiments
CAT P ponts-routes

SS - Swedish Standard

Description UNIT Design

SS EN199X-200X National Annexes SS building construction 5 A,B

according to Boverkets författningssamling -
BFS 2019:1 EKS 11
SS EN 1992-1-1/EKS 11:2019 Design of
concrete structures
SS EN 1993-1-1/EKS 11:2019 Design of
steel structures
SS EN 1994-1-1/EKS 11:2019 Design of
composite steel and concrete structures
including actions and combinations accord-
ing to:
SS EN 1990/EKS 11:2019
SS EN 1991-1-x/EKS 11:2019
including materials according to:
SS EN 1995-1-1 Timber
SS EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
SS EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT A1 byggnader & säkerhetsklass 1
CAT A2 Byggnader & säkerhetsklass 2
CAT A3 Byggnader & säkerhetsklass 3
SS EN199X-200X-BRIDGE National Annexes SS bridge construction 5 A,B
according to Transportstyrelsens förfat-
tningssamling - TSFS 2018:57
SS EN 1992-2/TSFS 2018:57 Design of con-
crete structures
SS EN 1993-2/TSFS 2018:57 Design of steel
structures
Table continued on next page.

3-26 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Description UNIT Design

SS EN 1994-2/TSFS 2018:57 Design of

composite steel and concrete structures
including actions and loads according to:
SS EN 1990/NA:2009
SS EN 1991-2/NA:2008
including materials according to:
SS EN 1995-2 Timber
SS EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
SS EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT B1 Vägbroar & säkerhetsklass 1
CAT B2 Vägbroar & säkerhetsklass 2
CAT B3 Vägbroar & säkerhetsklass 3
CAT B4 Vägbroar & säkerhetsklass 4
CAT C1 Gangbroar & säkerhetsklass 1
CAT C2 Gangbroar & säkerhetsklass 2
CAT C3 Gangbroar & säkerhetsklass 3
CAT C4 Gangbroar & säkerhetsklass 4
CAT D1 Järnvägsbroar & säkerhetsklass 1
CAT D2 Järnvägsbroar & säkerhetsklass 2
CAT D3 Järnvägsbroar & säkerhetsklass 3
CAT D4 Järnvägsbroar & säkerhetsklass 4
with actions and design values
(boxed values) for bridges

DS - Danish Standard

Description UNIT Design

DS EN199X-200X National Annexes DS building construction 5 A,B

DS EN 1992-1-1/NA:2013 Design of con-
crete structures
DS EN 1993-1-1/NA:2007 Design of steel
structures
DS EN 1994-1-1/NA:2007 Design of com-
posite steel and concrete structures
including actions and combinations accord-
ing to:
DS EN 1990/NA:2007
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-27

AQUA | Input Description

Description UNIT Design

DS EN 1991-1-x/NA:200x
including materials according to:
DS EN 1995-1-1 Timber
DS EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
DS EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT LE low safety & extended control
CAT NE normal safety & extended control
CAT HE high safety & extended control
CAT LN low safety & normal control
CAT NN normal safety & normal control (de-
fault)
CAT HN high safety & normal control
CAT LR low safety & reduced control
CAT NR normal safety & reduced control
CAT HR high safety & reduced control
safety according to DS EN 1990/NA:2007
control according to DS EN 1992-1-
1/NA:2007 and DS EN 1993-1-1/NA:2007
inspection level
DS EN199X-200X-BRIDGE National Annexes DS bridge construction 5 A,B
DS EN 1992-2/NA:2015 Design of concrete
structures
DS EN 1993-2/NA:2015 Design of steel
structures
DS EN 1994-2/NA:2005 Design of compos-
ite steel and concrete structures
including actions and combinations accord-
ing to:
DS EN 1990/A1/NA:2017
DS EN 1991-2/NA:2017
including materials according to:
DS EN 1995-1-1 Timber
DS EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
DS EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
for road bridges:
CAT BNE normal safety & extended control
CAT BHE high safety & extended control
Table continued on next page.

3-28 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Description UNIT Design

CAT BNN normal safety & normal control

(default)
CAT BHN high safety & normal control
for footbridges:
CAT CNE normal safety & extended control
CAT CHE high safety & extended control
CAT CNN normal safety & normal control
CAT CHN high safety & normal control
for railroad bridges:
CAT DNE normal safety & extended control
CAT DHE high safety & extended control
CAT DNN normal safety & normal control
CAT DHN high safety & normal control
safety according to DS EN 1990/NA:2007
control according to DS EN 1992-2/NA:2015
and DS EN 1993-2/NA:2015 inspection level

NS - Norsk Standard

Description UNIT Design

NS EN199X-200X National Annexes NS building construction 5 A,B

NS EN 1992-1-1/NA:2021 Design of con-
crete structures
NS EN 1993-1-1/NA:2015 Design of steel
structures
NS EN 1994-1-1/NA:2009 Design of com-
posite steel and concrete structures
including actions and combinations accord-
ing to:
NS EN 1990/NA:2016
NS EN 1991-1-x/NA:200x
including materials according to:
NS EN 1995-1-1 Timber
NS EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
NS EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT A1 Bygninger & palitelighetsklasse 1
CAT A2 Bygninger & palitelighetsklasse 2
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-29

AQUA | Input Description

Description UNIT Design

CAT A3 Bygninger & palitelighetsklasse 3

CAT A4 Bygninger & palitelighetsklasse 4
NS EN199X-200X-BRIDGE National Annexes NS bridge construction 5 A,B
NS EN 1992-2/NA:2010 Design of concrete
structures
NS EN 1993-2/NA:2009 Design of steel
structures
NS EN 1994-2/NA:2009 Design of compos-
ite steel and concrete structures
including actions and loads according to:
NS EN 1990/NA:2016
NS EN 1991-2/NA:2010
including materials according to:
NS EN 1995-2 Timber
NS EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
NS EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT B/C/D road bridges / footbridges / rail-
road bridges
with actions and design values
(boxed values) for bridges

SFS - Finnish Standard

Description UNIT Design

SFS EN199X-200X National Annexes SFS building construc- 5 A,B

tion
SFS EN 1992-1-1/NA:2010 Design of con-
crete structures
SFS EN 1993-1-1/NA:2010 Design of steel
structures
SFS EN 1994-1-1/NA:2010 Design of com-
posite steel and concrete structures
including actions and combinations accord-
ing to:
SFS EN 1990/NA:2010
SFS EN 1991-1-x/NA:200x
including materials according to:
SFS EN 1995-1-1 Timber
SFS EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
SFS EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
Table continued on next page.

3-30 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Description UNIT Design

CAT A1 Buildings & safety class 1

CAT A2 Buildings & safety class 2
CAT A3 Buildings & safety class 3
SFS EN199X-200X-BRIDGE National Annexes SFS - NCCI bridge con- 5 A,B
struction
SFS EN 1992-2/NCCI 2:2017 Design of
concrete structures
SFS EN 1993-2 Design of steel structures
SFS EN 1994-2/NCCI 4:2016 Design of
composite steel and concrete structures
including actions and loads according to:
SFS EN 1990/NCCI 1:2017
SFS EN 1991-2/NCCI 1:2017
including materials according to:
SFS EN 1995-2 Timber
SFS EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
SFS EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT B1 Road bridges & safety class 1
CAT B2 Road bridges & safety class 2
CAT B3 Road bridges & safety class 3
CAT C1 Footbridges & safety class 1
CAT C2 Footbridges & safety class 2
CAT C3 Footbridges & safety class 3
CAT D1 Railroad bridges & safety class 1
CAT D2 Railroad bridges & safety class 2
CAT D3 Railroad bridges & safety class 3
with actions and design values
(boxed values) for bridges

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-31

AQUA | Input Description

NEN - Netherlands Standard

Description UNIT Design

NEN EN199X-200X National Annexes NEN building construc- 5 A,B

tion
NEN EN 1992-1-1/NA:2011 Design of con-
crete structures
NEN EN 1993-1-1 Design of steel struc-
tures
NEN EN 1994-1-1 Design of composite
steel and concrete structures
including actions and combinations accord-
ing to:
NEN EN 1990/NA:2011
NEN EN 1991-1-x/NA:200x
including materials according to:
NEN EN 1995-1-1 Timber
NEN EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
NEN EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT A1 Buildings & safety class 1
CAT A2 Buildings & safety class 2
CAT A3 Buildings & safety class 3
NEN EN199X-200X-BRIDGE National Annexes NEN bridge construction 5 A,B
NEN EN 1992-2/NA:2011 Design of con-
crete structures
NEN EN 1993-2 Design of steel structures
NEN EN 1994-2 Design of composite steel
and concrete structures
including actions and loads according to:
NEN EN 1990/NA:2011
NEN EN 1991-2/NA:2011
including materials according to:
NEN EN 1995-2 Timber
NEN EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
NEN EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT B1 Road bridges & safety class 1
CAT B2 Road bridges & safety class 2
CAT B3 Road bridges & safety class 3
CAT C1 Footbridges & safety class 1
CAT C2 Footbridges & safety class 2
Table continued on next page.

3-32 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Description UNIT Design

CAT C3 Footbridges & safety class 3

CAT D1 Railroad bridges & safety class
CAT D2 Railroad bridges & safety class
CAT D3 Railroad bridges & safety class
with actions and design values
(boxed values) for bridges

NBN - Belgian Standard

Description UNIT Design

NBN EN199X-200X National Annexes NBN building construc- 5 A,B

tion
NBN EN 1992-1-1/NA:2010 Design of con-
crete structures
NBN EN 1993-1-1/NA:2010 Design of steel
structures
NBN EN 1994-1-1/NA:2006 Design of
composite steel and concrete structures
including actions and combinations ac-
cording to:
NBN EN 1990/NA:2013
NBN EN 1991-1-x/NA:201x
including materials according to:
NBN EN 1995-1-1 Timber
NBN EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
NBN EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT A1 Buildings & safety class 1
CAT A2 Buildings & safety class 2
CAT A3 Buildings & safety class 3
NBN EN199X-200X-BRIDGE National Annexes NBN bridge construction 5 A,B
NBN EN 1992-2/NA:2014 Design of con-
crete structures
NBN EN 1993-2/NA:2011 Design of steel
structures
NBN EN 1994-2 Design of composite steel
and concrete structures
including actions and loads according to:
NBN EN 1990/NA:2013
NBN EN 1991-2/NA:2014
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-33

AQUA | Input Description

Description UNIT Design

including materials according to:

NBN EN 1995-2 Timber
NBN EN 1996-1-1 Brickwork
NBN EN 1999-1-1 Aluminium
CAT B1 Road bridges & safety class 1
CAT B2 Road bridges & safety class 2
CAT B3 Road bridges & safety class 3
CAT C1 Footbridges & safety class 1
CAT C2 Footbridges & safety class 2
CAT C3 Footbridges & safety class 3
CAT D1 Railroad bridges & safety class
CAT D2 Railroad bridges & safety class
CAT D3 Railroad bridges & safety class
with actions and design values
(boxed values) for bridges

NZS - New Zealand Standards

Description UNIT Design

NZS 3101 Concrete Structures Standard (1995) 6 A,B

GB - Chinese Standard

Description UNIT Design

GB 50010-2010 Chinese Standard for Concrete Structures (2010 Edition 0

2015)
for default combinations according to GB 50009 - 2012
CAT A1 Buildings service life 5 years
CAT A2 Buildings service life 50 years
CAT A3 Buildings service life 100 years
GB 50010 Chinese Standard for Concrete Structures (2002) 0 A

NBR - Brazilian Standard

3-34 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Description UNIT Design

NBR 6118-2003 Norma Brasileira, Projeto de estruturas de concreto - 5 A,B

Procedimento
CAT A Edifcios
CAT B Pontes rodovirias
CAT C Passarelas de pedestres
CAT D Pontes ferrovirias

ZA - South African Standard

Description UNIT Design

ZA TMH7 Code of Practice for the Design of Highway Bridges and Cul- 6 A
verts in South Africa (1989)
CAT 0 without prestress
CAT 1/2/3 prestress for class 1/2/3

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-35

AQUA | Input Description

3.7 MATE – Material Properties

MATE

Item Description Unit Default

NO Material number − 1
E Elastic modulus [MP] 1090 *
MUE Poisson’s ratio (between 0.0 and 0.49) − 0
automatic default for nonlinear materials NMAT
G Shear modulus [MP] 1090 *
K Bulk modulus [MP] 1090 *
kN/ m3 1091
 
GAM Specific weight 25
kN/ m3 1091
 
GAMA Specific weight under buoyancy *
ALFA Thermal expansion coefficient [1/ K] 1083 E-5

kN/ m3
 
E90 Anisotropic elastic modulus 1090 E
M90 Anisotropic Poisson’s ratio − MUE
OAL Meridian angle of anisotropy about the local x axis deg 0
OAF Descent angle of anisotropy about the local x axis deg 0

SPM Material safety factor − 1.0

FY Design strength of material [MP] 1092 -
FT Ultimate strength of material [MP] 1092 -

TYPE Material type for default values LT -

TITL Material name Lt32 -

MATE defines Materials which cannot be defined by CONC, STEE, TIMB or BRIC otherwise.
The number of these materials must not be used for other materials.

With the definition of a literal at TYPE from the following list, default values will be selected:

GLAS, ESG Floatglass, toughened safety glas

VSGh, VSGv laminated glas (horiz./vertical usage),
TVG semi-tempered glas
Cu, Pb, Mg, W, Zn Copper, Lead, Magnesia, Wolfram, Zinc
BRAS, BRON brass, bronce
BRIC, SLBR, CLIN brick, sand-lime-brick, clinker
IGYP, GYPS isolat. gypsum, standard gypsum plaster
MOGY, MOCH, MOCE gypsum/chalk/cement mortar
ASPH, BITU Asphalt, Bitumen

3-36 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

CARP, WOOL Carpet, Felt/Wool

CORK, LINO Cork, Linoleum
EPOX, PHEN, PEST Epoxid-, Phenol-, Polyester resin
ACRY, PC, PTFE Acryl, Polycarbonat, Polytetrafluorethylen
PVC, PMMA Polyvinylchlorid, Polymethylmethakrylat
POM, PA Polyazetat, Polyamid/Nylon
PEHD. PELD Polyethylen high/low density
PS. PP, PUR Polystyrol, Polypropylen, Polyurethan
RUBB, NEOP, EBON Rubber, Neopren, Ebonit
EPDM, PSUL, BUTA Ethylen-Propylenedien,Polysulfid,Butadien
SI, SILA Silicone, Silica
FOAM, FOAS, FOAU foamed rubber, silicone, urethan
FOAC, FOAR, FOAE foamed PVC, PUR, PE

The mechanical properties of those materials are not always known with a distinct value or
even suitable for a linear material description at all!

For geotechnical design the TYPE may be specified by the Unified Soil Classification System
(USCS) :

GW, SW well graded gravel / sand

GP, SP poorly graded gravel / sand
GM, SM gravel / sand with significant silt
GC, SC gravel / sand with significant clay
ML, MI, MH silt with low, intermediate, high plasticity
CL, CI, CH clay with low, intermediate, high plasticity
ROC1, ROC2 crystal rock, sediment rock
ROC3, ROC4 light sediments, porous rock

For fine grained soils the effect of the liquidity index will be defined by the uniaxial strength FY,
which may be preset by appending a literal to the type:

:P plastic ( 0.5 < c < 0.75; FY < 120kN/ m2 )

:S stiff ( 0.75 < c < 1.0; 120kN/ m2 < FY < 300kN/ m2 )
:H hard ( 1.0 < c ; 300kN/ m2 < FY < 700kN/ m2 )
:F Fully hard ( 700kN/ m2 < FY )

Further TYPE may be used to preset fluid material constants (depending strongly on the tem-
perature) for:

AIR Air (1 bar, 20 deg Celsius)

H2O Water (1 bar, 10 deg. Celsius)
CO2, O2, N2 Carbondioxid, Oxygen, Nitrogen, Methane
HE,NE,AR,KR,XE,SF6 Helium, Neon, Argon, Krypton, Xenon, Sulfurhexafluorid

where MUE is the kinematic viscosity ν [ m2 /sec] . Sometimes it is more convenient to define

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-37

AQUA | Input Description

the elastic constants by other values than the Elasticity modulus, the Shear modulus and the
Poisson ratio. You may transform your values by the following formulas:

E Elastic modulus
Es subgrade modulus (horizontally constrained)
K Bulk modulus
G Shear modulus
μ Poisson’s ratio
E E
K = G = (3.1)
3(1 − 2μ) 2(1 + μ)

9·K ·G 3K − 2G
E = μ = (3.2)
(3K + G) 6K + 2G

(1 − μ)
Es = E · (3.3)
(1 + μ)(1 − 2μ)

3 · K · E 3 · K · (1 − 2μ)
G = G = (3.4)
9 · K−E 2 · (1 + μ)

If not specified, missing values will be calculated according to these formulas. It is, however,
possible to define non-consistent constants. If no values are given, E defaults to 30000 MPa
and MUE to 0.0.

Orthotropy may be defined via material and thickness of QUAD elements. (see record QUAD
in SOFiMSHA and manuals to ASE and TALPA).

The material law of a transversal orthotropy according to Lechnitzky has one direction that
has different properties, while the description in the plane perpendicular to this direction re-
mains isotropic. This covers most practical problems like timber and rock. Unfortunately the
designation of the general material constants for timber materials is not compatible with that
convention, so we strongly recommend to use TIMB for the description of timber materials.

The principal values E and μ are related to the isotropic plane, while E90 (MAT still old literal
EY) acts normal to that plane and μ90 and G90 (attention: input parameter G) describe the
transverse straining behaviour between normal direction and isotropic plane. With z being the
normal direction we have:
σ σy σz
ε = −μ· − μ90 · (3.5a)
E E E90
σy σ σz
εy = −μ· − μ90 · (3.5b)
E E E90
σz (σ + σy )
εz = − μ⋆90 · (3.5c)
E90 E
E
μ⋆90 = μ90 · (3.5d)
E90

3-38 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

It should be noted, that poisson’s ratios μ90 and μ90∗ are no longer limited by an upper bound
of 0.5 (this would hold for the isotropic case). According to the formula given above, their
relation is determined by the ratio of the elasticity moduli; this preserves symmetry of the
stress strain matrix, which is required to fulfill elemental equilibrium.

The order of the indices of stress and strain components for subsequent equations is defined
as:

[  y z y z yz ] general three-dimensional case

[  y y z ] plane stain condition, axial symmetry
[  y y ] plane stress.

With axial symmetry x denotes the axis of rotation while y represents the radial and z the
tangential direction.

Furthermore holds:
E1
E1 = E , E2 = E90 , μ1 = μ , μ2 = μ90 , G1 = , G2 = G (3.6)
2(1 + μ1 )

General three-dimensional case:

The three-dimensional material matrix is obtained by inversion of the strain stress relations and
reads (z being the direction normal to the isotropic plane):

μ1 +n·μ2
 
1−n·μ2 μ
E ·
 1 (1+μ1 )·m
2 2
E1 · (1+μ )·m E1 · m2 0 0 0
1

 E1 · μ1 +n·μ2
2 1−n·μ2
 μ 
(1+μ1 )·m
2
E1 · (1+μ )·m E1 · m2 0 0 0
 1 
μ μ 1−μ1
 
 E1 · m2 E1 · m2 E2 · 0 0 0
D=
 m 
 (3.7)

 0 0 0 G1 0 0 
 

 0 0 0 0 G2 0 
0 0 0 0 0 G2

E1
n = , m = 1 − μ1 − 2 · n · μ2
2
(3.8)
E2

Plane strain conditions:

Here we have in difference to the three-dimensional case, the y direction defined as normal to
the isotropic plane. The reduced material stiffness matrix yields:
1−n·μ22
 
μ
E1 · (1+μ )·m E1 · m2 0
 1 
 μ2 1−μ 
 E1 · m E2 · m 1 0
D=  
 (3.9)
 0 0 G2 
μ1 +n·μ2
 
μ
2
E1 · (1+μ )·m E1 · m2 0
1

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-39

AQUA | Input Description

E1
n = , m = 1 − μ1 − 2 · n · μ2
2
(3.10)
E2

Plane stress conditions:

Here we have in difference to the three-dimensional case, the y direction defined as normal
to the isotropic plane. The material stiffness matrix is obtained via inversion of the reduced
three-dimensional strain-stress matrix and reads:
 
E1 E1 ·μ2
0
 1−n·μ22 1−n·μ22
E1

 
D=  E1 ·μ2
 , n =
E2 (3.11)
 1−n·μ2 0
 2 1−n·μ22  E2
0 0 G2

Axial symmetry:
A general case of anisotropy does not need to be considered since axial symmetry would be
impossible to achieve under such circumstances. A case of interest in practice is that of a
stratified material in which the rotational axis x is normal to the plane of isotropy. For such a
case the material stiffness matrix reads:
1−μ21
 
n μ2 (1 + μ1 ) 0 μ2 (1 + μ1 )
 € Š 
μ2 (1 + μ1 )

1 − nμ2 0 μ1 + nμ2 
D=A· 2 2 
 (3.12)
G90
0 0 0
 
 A 
μ2 (1 + μ1 ) μ1 + nμ2
2 0 1 − nμ2
2

E2 · n E1
A= , n= , m = 1 − μ1 − 2 · n · μ2
2
(3.13)
(1 + μ1 )·m E2

Skew orthotropy:
Consideration of ’skew’ orthotropy is also possible. In geological terms, the three-dimensional
orientation of the isotropic plane is defined by means of the meridian and descent angle. They
describe the deviation of the steepest descent to the north direction and the inclination of the
layers. Mathematically, the angles are equivalent to the first and third of the Eulerian angles.
The transformation is defined by two rotations, the north axis (N) corresponding to the element
y-direction and the G-axis corresponding to the element z-direction. Axes K, N and G form a
right handed Cartesian coordinate system.

The transformation is defined as follows:

1. Rotation of axes K and N by meridian angle OAL about G-axis

2. Subsequent tilting of the rotated system (K’, N’, G’=G) by descent angle OAF about axis
K’.

Apart from 3D continuum elements these transformation rules apply to shells and plates, as
well.

3-40 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Figure 3.2: Skew orthotropy

For planar systems (TALPA) the value OAL defines the slope of the stratification, i.e. the angle
between the element x-direction and the stratification direction. Input for OAF is not evaluated
for the plane case.

For axial symmetry input of OAF and OAL is not evaluated (see above: axial symmetry).

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-41

AQUA | Input Description

3.8 MAT – General Material Properties

MAT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Material number − 1
kN/ m2
 
E Elastic modulus 1088 *
MUE Poisson’s ratio (between 0.0 and 0.49) − 0
automatic default for nonlinear materials NMAT
kN/ m2
 
G Shear modulus 1088 *
kN/ m2
 
K Bulk modulus 1088 *
kN/ m3
 
GAM Specific weight 1091 25
kN/ m3
 
GAMA Specific weight under buoyancy 1091 *
ALFA Thermal expansion coefficient [1/ K] 1083 E-5
kN/ m2 1088
 
EY Anisotropic elastic modulus Ey E
MXY Anisotropic Poisson’s ratio m-xy − MUE
OAL Meridian angle of anisotropy about the local x axis deg 0
OAF Descent angle of anisotropy about the local x axis deg 0
SPM Material safety factor − 1.0
TITL Material name Lt32 -

Materials which can be used for SVAL or QUAD and BRIC elements may be defined with the
record MAT and MATE. The number of the material must not be used for other materials.

The differences between the two records are mainly the used dimensions. MATE is analogue to
CONC,STEE etc. (MPa) and has additional strength values, while MAT uses (kN/m2 ) analogue
to NMAT. MAT has older item names for the orthotropic parameters.

3-42 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.9 FLAY – Layered Material

FLAY

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of composite material − *

T Thickness of layer ∗ !
MNO Material number of layer − !
BETA Direction of layer (angle to local x axis of element) 0.0
TITL Material Designation Lt32 -

With FLAY you may define a composite layered material for QUAD elements with up to 99
layers. Each layer may be defined with a absolute thickness (positive) or a relative (negative)
one. The total thickness of the element is calibrated to the sum of the thicknesses of the
material definition. If some layers have negative thickness, only these layers are adapted.
Otherwise a uniform scaling will take place. The fibres direction of layer may be defined via
BETA. The direction of layers material (eg meridian angle OAL) is ignored. If NO is not defined,
last valid input for NO is used. So it is sufficient to input NO only at first layer. Same for
description TITL.

For example, if you have a sandwich element with two outer laminates with a given thickness:

FLAY NO 9 T 0.02 1 TITL 'FLAY 9' ! upper laminate

T -1.00 2 ! interior laminate
T 0.02 1 ! lower laminate

then this data is applied to match two QUAD elements with a total thickness of 0.10 or 0.15 as
follows:

FLAY - T 0.02 1 ! upper laminate

T 0.06 2 ! interior laminate if 0.10 total thickness
T 0.02 1 ! lower laminate
FLAY - T 0.02 1 ! upper laminate
T 0.11 2 ! interior laminate if 0.15 total thickness
T 0.02 1 ! lower laminate

For non-linear calculations a material definition with mean values is stored.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-43

AQUA | Input Description

3.10 MLAY – Layered Material

MLAY

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of composite material − 1

T0 Thickness of first layer ∗ !
NO0 Material number of first layer − !
T1 Thickness of second layer ∗ !
NO1 Material number of second layer − !
...
T9 Thickness of 9th layer ∗ -
NO9 Material number of 9th layer − -
TITL Material Designation Lt32 -

With MLAY you may define for QUAD elements a composite layered material with up to 10
layers. Each layer may be defined with a positive absolute thickness or a negative relative
one. The total thickness of the element will be calibrated to the sum of the thicknesses of the
material definition. If some layers have negative thickness only these layers will be adapted.
Otherwise a uniform scaling will take place.

If you have a sandwich element with two outer laminates with a given thickness for example:

MLAY 9 0.02 1 ! upper laminate

-1.00 2 ! interior laminate
0.02 1 ! lower laminate

then this data will be applied to match two QUAD elements with a total thickness of 0.10 or
0.15 as follows:

MLAY - 0.02 1 ! upper laminate

0.06 2 ! interior laminate if 0.10 total thickness
0.02 1 ! lower laminate
MLAY - 0.02 1 ! upper laminate
0.11 2 ! interior laminate if 0.15 total thickness
0.02 1 ! lower laminate

For non-linear calculations a material definition with mean values is stored.

3-44 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.11 NMAT – Non-linear Material

NMAT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Material number − 1
TYPE Kind of material law LT !
LINE Linear material
VMIS von Mise law, optional viscoplastic exten-
sion
DRUC Drucker-Prager law, optional viscoplastic
extension
MOHR Mohr Coulomb law
GRAN Hardening Plasticity Soil
SWEL Swelling
FAUL Faults in rock material
ROCK Rock material
MISE Mise / Drucker Prager law
GUDE Gudehus law
LADE Lade law
MEMB Textile membrane
USP1 to USP8 and USD1 to USD8 reserved for
user defined material models
UNDR Undrained Stress Analysis

P1 1st parameter of material law ∗ -

P2 2nd parameter of material law ∗ -
P3 3rd parameter of material law ∗ -
P4 4th parameter of material law ∗ -
... ...
P12 12th parameter of material law ∗ -

The types of the implemented material laws and the meaning of their parameters can be found
in the following pages.

In a linear analysis the yield function for the non-linear material is merely evaluated and output.
This enables an estimation of the non-linear regions for a subsequent non-linear analysis.

If TYPE LINE is given, the material remains linear.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-45

AQUA | Input Description

3.11.1 Invariants of the Stress Tensor

For the present chapter, as long as not specified differently, the following conventions hold.

• The first principal invariant of the Cauchy stress tensor σ is defined as:

1 = σ + σy + σz (3.14)

1
• The deviatoric stress tensor can then be established as s = σ − 3 1:

1
s = σ − (3.15a)
3
1
sy = σy − (3.15b)
3
1
sz = σz − (3.15c)
3
with its second and third principal invariants:
1
J2 = (s2 + s2 + s2 2
) + τy 2
+ τyz 2
+ τz (3.16a)
2  y z
2 2 2
J3 = s sy sz + 2τy τyz τz − s τyz − sy τz − sz τy (3.16b)

A related set of quantities is frequently adopted for the description of yield surfaces of cohesive
frictional materials:
1
p= (3.17a)
3
v
t1
u h i  
Æ
2
2
q= 3 · J2 = σ − σy + σy − σz + (σ − σz )2 + 3 τy
2 + τ2 + τ2
yz z
(3.17b)
2
1/ 3
1

r=3 J3 (3.17c)
2

p and q are referred to as hydrostatic stress and deviatoric stress, respectively.

A third set of widely used invariants (ξ, ρ, θ) describe a cylindrical ccordinate system, the
Haigh-Westergaard stress space:
1
ξ= (3.18a)
sqrt3
Æ
ρ = 2 · J2 (3.18b)
p
3 3 J3 π
cos (3θh ) = with 0 ≤ θh ≤ + (3.18c)
2 3/ 2 3
J2
(3.18d)

In this documentation, unless stated otherwise, for the Lode angle θ an alternative definition is
adopted:
p
3 3 J3 π π
sn (3θ) = − with − ≤θ≤+ (3.19)
2 3/ 2 6 6
J2

3-46 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.11.2 Material Parameters

Non-linear material parameters have to be selected very carefully. Especially for soil and rock
mechanics the values of the site have to be used, at least for the final design. There are
some values available in literature (e.g. EC7, DIN 1055 part 2, EAU), but these values are
hardly usable for a non-linear FEM analysis. If we cite some of the values here, we deny any
responsibilities for the correct selection of values for any current project.

Angle of friction
The angle of friction is zero for most fine grained cohesive soils under undrained conditions.
Friction angles larger than 40 degrees are encountered rarely.

Note: A slope without cohesion world cannot be steeper than the material’s ultimate friction
angle.

Cohesion
The cohesion as well as the friction have to be clearly distinguished for drained and undrained
conditions. For fine grained soils a pore pressure is created for sudden loading which de-
creases the possible friction considerably. As time passes, the water will leave the soil, the
friction increases, but the cohesion will be reduced by a factor up to 10.

Dilatancy
Dilatancy denotes the volumetric plastic deformation behavior of a material sample under
shear. The quantity which is used to describe the dilatancy effects is called the dilatancy
angle ψ:

• ψ<0 plastic deformation associated with reduction of material volume (compaction)

• ψ=0 volume-neutral plastic deformation (holds, e.g., for steel)
• ψ>0 plastic deformation associated with volume increase

For soil materials, the plastic deformation behavior depends on the material’s effective density,
which in turn changes with the material’s loading state - therefore, the dilatancy angle is in fact
not a constant quantity. This coherence is described by the well-established stress dilatancy
theory (Rowe [4]), which links the mobilized dilatancy angle ψm to the actual shear strain-
ing level, the latter being characterized by the mobilized friction angle φ′m (cf. section NMAT
Hardening Plasticity Soil Model - GRAN).

In soil mechanics usual way to qualitatively illustrate the dilatancy effects of normally (NC) and
overconsolidated soil (OC) is to idealize the soil with an assembly of spherical particles (Fig.
3.3). In case of a loosely packed soil any shear deformation will result in a denser packing of
the particles, followed by a volume decrease, also know as the contraction (Fig. 3.3a). This
process is characterized by the negative angle of dilatancy ψ. On the other hand, shearing
of the initially densely packed soil is only possible if the volume increases (Fig. 3.3b). This
process is also know as dilatation and it is characterized by the positive dilatancy angle.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-47

AQUA | Input Description

ψ>0
ψ<0

σ′ σ′

τ τ
ΔV < 0 ΔV > 0

(a) Loosely packed soil: (b) Densly packed soil:

Contraction ⇒ ψ < 0 and ΔV < 0 Dilatation ⇒ ψ > 0 and ΔV > 0

Figure 3.3: Model of soil as spherical particles assembly: Contraction and dilatation under shear

The easiest way to understand the mechanical interpretation of the dilatancy angle is to look
at the behavior of the soil under a plane-strain conditions subjected to shear τy (Fig. 3.4).
′
σyy

τy
ϵ̇pyy ψ

γ̇py
1

Figure 3.4: Mechanical interpretation of the dilatancy angle ψ for a soil under a plane-strain condi-
tions

From the Figure 3.4 it follows

p
ϵ̇yy
tn ψ = p , (3.20)
γ̇y

p p
where ϵ̇yy is the plastic strain rate in y-direction describing the change in volume and γ̇y is
the plastic shear strain rate.

The internal friction of a densely packed granular material is composed of a sliding friction

3-48 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

between the grains increased by an additional resistance as a result of the granular interlock-
ing. The effect of the dilatancy on the mechanical behavior of the soil, or more precisely on
the friction angle can be illustrated by the sawtooth model shown in Figur0e 3.5 (Maksimović
[5]). It is assumed that the friction angle of the non-compacted soil, when the volume gradient
is zero (constant volume), is a constant value and it describes only the friction resistance of
the grains. This angle is called critical state friction angle and usually denoted as φ′c . For
the densely packed soil as a result of the interlocking between the grains, the sheering does
not develop along a straight horizontal plane s − s, but along the sawtooth planes t − t with
the angle of inclination ψm , called the mobilized dilatancy angle. The friction angle mobilized
along the imaginary horizontal shear plane s − s, φ′m , can now be determined as the sum of
the friction angle along the inclined shear planes t − t , φ′c , and mobilized dilatancy angle, ψm ,
defining the inclination of t − t planes, i.e.

φ′m = φ′c + ψm . (3.21)

σ′

τ
t φ′m

ψm t
s s s s

ψm
t t φ′cs
ψm

Figure 3.5: Sawtooth model for dilatancy

For the triaxial stress state the dilatant soil behavior is more complicated than the one de-
scribed by the sawtooth mechanism but the overall behavior is qualitatively similar. In case of
the triaxial stress state, the relationship between the mobilized dilatancy angle and the plastic
strain rates can be described as follows
p
ϵ̇
sin ψm = , (3.22)
γ̇p
p p p p
were ϵ represents the plastic volumetric strain and γp = ϵ1 − ϵ2 − ϵ3 is the measure of the
plastic shear strain.

Figure 3.6a schematically shows the differences in the behavior of the normally consolidated
(NC) and heavily overconsolidated (OC) soils in drained triaxial experiment. As aforemen-
tioned, under shear normally consolidated soils exhibit contractive behavior, while the over-
consolidated soils have a tendency to expand (dilatation) after some small initial range of con-

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-49

AQUA | Input Description

traction. For NC soils deviatoric stress - axial strain curve will monotonically grow until the
shear strength qcs is reached. On the other hand, OC soils reach their peek shear strength
qpek at a maximal dilatation (maximal inclination of the ϵ − ε curve), followed by the reduc-
tion of the shear stiffness up to the remaining level qcs corresponding to the zero volumetric
strain gradient. This state is also know as the critical state.

q φ′m

qpek φ′pek

OC φ′cs
qcs
NC φ′ƒ
φ′μ

ϵ ϵ

ϵ ϵ


dϵ
 ψm → 0
dϵ m
OC
contraction dilatation

max. dilatancy
ψpek
ϵ ϵ
ψmn
ψm = 0

NC

(a) Deviatoric stress q vs. axial strain ϵ and vol- (b) Mobilized friction angle φ′m vs. axial strain ε
umetric ϵ vs. axial strain ε for NC and OC soils and volumetric ϵ vs. axial strain ε for OC soils

Figure 3.6: Drained triaxial experiment

Figure 3.6b shows the dependency of the mobilized friction angle ψ′m on the level of axial shear
strains for the OC soils. The value φ′ƒ marks the transition between the contractive and dilatant
behavior (a.k.a. phase transformation). Above this level of straining, the behavior of the soil
is purely dilatant. The value of φ′ƒ is in between the critical state friction angle φ′cs and the
grain-to-grain friction angle φ′μ . The friction angle range [φ′μ , φ′cs ] is not larger than a couple
of degrees (Wehnert [6]). For dense soils, the value of the φ′ƒ will be closer to the φ′μ . For
loose soils as well as for the case of the plain-strain conditions the value of φ′ƒ will be closer
to the upper limit, i.e. to the value φ′cs . Peak friction angle φ′pek corresponds to the maximal
dilatancy, i.e. ψpek .

Evidently the dilatancy is not a constant value - it depends on the stress level. Most advanced
soil models recognize this fact by incorporating models which can take into consideration stress
dependent dilatancy angle. One of the most famous dilatancy models is a model according to
Rowe [4]. This model establishes the relationship between the mobilized dilatancy angle ψm

3-50 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

and mobilized friction angle φ′m as follows

sin φ′m − sin φ′ƒ

sin ψm = . (3.23)
1 − sin φ′m sin φ′ƒ

Mobilized friction angle φ′m represents the measure of the stress and it can be computed as

σ1′ − σ3′
sin φ′m = . (3.24)
2c · cot φ − σ1′ − σ3′

Rowe’s Eq. 3.23 is plotted in Fig. 3.7.

ψm [ ◦ ]

ψpek

0 φ′m [ ◦ ]
φ′ƒ φ′pek

ψmn

Figure 3.7: Mobilized dilatancy angle - mobilized friction angle relationship according to Rowe [4]

Classical elasto-plastic material models (e.g. MOHR, DRUC) adopt a constant dilatancy angle.
If the dilatancy has considerable effects (e.g. due to arch action) the predominant loading
situation should be assessed carefully. As a coarse rule of thumb, for dense soils a value of
+φ/ 2, for middle dense soils a value of 0.0 and for loose soils a value of −φ/ 2 can be adopted.

In contrast, the advanced theoretical setting of the Hardening Plasticity Soil model directly
incorporates a loading state dependent variation of the dilatancy angle according to the above
mentioned stress dilatancy theory (cf. subsection 3.11.7).

Uniaxial Tensile Strength

As tensile stresses are not allowed in soils in general, a tension cut off will be applied for most
soils. However, it might be advisable to define a small uniaxial tensile strength for numerical
reasons. e.g. if the soils becomes stress free at the surface.

3.11.3 Non-linear State Variables (hardening parameters)

General non-linear material laws are normally influenced by the loading history. Therefore,
for every load step material point state-variables are stored to the data base, that can be
visualized with WinGRAF during post-processing. Subsequently, the meaning of the stored
values is shortly explained.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-51

AQUA | Input Description

Plastification number
Value of the corresponding yield function for the uncorrected (=linear elastic) stress state, pos-
sibly scaled to stress units. If >0 the material undergoes plastification. The value is computed
for each loading step anew. Therefore, regions that possibly have plastified previously, still can
get values < 0 in a subsequent loading step. For GRAN the value of the MOHR yield function
is computed, here.

For the ’Hardening Plasticity Soil’ (GRAN) material model, the plastification number is an iden-
tifier that holds more detailed information about the current state of loading (see section ’Hard-
ening Plasticity Soil Model’) - instead of storing the current value of the yield function, only.

Plastic volumetric strain

Plastic volumetric strain ϵp,de =
R
ϵ̇p,de (scalar value), accumulated from corresponding
strain rates.

ϵ̇p, = ϵ̇p, + ϵ̇p,y + ϵ̇p,z (3.25)

Plastic deviatoric strain

Plastic deviatoric strain ϵp,de = ϵ̇p,de (scalar value), accumulated from corresponding strain
R

rates. It reflects the volume neutral (shearing) portion of the plastic deformation:
v v
t2t 1
u u 
ϵ̇p,de = ė2
p,
+ ė2
p,y
+ ė2
p,z
+ γ̇2
p,y
+ γ̇2
p,yz
+ γ̇2
p,z
(3.26a)
3 2
v
t2 1
u h

2
2
2 i 
= ϵ̇p, − ϵ̇p,y + ϵ̇p,y − ϵ̇p,z + ϵ̇p, − ϵ̇p,z + γ̇2
p,y
+ γ̇2
p,yz
+ γ̇2
p,z
9 3

where
ϵp,
ėp, ≡ ϵ̇p, − ,  = , y, z (3.27a)
3
X 1h
2
2
2 i
⇒ ė2
p,
= ϵ̇p, − ϵ̇p,y + ϵ̇p,y − ϵ̇p,z + ϵ̇p, − ϵ̇p,z (3.27b)
=,y,z
3

Hint
For triaxial conditions with ϵ̇p,1 ≡ ϵ̇p,2 we have

2 1
ϵ̇p,de = ϵ̇p,1 − ϵ̇p,3 = ϵ̇p, − 3ϵ̇p,3 (3.28)
3 3

Assuming, that the plastic volumetric strain portion is negligible, this can be further re-
duced to

ϵ̇p,de ≈ ϵ̇p,3 (3.29)

3-52 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Mobilized friction angle φm

Measures the degree of shearing strain based on the Mohr-Coulomb criterion. Computed
according to:

σ1′ − σ3′
sin φm = (3.30)
2c · cot φ − σ1′ − σ3′

Utilisation level
Ratio  ≡ φm / φnp ≤ 1 , where the material input parameter φnp marks the maximum (ultimate)
friction angle (np - input) .

3.11.4 VMIS Viscoplastic Material Law

Elastoplastic material according to von MISE with associated flow rule and optional viscoplastic
extension.

Application range
Metals and other materials without friction. Simulation of creep effects.

Parameters

VMIS Description Unit Default

kN/ m2
 
P1 Yield stress 1089 !
kN/ m2
 
P2 Hardening modulus (tangent modulus) 1088 0.0
P10 Type of creep law (overstress function) − 0
0 no viscous effects, elasto-plastic
1 Perzyna model
P11 Creep parameter, exponent m ≥ 1.0 − 1.0
kNs/ m2
 
P12 Viscosity η ≥ 0.0 1220 0.0

The yield condition reads

Æ
ƒ= 3 · J2 − p1 ≤ 0 (3.31)

Formulation of the viscoplastic material behaviour is based on the Perzyna model. Accordingly,
the viscoplastic strains are defined by
Z t
p
Δϵ = ϵ̇p dτ
t0
Z t
∂g(σ, κ)
= λ̇ · dτ (3.32)
t0 ∂σ
Z t
〈(ƒ (σ, κ))〉 ∂g(σ, κ)
= · dτ
t0 η ∂σ

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-53

AQUA | Input Description

In case of an associative flow-rule (e.g. von Mise material) the plastic potential g equals the
yield function. The overstress function  reads

ƒ (σ, κ)m , ƒ ≥0
〈〉 = (3.33)
0 , ƒ <0


This frequently used form can be calibrated to reproduce a wide range of time-dependent
material phenomena adequately.

References
The implementation of this material model essentially adopts concepts and strategies from
Chrisfield [7], Chrisfield [8], Zienkiewicz and Taylor [9] and Zienkiewicz and Cormeau [10].

3.11.5 DRUC Viscoplastic Material Law

Elastoplastic material with a conical yield surface according to DRUCKER/ PRAGER and an
optionally non-associated flow rule. The model is extended by means of a cut-off criterion for
tensile stresses (tension limit) and features a viscoplastic option.

Application range
Soil and rock with friction and/ or cohesion. Modelling of time-dependent effects (e.g. short
term strength)

Parameters

DRUC Description Unit Default

P1 Friction angle φ [ ◦] !
<0 inner cone
≥0 outer cone
kN/ m2
 
P2 Cohesion c 1089 !
kN/ m2
 
P3 Tensile strength ƒt 1089 0.0
P4 Dilatancy angle ψ [ ◦] 0.0
P5 unused - -
P6 Plastic ultimate strain ϵp,de,

h
1081 0.0
P7 Ultimate friction angle φ [ ◦] P1
kN/ m2
 
P8 Ultimate cohesion c 1089 P2
P10 Type of creep law (overstress function) − 0
0 no viscous effects, elasto-plastic
1 Perzyna model
P11 Creep parameter, exponent m ≥ 1.0 − 1.0
kNs/ m2
 
P12 Viscosity η ≥ 0.0 1220 0.0

3-54 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Formulation of yield condition and plastic potential using stress invariants:

2 sin φ Æ 6c cos φ
ƒ=p · 1 + J2 − p ≤0 (3.34a)
3 (3 ± sin φ) 3 (3 ± sin φ)
2 sin ψ Æ
g= p · 1 + J2 (3.34b)
3 (3 ± sin ψ)

This formulation describes a cone in principal stress space that either embraces the MOHR
yield surface (- sign) or is embraced by and tangential to it (+ sign).

For a description of the material’s viscoplastic extension, please refer to NMAT VMIS.

Tension cut-off
By default, the Drucker-Prager yield surface is accomplished by a tensile stress limit of R ANK -
INE style

ƒ = σ ,, − ƒt ≤ 0 (3.35)

where σ ,, denotes the vector of principal stresses and ƒt the entered tensile strength.

Calibration based on uniaxial and biaxial strength

For subsequent derivations we use a slightly modified variant of yield condition eq. 3.34a,
adopting the hydrostatic stress p (eq. 3.17a) and the deviatoric stress q (eq. 3.17b). Addition-
ally, we focus on the case of the outer cone (- sign).

2 sin φ 6 cos φ
ƒ= · 3p + q − ·c ≤0 (3.36)
(3 − sin φ) (3 − sin φ)

The DRUCKER/ PRAGER yield surface features two strength parameters φ and c which can
be derived from two failure conditions, one for the uniaxial and one for the biaxial compression
limit state, respectively.

Given the uniaxial compressive strength ƒc , the corresponding failure stress state renders
 
−ƒc
  1
σ ,m =  0  ⇒ p=− ƒc ; q = ƒc (3.37)
  3
0

For many materials, in particular concrete, an increased strength ƒc2c =  · ƒc can be observed
in biaxial compression tests, cf. Kupfer and Gerstle [11]. In this notation we have introduced
the amplification factor . The corresponding biaxial stress state at failure thus renders
 
− · ƒc
  2
σ b,m = 
 − · ƒc 
 ⇒ p=−  · ƒc ; q =  · ƒc (3.38)
3
0

!
!
The corresponding failure conditions ƒ σ ,m = 0 and ƒ σ b,m = 0 constitute a set of two

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-55

AQUA | Input Description

equations, which can be solved for the two material parameters φ and c to be determined.

Hence, inserting eq. 3.37 and 3.38 into eq. 3.36

sin φ (3 − sin φ)
 
!
− + · ƒc − c =0 (3.39a)
3 cos φ 6 cos φ
sin φ (3 − sin φ)
 
!
−2 + ·  · ƒc − c = 0 (3.39b)
3 cos φ 6 cos φ

and straight forward manipulation finally yields the desired relations

3 − 3
snφ = (3.40a)
5 − 3
1 − snφ
c = · ƒc (3.40b)
2 · cosφ

Hint
In the absence of experimental data, Fédération internationale du Béton [12] proposes
the following relation for the biaxial strength ƒc2c

ƒc [MP]
 
ƒc2c = 1.2 − ·ƒc (3.41)
1000
| {z }


Assuming normal strength concrete,  ≈ 1.16. Consequently, from eq. 3.40a and eq.
3.40b:

φ ≈ 10◦ and c ≈ 0.42 · ƒc (3.42)

References
The implementation of this material model essentially adopts concepts and strategies from
Zienkiewicz and Taylor [9] and Chrisfield [8].

3.11.6 MOHR Viscoplastic Material Law

Elastoplastic material with a prismatic yield surface according to MOHR-COULOMB and a non-
associated flow rule. The model is extended by means of a cut-off criterion for tensile stresses
(tension limit) and features a viscoplastic option.

Application range
Soil and rock with friction and/ or cohesion. Modelling of time-dependent effects (e.g. short
term strength).

Parameters

MOHR Description Unit Default

P1 Friction angle φ [ ◦] !
Table continued on next page.

3-56 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

MOHR Description Unit Default

kN/ m2
 
P2 Cohesion c 1089 !
kN/ m2
 
P3 Tensile strength ƒt 1089 0.0
P4 Dilatancy angle ψ [ ◦] 0.0
P5 unused - -
P6 Plastic ultimate strain ϵp,de,

h
1081 0.0
P7 Ultimate friction angle φ [ ◦] P1
kN/ m2
 
P8 Ultimate cohesion c 1089 P2
P10 Type of creep law (overstress function) − 0
0 no viscous effects, elasto-plastic
1 Perzyna model
P11 Creep parameter, exponent m ≥ 1.0 − 1.0
kNs/ m2
 
P12 Viscosity η ≥ 0.0 1220 0.0

Formulation of yield condition and plastic potential using stress invariants:

1 sin θ sin φ
 
Æ
ƒ = 1 sin φ + J2 cos θ − p − c cos φ ≤0 (3.43a)
3 3
2 sin ψ Æ
g= p (3 ± sin ψ) · 1 + J2 (3.43b)
3

Special comments
The following expressions are better suited for checking the yield criterion:

1 − sin φ 2c cos φ
ƒ = σ1 − · σ3 − (3.44)
1 + sin φ 1 + sin φ

For a description of the material’s viscoplastic extension, please refer to NMAT VMIS.

References
The implementation of this material model essentially adopts concepts and strategies from
Zienkiewicz and Taylor [9], Chrisfield [8] and Zienkiewicz and Taylor [9].

3.11.7 GRAN Hardening Plasticity Soil

Extended elastoplastic material with an optimized hardening rule (single and double hardening)
for soil materials.

Application range
Realistic stiffness and hardening behavior of soil, settlement analysis.

Parameters

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-57

AQUA | Input Description

GRAN Description Unit Default

P1 Friction angle φ [ ◦] !
kN/ m2
 
P2 Cohesion c 1089 !
kN/ m2
 
P3 Tensile strength ƒt 1089 0.0
P4 Dilatancy angle ψ [ ◦] 0.0
kN/ m2
 
P5 Stiffness modulus Es,reƒ (GRAN-extended) 1088 *
P6 Lateral earth pressure coefficient K0nc (GRAN-extended) − 1 − sin φ
kN/ m2
 
P9 Modulus for primary loading E50,reƒ 1088 !
P10 Exponent m ≥ 0.0 − 0.7
P11 Failure factor 0.5 < Rƒ < 1.0 − 0.9
kN/ m2
 
P12 Reference pressure preƒ > 0.0 1089 100.0

The extended version of the GRAN-model (two-surface model, double hardening) is activated
by specification of the oedometric stiffness modulus Es,reƒ (P5) - only in this case the lateral
earth pressure coefficient K0nc (P6) takes effect. In case no input of Es,reƒ is provided, the basis
version of the GRAN material model (single-surface model, single hardening) is adopted.

The hardening rule is based on the hyperbolic stress-strain relationship proposed by Kondner
and Zelasko [13], which was derived from triaxial testing. Hardening is limited by the mate-
rial’s strength, represented by the classic MOHR/COULOMB failure criterion. Additionally, the
model accounts for the stress dependent stiffness according to equations (4-6). A further es-
sential feature is the model’s ability to capture the loading state and can therefore automatically
account for the different stiffness in primary loading and un-/reloading paths.

In the subsequent notation, compression and contraction are defined as negative; for the prin-
cipal stresses the relation σ1 ≥ σ2 ≥ σ3 holds. Accordingly, for the triaxial state index 3 denotes
the axial and index 1 the lateral direction.

Summary of essential features:

• deviatoric hardening based on the hyperbolic stress-strain relationship according to Kond-

ner and Zelasko [13]
⇒ plastic straining prior to reaching shear strength
parameter : E50,reƒ ; Rƒ
• Shear capacity (Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion)
parameter : φ; c
• optional accounting of dilatant behaviour (non-associated flow)
parameter : ψ
• stress dependent stiffness
parameter : m; preƒ
• loading dependent stiffness
⇒ differentiation between primary loading and un-/reloading
parameter : Er ; μ (elastic, from MAT/MATE record)

3-58 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

q = σ1 − σ3 [kN/ m2 ]
-1200

-1000

σ1 -800
← MOHR
-600

-400

-200
σ3
-1000 -800 -600 -400 -200 0
Mohr-Coulomb
σ2 p [kN/ m2 ]

Figure 3.8: Mohr-Coulomb

q = σ1 − σ3 [kN/ m2 ]
-1200

-1000

σ1 -800
← MOHR
-600

-400

-200
σ3
-1000 -800 -600 -400 -200 0
Mohr-Coulomb
σ2 p [kN/ m2 ]

Figure 3.9: Mohr-Coulomb

• optional limitation of tensile stress (tension cut-off)

parameter : ƒt

The extended version (GRAN-extended) enhances the model by an additional hardening two-
parameter cap surface. An appropriate calibration of the cap’s hardening and shape param-
eters is done automatically, based on the input of physically sound input parameters - and,
hence, allows for

• a realistic modelling of the contractant behaviour and stiffness during primary compression
(oedometric testing) ⇒ plastic straining
σter
• preservation of a realistic stress ratio K0nc = σ , e.g. according to Jaky as K0nc = 1− sin φ
parameter : Es,reƒ ; K0nc ; (m; preƒ )

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-59

AQUA | Input Description

Strength and hardening properties

According to Kondner and Zelasko [13], the axial strain ϵ3 - deviatoric stress q behavior of
granular soil under drained triaxial conditions can be approximated well by a hyperbolic relation:

−ϵ3
q = σ1 − σ3 = , (3.45)
b −  · ϵ3

with
1
= E ≃ 2 · E50 , (3.46a)
b
1 qƒ
= q = , (3.46b)
 Rƒ

where q is the asymptotic value of the deviatoric stress and E is the initial stiffness. Duncan
and Chang [14] extended this formulation by introducing the limit value to the deviatoric stress
q in form of the ultimate deviatoric stress qƒ = q · Rƒ . The ratio between qƒ and q is given by
the failure factor Rƒ , which is smaller than 1.0.

1
E =
1 b
q =

E50

qƒ

σ1 − σ3
E

ε3

Figure 3.10: Kondner stress-strain behaviour

Stress dependent stiffness

Granular materials show a stiffness behaviour that is dependent on the stress state (and the
compactness of the packing). Extending the approach from (Ohde 1939, 1951) - which was
derived from oedometric testing - by cohesive terms the oedometric modulus’ magnitude de-
pends on the effective axial stress state according to:

3-60 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

σ3 [kP]
σ reƒ Ereƒ
s
1.0

ε3 [−]

Figure 3.11: Ohde stress-strain behaviour

Œm
|σ3 | · sin φ + c · cos φ
‚
Es = Es,reƒ · (3.47)
preƒ · sin φ + c · cos φ

Parameter m generally varies between 0.4 and 0.75.

In contrast to oedometric test conditions, lateral expansion is not constrained under triaxial
conditions. Due to the changed boundary conditions the triaxial modulus’ stiffness E50 deviates
from the stiffness modulus. E50 is defined as secant stiffness that corresponds to a 50-percent
mobilisation of the maximum shear capacity (figure 1). Choosing the smaller compressive
stress σ1 as reference stress, a relation anlogous to equation (4) can be established for the
stiffness evolution of the triaxial modulus E50 (Kondner & Zelasko 1963, Duncan & Chang
1970), which is then used in the model equations (1) to (3).
Œm
|σ1 | · sin φ + c · cos φ
‚
E50 = E50,reƒ · (3.48)
preƒ · sin φ + c · cos φ

An analogous approach for the elastic un-/reloading stiffness yields:

Œm
|σ1 | · sin φ + c · cos φ
‚
Er = Er,reƒ · (3.49)
preƒ · sin φ + c · cos φ

From empirical observations E50,reƒ ≈ Es,reƒ .

Plastic volumetric strain (triaxial stress states)

Like other plasticity models, the Hardening Plasticity Soil model incorporates a relationship
between activated plastic shear strains ϵp and corresponding plastic volumetric strains ϵp, .
The according flow rule in rate form reads

ϵ̇p, = ϵ̇p · sin ψm (3.50)

For the Hardening Plasticity Soil model, the so-called mobilized dilatancy angle ψm is defined

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-61

AQUA | Input Description

from the well-established stress dilatancy theory (Rowe [4]) as (Fig. 3.12)

sin φm − sin φcs

sin ψm = , (3.51)
1 − sin φm sin φcs

see also subsubsection 3.11.2. Therein, the critical state friction angle φcs marks the transition
between contractive (small stress ratios with φm < φcs ) and dilatant (higher stress ratios with
φm > φcs ) plastic flow. The mobilized friction angle φm in Eq. 3.51 is computed according to

σ1′ − σ3′
sin φm = (3.52)
2c · cot φ − σ1′ − σ3′

At failure, when φm ≡ φ , also the dilatancy angle reaches its final value ψm ≡ ψ . Accordingly,
from Eq. 3.51 the critical state friction angle can be derived as

sin φ − sin ψ
sin φcs = (3.53)
1 − sin φ sin ψ

SOFiSTiK performs the computation of the critical state friction angle φcs automatically on
basis of the user specification for the final angles φ and ψ .

It has been recognized that in some cases the Rowe’s model for dilatancy angles (Eq. 3.51)
can overestimate the contractive behavior of the soil at low mobilized friction angles, φm < φcs .
As a remedy, several researchers have developed modified formulations based on the original
Rowe’s model. Some of these models which are implemented in SOFiSTiK are described
below.

One of the models which do not require additional input parameters is the model according to
Søreide [15] which modifies the Rowe’s formulation by using the scaling factor sin φm / sin φ
(Fig. 3.12)

sin φm − sin φcs sin φm

sin ψm = · . (3.54)
1 − sin φm sin φcs sin φ

This method is activated with the TALPA/ASE commands TALPA: CTRL MSTE EMAX 2 and
ASE: CTRL MSTE W4 2.

Wehnert [6] proposed a model based on a lower cut-off value ψ0 for the modification of the
Rowe’s formulation from Eq. 3.51 at low mobilized friction angles (Fig. 3.12)

sin ψ0 ; 0 < ψm ≤ ψRoe

m
sin ψm = sin φm − sin φcs . (3.55)

 ; ψRoe
m
< ψm ≤ ψ
1 − sin φm sin φcs

This dilatancy model obviously requires a specification of an additional parameter ψ0 . TALPA

/ ASE commands TALPA: CTRL MSTE EMAX 1 EMIN ψ0 or ASE: CTRL MSTE W4 1 W5 ψ0
will deactivate the original Rowe’s model and activate the model acc. to Wehnert [6].

Consideration of a constant dilatancy angle ψm ≡ ψ , i.e. the deactivation of relationship from

Eq. 3.51, can optionally be requested by specifying TALPA: CTRL MSTE EMAX 0 or ASE:
CTRL MSTE W4 0 in the corresponding TALPA / ASE run (Fig. 3.12).

3-62 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

ψm [ ◦ ]
Rowe
Soreide
20 Wehnert, ψ0 = −3◦
Constant
ψ = 10

φcs
0 φm [ ◦ ]
5 15 25 φ = 35
ψ0
-10

-20

Figure 3.12: Comparison of models for mobilized dilatancy angle ψm implemented in SOFiSTiK for
φ = 35◦ and ψ = 10◦

Hint
It should be noted that for saturated soils under undrained conditions, the evolution of ex-
cess pore water pressures shows a pronounced sensitivity regarding the volumetric defor-
mation behavior of the soil phase. As a consequence, when carrying out corresponding
simulations using the 2-phase model, the dilatancy model parameters should be carefully
selected. Ideally, model parameters should be calibrated according to laboratory tests.

For more information regarding the effect of different modeling approaches on the
volumetric deformation behavior of soil under undrained conditions, also refer to
the documented benchmark “Triaxial Consolidated Undrained (CU) Test” in VERIFICA-
TION_MANUAL_MECHANICAL: BE48.

Nonlinear state variables

• Plastification number
Identifier for the current material state of loading:
0 elastic
+2 deviatoric hardening
+4 volumetric hardening (cap)
+8 material failure (Mohr-Coulomb)
Example: For the current loading stage, a material point experiences hardening in both
’directions’ and finally reaches the failure limit. The corresponding value of the
identifier amounts to 14=2+4+8.
• Plastic deviatoric strain → section 3.11.3
• Plastic volumetric strain → section 3.11.3
• Mobilized friction angle φm
Measures the degree of shearing strain based on the Mohr-Coulomb criterion. Computed
according to equation (9).
• Utilisation level

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-63

AQUA | Input Description

Ratio  ≡ φm / φnp ≤ 1 , where φnp is the maximum (ultimate) friction angle provided as
material input parameter.
• Isotropic pre-consolidation stress
Hydrostatic stress pc marking the highest state of compression that was reached in loading
history (cap); the hydrostatic stress being defined as p ≡ σ + σy + σz / 3 .

• Mobilized dilatancy angle ψm

Used dilatancy angle for the current loading stage. Computed according to equation (9), if
dilatancy theory is activated. Otherwise equal to material input parameter: ψm = ψ .

Special comments
The model can easily be calibrated according to triaxial/oedometric test data. Therefore, de-
formation behaviour of the material prior to failure can be captured with a good accuracy. This
feature, combined with the consideration of specific stiffnesses for primary and un-/reloading,
respectively, constitutes a significant progress when compared to the behaviour of classic
elasto-plastic soil material models. Consequently, GRAN is particularly suited for tasks that
require more precise settlement predictions.

If no precise data is available, then the following estimations may be used for an approximation
of the properties of normally consolidated soil:

preƒ = 100 kP (3.56a)

m ≃ 0.4 . . . 0.7 (3.56b)
Rƒ ≃ 0.7 . . . 0.9 (3.56c)
E50,reƒ ≈ Es,reƒ (3.56d)
Er,reƒ ≃ 3 · E50,reƒ (3.56e)

As a consequence of the GRAN hardening plasticity formulation, Poisson’s ratio MUE (

MAT/MATE ) should be chosen to mimic the elastic loading behavior (i.e. unloading, reloading)
of the soil skeleton, only. The actual evolution of lateral stresses during primary loading is con-
trolled by the hardening plasticity formulation itself. Therefore - as opposed to common practice
with elastic-ideal plastic material models, where calibration for primary loading behavior often
results in values MUE>>0.3 - for the hardening plasticity formulation suitable values of MUE
are significantly lower, usually in the range from 0.2 to 0.3. For higher values, the development
of volumetric strains is prone to be overestimated (also at the cost of model performance).

References
The implementation of this material model essentially adopts concepts and strategies from
Schanz [16], Benz [17], Kondner and Zelasko [13], Desai and Christian [18] and Duncan and
Chang [14].

3.11.8 SWEL Swelling Soil

Application range
Additional parameters to account for swelling of soils due to stress disturbance (unloading).

Parameters

3-64 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

SWEL Description Unit Default

P1 Swelling modulus Kq

h
1081 3.3
kN/ m2
 
P2 Swelling limit stress (absolute value) |σc | > 0 1089 10.0
(magnitude of smallest compressive stress below which no
further increase of swelling occurs)
kN/ m2
 
P3 Historical swelling equilibrium stress (absolute value) from 1089 2000.0
oedometer testing |σ0,hst | > |σc |
P4 Viscous extension: retardation time η ≥ 0.0 h 0.0

Relationship between stress and swelling strains of the final state:


0 σ < σ0




σ
  

q
ϵ∞ = −p1 · log 10 σ0 ≤ σ ≤ −p2 (3.57)
  σ0 
σc



log10

−p2 < σ
σ0

where

 1..3
σ principal normal stresses
σ0 equilibrium state of stress w.r.t. swelling (initial condition), transformed to the
direction of the principal normal stresses σ

Special comments
Swelling of soils is a complex phemomena that is influenced by various factors. There are two
swelling mechanisms of practical importance that can be distinguished - for both processes
the presence of (pore-) water is a common prerequisite. The first mechanism is termed as the
”osmotic swelling” of clay minerals, which basically is initiated by unloading of clayey sedimen-
tary rock. The second mechanism takes place in sulphate-laden rock with anhydride content.
In this case the swelling effects are due to the chemical transformation of anhydride to gypsum-
which goes along with a large increase in volume (61%).

For both described mechanisms a principal dependency between the increase in volume,
caused by swelling, and the state of stress was observed both in laboratory and in in-situ
experiments. The formula employed represents a generalization of the 1-dimensional stress-
strain relationship that HUDER and AMBERG derived from oedometer tests for the final state.
Here the time dependent evolution of the swelling process is not considered.

The equilibrium stress state with respect to swelling σ0 is defined by means of the GRP record.
For this we use the option PLQ in order to reference a (previously calculated) load case as
”primary state for swelling”. This state is regarded as an equilibrium state with respect to
swelling (normally in-situ soil prior to construction work). I.e. swelling strain increments caused
by an eventual ”unloading” from the historical equilibrium state σ0,hst to this new ”primary
state” σ0 have already occurred. Swelling strain increments in the course of construction work
are only due to unloading related to the new ”primary state for swelling” σ0 :

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-65

AQUA | Input Description

Upper Limit
Test Data
Grob (Eq.2)
1.0
σc = −2 kN/ m2
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5 εq [%]
0.4

kq = 0.33 %
0.3
0.2
0.1

-800 -700 -600 -500 -400 -300 -200 -100 0 100 200

σ [kN/ m2 ]

Figure 3.13: Swelling process

q q q
(Δ) ϵ∞ = ϵ,tot − ϵ,hst
σ σ0
§  ª §  ª
= −p1 · log − −p1 · log
σ0,hst σ0,hst (3.58)
σ
 
= −p1 · log
σ0

The constitutive equation reproduced above is limited to the final (stationary) state, i.e. it relates
the evolved swelling strains to the stress state that is present at time t = ∞ . To account for time
dependent behaviour, the relation is extended to the time scale by a formal viscous approach.
Correspondingly, the rate of swelling strains is defined as
q
ϵ∞ (σ)−ϵq
ϵ̇q = (3.59)
η

with the retardation time η as a viscosity parameter and ϵq denoting the swelling strains that
have developed at the considered time t . In rheological terms this approach can be interpreted
as a parallel coupling of a ’swelling’ and a dashpot device.

The time dependent response can be calibrated via the retardation time η (P4) - the greater
η the more accentuated is the retardation in the evolution of swelling strains. For η = 0 the
response is instantaneous, identical with the non-viscous (instationary) case. Furthermore,
for t → ∞ the model’s response converges to the instationary solution - independent of the
adjusted retardation time η . This property enables application of the viscous model also for
stabilisation of the solution process, even if one is not explicitly interested in modelling time
effects.

The SWEL record is specified in addition to a linear elastic or elastoplastic basic material.

Anisotropy is not possible with this model.

3-66 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

References
The implementation of this material model essentially adopts concepts and strategies from:
Wittke-Gattermann [19], Wittke [20], Wittke and Rissler [21], Baugrund-Institut [22], and
Zienkiewicz and Taylor [9].

3.11.9 FAUL Oriented Shear Planes

Application range
Complementary definition of oriented shear planes, anisotropic elasto-plastic material law.

Parameters

FAUL Description Unit Default

P1 Friction angle φs , shear plane [ ◦] !

kN/ m2
 
P2 Cohesion cs , shear plane 1089 !
kN/ m2
 
P3 Tensile capacity ƒt,s , shear plane 1089 0.0
P4 Dilatancy angle ψs , shear plane [ ◦] 0.0
P5 Meridian angle of shear plane (OAL) [ ◦] 0.0
P6 Descent angle of shear plane (OAF) [ ◦] 0.0
P5 Streichwinkel der Kluftebene (OAL) [ ◦] *
P6 Fallwinkel der Kluftebene (OAF) [ ◦] *
kNm/ m2
 
P9 Tensile fracture energy Gƒ 0.0

The shear stress over the designated shear plane and corresponding plastic strain develop-
ment is controlled by means of the yield condition ƒ1 and plastic flow rule g1 according to

ƒ1 = tn φs · σ − cs + τ ≤ 0 (3.60a)
g1 = tn ψs · σ + τ (3.60b)

where:

σ stress acting normal to shear plane,

τ maximum shear stress acting in the direction of the shear plane.

The tensile stress normal to the plane is limited by the additional cut-off criterion

ƒ2 = σ − ƒt,s ≤ 0 (3.61)

where again:

σ stress acting normal to shear plane.

Nonlinear state variables

Shear plane hardening variable: Plastic deviatoric strain in the plane of the shear joint.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-67

AQUA | Input Description

Special comments
This material law may be specified up to three times in addition to the material law of the base
material (elastic, MOHR, DRUC). This allows for the consideration of different distinct fault
directions. Increasing the number of specified shear planes per material, also increases the
number of possible equilibrium states for a material point - this may possibly affect the stability
of the overall equilibrium iteration process.

Specification of meridian angle OAL and descent angle OAF follows the instructions given
in the descriptions for input records MAT/MATE. For planar systems the value OAL directly
defines the slope of the stratification, i.e. the angle between the local x direction and the global
X direction. Input for OAF is not evaluated for the plane case.

For P9>0 a scalar damage model with exponential softening of the tensile strength is applied.
The softening obeys
§ ƒt,s ª
ƒt,s = ƒt,s · ep −  · (3.62)
Gƒ

where  denotes the crack opening. In this context, the tensile fracture energy Gƒ represents
an objective material parameter. In order to minimize discretization dependent spurious side
effects, a characteristic element size is incorporated into the softening formulation. This re-
quires, however, a sufficiently fine finite element discretization in the corresponding system
domains.

In case of P9=0 a tension cut-off with respect to ƒt,s without consideration of softening is
executed.

References
The implementation of this material model essentially adopts concepts and strategies from
Chrisfield [8] und Zienkiewicz and Taylor [9].

3.11.10 ROCK Material with oriented Shear Plane

Application range
Anisotropic elasto-plastic material with oriented shear plane.

Parameters

ROCK Description Unit Default

P1 Friction angle φs , shear plane [ ◦] !

kN/ m2
 
P2 Cohesion cs , shear plane 1089 !
kN/ m2
 
P3 Tensile capacity ƒt,s , shear plane 1089 0.0
P4 Dilatancy angle ψs , shear plane [ ◦] 0.0
P5 Inclination of shear plane α , angle against x-axis (0 − 180) [ ◦] 0.0
P6 Friction angle φr , rock [ ◦] !
kN/ m2
 
P7 Cohesion cr , rock 1089 !
Table continued on next page.

3-68 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

ROCK Description Unit Default

kN/ m2
 
P8 Tensile capacity ƒt,r , rock 1089 0.0
P9 Dilatancy angle ψr , rock [ ◦] 0.0

Shear plane:

ƒs1 = tn(p1) · σ − p2 + τ ≤ 0 (3.63a)

gs1 = tn(p4) · σ + τ (3.63b)
ƒs2 = σ − p3 ≤ 0 (3.63c)

where:

σ stress acting normal to shear plane,

τ maximum shear stress acting in the direction of the shear plane.

Rock material (Mohr-Coulomb):

1 sin θ sin φ
 
Æ
ƒr = 1 sin φ + J2 cos θ − p − c cos φ ≤ 0 (3.64a)
3 3
2 sin ψ Æ
gr = p (3 ± sin ψ) · 1 + J2 (3.64b)
3

Special comments
The mpdel allows to specify the strength of the rock as well as the capacity of a predominant
shear plane, which is are defined by the angle P5. The flow rule of the hear failure is non-
associated if P4 is different from P1.

References
The implementation of this material model essentially adopts concepts and strategies from
Chrisfield [8] and Zienkiewicz and Taylor [9].

3.11.11 UNDR Undrained Soil

If there is no possibility for drainage of water from soil pores because the boundaries of the soil
have been sealed-off, or because the loading rate is so high and the permeability is so low that
the outflow of water is neglectable, no consolidation of the soil will take place. In this case the
soil behavior is dominantly undrained and hence undrained stress analysis can be performed.

Application range
For soils saturated with water with low permeability and high loading rate and when the short
term behavior has to be assessed.

Parameters

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-69

AQUA | Input Description

UNDR Description Unit Default

P1 Skempton’s B-parameter − 0.978

Limits: 0.909 ≤ B ≤ 0.998

Undrained Soil
Soil is a porous material consisting of solid particles which together represent the grain skele-
ton. The pores can be filled with fluid (commonly water) and air. Hence we talk about soil as a
three phase system (Figure 3.14).

V Air n
Vn n
V Water n

V 1
Solid
Vs 1−n
Particles

(a) Soil element (b) Volume and porosity

Figure 3.14: Soil as three phase system

The solid particles occupy the volume Vs . An important basic parameter of soil is the porosity
n, which is defined as the ratio of the volume of the pores Vn and the total volume of the soil V
(Figure 3.14b), i.e.
Vn
n= . (3.65)
Vs

As aforementioned, a part of pore volume is usually occupied by water V while the rest is filled
with air V . When the volume of air in pores approaches zero, i.e. V → 0, the water completely
occupies the pore space (Vn = V ) and we speak of soil fully 1 saturated with water.

For the following, unless stated otherwise, we restrict ourselves to the soils saturated with
water.

Let us consider an element of soil saturated with water subjected to some external total force
P acting on a plane with area A (Figure 3.15). These external forces are transmitted by a
pore water pressure p and by stresses in the particles. The stresses in the particles are
a result of the the concentrated forces acting on the contact points between the grains and
the pressure in water encompassing the grains (Figure 3.15a). Assuming that the particle
stiffness is much higher than the stiffness of the soil skeleton as a whole, it follows that the
soil element can deform only by sliding and rolling in the contact points between the particles.
Hence the deformation of the soil skeleton depends solely on the concentrated forces acting
1 As will be illustrated below, a complete saturation with V = 0 is a theoretical concept rather than a realistic
option. When we use the terminus saturated soil, it should be thought of as quasi-saturated.

3-70 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

on the contact points between the particles.

P
P

s s As ≈ A
s s

p

N′

(a) Soil element (b) Forces and stresses acting on s − s

Figure 3.15: Effective stress principle

Having aforementioned in mind, inside the soil element we can construct a surface s − s which
crosses trough the points of contact between the soil particles (Figure 3.15a). Due to the
relatively small size of soil particles, the s − s surface does not differ much from the plane and
hence it has an area As which is approximately equal to A. The contact forces acting on s − s
can be resolved into tangential and normal component N , acting in the direction of the force P.
Assuming that the contact areas between the soil particles are practically points (their area is
negligible compared to A), the pressure in the water p will also act on the surface s − s over
the entire area As ≈ A. We can now write the equilibrium equations for the surface s − s in the
vertical direction (Figure 3.15b) as follows:
X
P= N′ + p · A . (3.66)

P ′
Dividing Eq. 3.66 with A and introducing the notation σ = P/ A and σ ′ = N / A we get:


σ = σ ′ + p . (3.67)

Eq. 3.67 represents the basis for one of the fundamental principles of soil mechanics pos-
tulated by Karl Terzaghi - the principle of effective stress. This principle states that the total
normal stress σ comprises of effective normal stress σ ′ and pore water pressure p . The
effective normal stress σ ′ is a measure of contact forces of granular material and hence, under
the assumptions stated above, it governs the deformation of soils.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-71

AQUA | Input Description

Hint
The Therzaghi’s effective stress principle is based on three main assumptions:

1. Soil is saturated with water

2. Soil particles are very stiff compared to the soil as a whole
3. Contact areas between the soil particles are very small

For standard saturated soil these assumptions are valid; however for rock some of these
assumptions may not hold. In this case the compressibility of rock must be taken into
account and therefore Eq. 3.67 should be modified to take this fact into an account.

The Terzaghi’s principle generalized for a three-dimensional body reads: the total normal
stresses in a saturated soil consist of two parts: effective normal stresses and pore (water
or fluid) pressures (Terzaghi [23]). The effective shear stresses are equal to the total shear
stresses since the resistance of pore water (fluid) to shear is neglegible. This can be described
by the following equations:

σ = σ′ + p ,  = {, y, z} (3.68a)

′
τjk = τjk , j, k = {, y, z} , j ̸= k (3.68b)

where:

σ, τ total normal and shear stresses,

σ′, τ′ effective normal and shear stresses,
p pore (water) stress (negative for pressure).

Writing the Eqs. 3.68 in matrix form, the total stress increments can be expressed as

Δσ = Δσ ′ + Δσ  , (3.69)

where:
h iT
Δσ ′ = Δσ′ Δσy′ Δσz′ Δτy Δτz Δτyz , (3.70a)
h iT
Δσ  = Δp Δp Δp 0 0 0 . (3.70b)

Effective stress increments are

Δσ ′ = D′ · Δϵ , (3.71)

where D′ denotes the elasticity matrix of the soil skeleton, as described in MATE.

Pore stress comprises of two parts: steady-state pore stress ps and excess pore stress pe :

p = ps + pe . (3.72)

The rate of change of the steady-state part of the pore stress Δps is equal to zero and hence
the rate of change of pore pressure Δp is equal to the rate of change of excess pore pressure

3-72 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Δpe , i.e.

Δp = Δpe . (3.73)

In the undrained conditions the relative movement between the water (fluid) and soil skeleton
is negligible and therefore the strains are the same for each phase of the soil. Hence, for the
water stress increments we can write:

Δσ  = D · Δϵ , (3.74)

with D representing the pore water stiffness matrix which is given by:
 
1 1 1 0 0 0
 
1 1 1 0 0 0 
 

 
1 1 1 0 0 0 
 
D = Ke ·   . (3.75)


 0 0 0 0 0 0 

 

 0 0 0 0 0 0 

0 0 0 0 0 0

Ke is a constant and represents the equivalent bulk modulus of the pore fluid (water). Sub-
stituting Eq. 3.75 into Eq. 3.74, and having in mind Eqs. 3.70b and 3.76, we can write the
relationship between the rate of excess pore water pressure Δpe and the rate of volumetric
strain Δϵ

Δpe = Ke · Δϵ + Δϵy + Δϵz = Ke · Δϵ .

(3.76)

The modulus Ke is related to the bulk modulus of the pore water K . This relationship is
examined next.

In an elementary volume V of saturated soil under undrained conditions the pore water occu-
pies a volume V = n · V and the solid soil particles occupy a volume Vs = (1 − n) · V , where n
is the porosity (Figure 3.14) . The total volume change in the soil ΔV is equal to the change of
volume in the soil particles ΔVs plus the change of volume in the pore water ΔV , i.e.

ΔV = ΔVs + ΔV . (3.77)

Since the soil particles are assumed to be incompressible (ΔVs ≈ 0), the change of the volume
V can take place only on the account of the change of porosity. Since the soil is saturated with
water and under undrained conditions, the change of porosity is only possible if the water in
the pores changes its volume. Taking this into an account and dividing Eq. 3.77 with V , the
total volume change per unit volume of soil Δϵ reduces to:
ΔV ΔV
Δϵ ≈ = ·n . (3.78)
V V

The change of volume in the pore water per unit area of pore water, ΔV / V , is directly pro-
portional to the change of pore water pressure Δpe and inversely proportional to the bulk

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-73

AQUA | Input Description

modulus of pore water K . Now the volumetric strain of soil can be written as
Δpe
Δϵ ≈ ·n . (3.79)
K

Comparing Eqs. 3.76 and 3.79 the relationship between the equivalent bulk modulus of the
pore water Ke and the bulk modulus of the pore water K can finally be established Potts and
Zdravković [24]:
K
Ke ≈ . (3.80)
n

Writing the effective stress principle given by the Eq. 3.69 in terms of the isotropic stress
p = (σ1 + σ2 + σ3 )/ 3, and taking into consideration Eqs. 3.71 and 3.74, we get

K K
Δp = Δp′ + Δpe = K ′ Δϵ + Δϵ ⇒ K = K ′ + , (3.81)
n n

where K ′ = Δp′ / Δϵ is the bulk modulus of soil skeleton, while K = Δp/ Δϵ represents the
undrained total bulk modulus of soil.

The equivalent pore water bulk stiffness K / n can be defined by the bulk modulus of the
soil skeleton K ′ and the Skempton’s B-parameter, which is convenient since the Skempton’s
B-parameter can be measured experimentally in the undrained triaxial test. It is for this rea-
son that the Skempton’s B-parameter is chosen as an input parameter (parameter P1) for the
undrained material properties 2 .

In the undrained triaxial compression test where the soil sample is subjected to the isotropic
compression (Δσ1 = Δσ2 = Δσ3 ), Skempton’s B-parameter represents the relationship be-
tween the change of pore pressure Δp and the change of isotropic total stress Δp =
(Δσ1 + Δσ2 + Δσ3 )/ 3, i.e.

Δp = Δpe = B · Δp . (3.82)

Combining Eqs. 3.82 and 3.81 we can finally obtain the relationship between the equivalent
bulk modulus of the pore water and the bulk modulus of the soil skeleton K ′ trough Skempton’s
B-parameter3
K B
Ke = = · K′ . (3.83)
n 1−B

Theoretically, for soils fully saturated with water, K is equal to the bulk modulus of pure water
K0 . In many applications the water is assumed to be an incompressible fluid (K 0 = ∞), which

would then imply that the saturated soil is also incompressible (K = ∞). This corresponds to
the value B = 1, which also marks the upper limit for the Skempton’s B-parameter. This limit
value describing fully incompressible behavior of the pore water ( K / n → ∞, when B → 1; Eq.
3.83) and saturated soil cannot be reached within a FE calculation due to the singularity of the
stiffness matrix which then occurs.
2 Skempton [25] has expressed the pore pressure change Δpe occurring under changes in total principle
stresses Δσ1 and Δσ3 by the equation: Δpe = B · [Δσ3 + A · (Δσ1 − Δσ3 )]. He termed the coefficients A and B
as “Pore-pressure Coefficients“, also know as “Skempton’s A and B Coefficients“.
3K / n = B · K .
 

3-74 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

However, fully incompressible behavior of the water is not realistic - water has a very large but
finite bulk modulus K 0 = 2 · 106 kN/ m2 , and hence the bulk stiffness of the pore water K / n

is always finite, even if the soil is fully saturated. It follows that Skempton’s B-parameter in real
applications is always smaller than one.

Hint
Moreover, full saturation is also not feasible in reality. Practically, it is not possible to
squeeze out the pore air volume V completely. Since the ’stiffness’ of air is considerably
smaller than the bulk stiffness of pure water K 0 , even a very small fraction of remaining

pore air volume has a significant impact; the resulting equivalent bulk modulus of the pore
fluid K / n shows very high sensitivity with respect to the degree of saturation S = V / Vn .
This relationship can be approximated by the following expression (Verruijt [26]):
0 ·p
K
1 S 1−S K 0 1
= + ⇒ Ke = = · , (3.84)
K 0
K p0 n (1 − 0
S) · K + S · p0 n

where p0 is the absolute pressure in the water, considered with respect to vacuum (p0 =
100kN/ m2 ).

For illustration: despite an almost complete saturation of 99.9%, i.e. S = 0.999, this
0 / K ≈ 20 – the compressibility of the pore fluid is about 20
relation indicates a ratio of K 
times higher than the one of pure water!

To avoid potential numerical problems associated with very high stiffness values in FE calcula-
tions, the following upper limits are used in the program:
K / n 500
≤ 500 ⇒ B≤ ≈ 0.998 . (3.85)
K′ 501

On the other hand, in order to have the realistic computational results (B ≈ 1), the pore water
stiffness K / n must be substantially larger than the stiffness of the soil skeleton K ′ . Therefore
the lower limits are set to
K / n 10
≥ 10 ⇒ B≥ ≈ 0.909 . (3.86)
K′ 11

Default values for bulk stiffness of pore water and Skempton’s B-parameter are
K / n 45
= 45 ⇒ B= ≈ 0.978 . (3.87)
K′ 46

Very often, the stiffness of the pore water K / n is expressed in terms of the undrained Pois-
son’s ratio ν , the bulk modulus of the soil skeleton K ′ and the effective Poisson’s ratio ν ′ :
4

K 3(ν − ν ′ )
= · K′ . (3.88)
n (1 − 2ν )(1 + ν ′ )

It follows from Eqs. 3.88 and 3.83 that the undrained Poisson’s ratio and the Skempton’s B-
parameter are not independent of each other. They are connected by the following expressions
4E
 = G · (1 + ν ) , K = E / [3(1 − 2ν )]

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-75

AQUA | Input Description

3ν ′ + B(1 − 2ν ′ ) 3(ν − ν ′ )
ν = ⇔ B= . (3.89)
3 − B(1 − 2ν ′ ) (1 + ν )(1 − 2ν ′ )

The fully incompressible behavior of the saturated soils represented by B = 1 corresponds to

ν = 0.5.

Once the bulk stiffness of pore water K / n is know so is the pore water stiffness matrix D ,
and the total stresses increments can be related to strains:

Δσ = (D′ + D ) · Δϵ . (3.90)

3.11.12 LADE Elasto-plastic Material Law

Elasto-plastic material according to LADE with non-associated flow rule.

Application range
All materials with friction including rock and concrete (module ASE, 3D solid elements)

Parameters

LADE Description Unit Default

P1 Parameter η1 − !
P2 Exponent m − !
kN/ m2
 
P3 Uniaxial tensile strength ƒt 1089 0.0
P4 Parameter η2 for flow rule − P1/10
kN/ m2
 
P5 Compressive strength (cap) 1089 -
P6 Tensile failure strain ϵt

h
1081 -

p m
   
ƒ= 13 − 27 + η1 · · 3 ≤ 0 (3.91a)
1
p m
   
g = 13 − 27 + η2 · · 3 (3.91b)
1

with

p = 103.32kN/ m2 atmospheric air pressure,

1 = −(σ1 − P3 )−(σ2 − P3 )−(σ3 − P3 )
3 = −(σ1 − P3 )·(σ2 − P3 )·(σ3 − P3 )

Special comments
Due to their non-physical nature, calibration of the LADE model parameters may not be obvious
at first sight. For this reason, the basic procedure for a material with known uniaxial tensile and
compressive strength (e.g. concrete) is described in the following. Of particular interest is
the section of the three-dimensional yield surface with one of the principal planes (-> ”Kupfer

3-76 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Curve”).

Parameter m (exponent) affects the curvature (convexity) of the yield surface towards the hy-
drostatic axis - the larger m the stronger the curvature. In this manner m determines the
shape of the intersection curve. For most types of concrete a value of m between 1.0 and 2.0
is reasonable.

Using the known quantities of uniaxial tensile and compressive strength and the chosen pa-
rameter m, parameter η1 can now be determined from the condition: For the stress state
corresponding to the uniaxial compressive stress limit the yield condition must be fulfilled.

We rewrite the yield function as:

13 |1 | m
!  
η1 = −27 · (3.92)
3 p

The considered stress state is defined by (translated reference system):

σ = σ = −ƒt
σ = − (ƒt + ƒc )
(3.93)
1 = σ + σ + σ
3 = σ · σ · σ

Where ƒt (= P3 ) and ƒc are the magnitudes of the uniaxial tensile and compressive strength,
respectively, 1 and 3 the required invariants for this stress state. Substituing into the rewritten
yield function yields the yet unknown parameter η1 .

The following table contains exemplary parameters for selected concrete types, derived from
the procedure described above (classification according to EC2, Ultimate Limit State).

Strength fcd P3 (fctk;0.05 ) P2 P1

class [ kN/m2 ] [ kN/m2 ] [ -] [ -]

C20/25 13333 1500 1.0 24669.11

1.5 324095.87
C30/37 20000 2000 1.0 43466.02
1.5 689515.99
C40/50 26667 2500 1.0 63426.77
1.5 1153410.57
C50/60 33333 2900 1.0 88162.15
1.5 1778218.62

By specification of parameter P5 the model can optionally be extended by a spherical cap (in
principal stress space) that limits the volumetric compressive stress to a maximum value. This
can be meaningful in particular for mainly hydrostatic compression. The cap is defined by:
q q
ƒ= σ1 2 + σ2 2 + σ3 2 − P5 2 + P5 2 + P5 2 ≤ 0 (3.94)

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-77

AQUA | Input Description

The optional parameter P6 defines a linear decay of the material’s tensile capacity after the
initial tensile strength ƒt has been exceeded, such that ƒt (ϵt ) = 0. If not specified, the behavior
is ideally plastic, the tensile strength remains at the initial value ƒt (tension cut-off). The tension
model is suitable for monotonic loading, only.

References
The implementation of this material model essentially adopts concepts and strategies from
Lade [27].

3.11.13 MEMB Material Law for Polyfabrics/ Textiles

Parameters

MEMB Description Unit Default

P1 Tensile strength (yielding capacity), P1=0.0 is interpreted kN/ m 0.0

as ’no input’ = no limitation
P2 Factor for compression stiffness − 0.0
0.0 no compressive stress possible
1.0 full compressive stress possible
> 0, < 1 intermediate values for scaling the elasticity
modulus

P3 Variation of warp stiffness kN/ m 0.0

P4 Variation of fill stiffness kN/ m 0.0

P1 and P2 should not be used for standard membranes. P1 can be used to limit the maximum
tension force, e.g. for geo textiles.

The failure of a membrane under pressure is generally activated in ASE via SYST...NMAT JES.
For linear elastic membrane materials only NMAT MEMB must be set in AQUA. Examples for
lineare membrane materials siehe [Link]\english\membranes\[Link].

With P3 and P4 the nonlinear yarn warp-fill material law according to Galliot and Luchsinger
[28] can be activated. P3 (ΔE ) and P4 (ΔEƒ ) define the nonlinear variation of the stiffness
in warp and fill direction depending on the stress ratio σ and σƒ (warp fill) . Example see
[Link]\english\membranes\nonlinear_warp_fill_behaviour.dat.

Please notice that in input MAT the E modulus must be input in kN/m2 but the values NMAT
MEMB P1+P3+P4 are in kN/m, see [Link].
σ σƒ
γ = q γƒ = q (3.95)
σ 2 + σƒ 2 σ 2 + σƒ 2

Stress-strain relation:

3-78 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

    
1 −νƒ
ϵ   E (γ ) E (γ )   σ 
 = −νƒ
(3.96)
1
ϵƒ E (γ ) Eƒ (γƒ ) σƒ

with the stress-ratio depending warp and fill stiffness:

1
 
E (γ ) = ΔE γ − p + E1:1  (3.97)
2

1
 
Eƒ (γƒ ) = ΔEƒ γƒ − p + E1:1 ƒ (3.98)
2

3.11.14 User Defined Material Laws

Parameters for user-defined material laws (USP1..USP8 und USD1..USD8)

For the advanced user the modules TALPA (for QUAD-elements) and ASE (for BRIC-elements)
offer the possibility to plug in self-developed non-linear material models via an interface (cur-
rently only for WINDOWS-OS). The following paragraphs describe the interface in detail.

The user-defined material models have to be provided in a Dynamic Link Library (DLL) with
arbitrary name. The variable SOFISTIK_USERMATDLL must be set with the name of this DLL.
This can either be done by specification of

SET SOFISTIK_USERMATDLL=my_material

at the CMD-command prompt or via adding the entry

SOFISTIK_USERMATDLL=my_material

into the [Link] file. In both cases the user defined material models, in the DLL
my_material.dll, are loaded at run-time. The interface routine itself reads:

NMAT3D\_USD( Ss, SsPrim, deltaSn, SnIe, StateV, Mtype,

ParMat, ElcMat, D, C, Ctrl, deltaTime, iNonl,
iUpd, iErr, NrEl, iGP )

Input parameters:

Parameter Dim Type Description

Ss 6 Double Elastic stress tensor (trial stress) [ xx,yy,zz,xy,xz,yz]
SsPrim 6 Double Stress tensor primary state [ xx,yy,zz,xy,xz,yz]
deltaSn 6 Double Strain increment related to primary state
[ xx,yy,zz,xy,xz,yz]
SnIe 6 Double not used
StateV 10 Double State variables

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-79

AQUA | Input Description

Parameter Dim Type Description

Mtype 1 Integer Identifier for material type
USP1-USP8 -> 101-108
USD1-USD8 -> 109-116
ParMat 12 Double Non-linear material parameters P1-P12
ElcMat 16 Double Elastic material constants from record 001/No:1, @1-
@14 (where appropriate multiplied with factor of stiff-
ness FACS!). Additionally FACS at pos 15 and, as the
case may be thickness of QUAD-element at pos 16.
D (6,6) Double Elastic material stiffness matrix
C (6,6) Double Elastic compliance
Ctrl 5 Single Control values from CTRL MSTE- record
deltaTime 1 Double not used
NrEl 1 Integer Element number
iGP 1 Integer Identifier for Gauss-Point

Return values:

Parameter Dim Type Description

Ss 6 Double Updated stress tensor
[ xx,yy,zz,xy,xz,yz]
SnIe 6 Double not used
StateV 10 Double Updated state variables
D (6,6) Double Updated (tangential) material
stiffness matrix
iNonl 1 Integer =0 for linear-elastic response
=1 for non-linear response
iUpd 1 Integer =0 no update of stiffness matrix
=1 update of stiffness matrix (only ASE)
iErr 1 Integer Error indicator
=0 no error
=1 error -> program terminates
=-99 no user defined material model
provided -> program terminates

3-80 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.12 BMAT – Elastic Support / Interface

BMAT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Material number − 1

kN/ m3
 
C Elastic constant normal to surface Cs 1097 0.
kN/ m3
 
CT Elastic constant tangential to surface Ct 1097 0.

kN/ m2
 
CRAC Tensile cracking strength of interface 1089 0.
kN/ m2
 
YIEL Maximum stress of interface 1089 -
MUE Friction coefficient of interface − -
kN/ m2
 
COH Cohesion of interface 1089 -
DIL Dilatancy coefficient − 0.
t/ m2
 
GAMB Equivalent mass distribution 1184 0

TYPE Reference type LT NON

NON Unspecific
RIGD Rigid Frictional Interface
PESS Plane stress condition
PAIN Plane strain condition
HALF Circular bedding at half space surface
CIRC Circular hole in infinite disk
SPHE Spherical hole in infinite space
MREF Number of a reference material − NO
H Reference dimension [m] 1001 !
(thickness H or radius R)
RFAC Interface strength: Strength reduction factor related [] - *
to reference material’s shear strength

BMAT defines for an existing material (e.g. MATE/CONC/BRIC) properties for elastic support.
For a QUAD element it is thus possible to select the properties of the plate and the soil by a
single material number. The support stiffness may be calculated from the elasticity constants
of MREF, a geometric dimension H and a specific geometry rule. The bedding approach works
according to the subgrade modulus theory (Winkler, Zimmermann/Pasternak). It facilitates the
definition of elastic supports by an engineering trick which, among others, ignores the shear
deformations of the supporting medium. The bedding effect may be attached to beam or plate
elements, but in general it will be used as an own element. (see SPRI, BOUN, BEAM or QUAD
and the more general description of BORE profiles)

The determination of a reasonable value for the foundation modulus often presents consider-

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-81

AQUA | Input Description

able difficulty, since this value depends not only on the material parameters but also on the
geometry and the loading. One must always keep this dependance in mind, when assessing
the accuracy of the results of an analysis using this theory.

The subgrade parameters C and CT will be used for bedding of QUAD elements or for the de-
scription of support or interface conditions. A QUAD element of a slab foundation will thus have
a concrete material and via BMAT the soil properties attached to the same material number.
The value C is than acting in the main direction perpendicular to the QUAD surface in the local
z-direction, while CT is acting in any shear direction in the QUAD plane.

If subgrade parameters are assigned to the material of a geometric edge (GLN), spring ele-
ments will be generated along that edge based on the width and the distance of the support
nodes.

3.12.1 Derivation of bedding constants from reference material

Sometimes it is convenient to derive the subgrade moduli from a reference material’s elasticity
modulus E, shear modulus G and Poisson’s ratio μ[1] by providing a reference dimension H
and the type of support:

• Unspecific:
E G
Cs = Ct = (3.99)
H H
• Planar layer with horizontal constraints e.g. for modeling elastic support by columns and
supporting walls (plane stress condition):
E 1 G
Cs = · Ct = (3.100)
H (1 + μ)(1 − μ) H

• Planar layer with horizontal constraints for settlements of soil strata (plane strain condition):
E (1 − μ) 2·G
Cs = · Ct = (3.101)
H (1 + μ)(1 − 2μ) H

• Equivalent circular disk with radius R on an infinite halfspace:

E 2
Cs = · Ct = Cs (3.102)
R π(1 + μ)(1 − μ)

• Circular hole with radius R in infinite disk with plane strain conditions (bedded pipes or
piles):
E 1
Cs = · Ct = Cs (3.103)
R (1 + μ)(1 − 2μ)

• Spherical hole with radius R in infinite 3D elastic continua:

E 2
Cs = · Ct = Cs (3.104)
R (1 + μ)

Including a dilatancy factor describing the volume change induced by shear deformations, we
have for the bedding stresses the following equations depending on the normal and transverse

3-82 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

displacements:

σ = Cs · (s + DL · t ) τ = Ct · t (3.105)

Non-linear effects are controlled by CRAC, YIEL, MUE and COH:

Cracking: Upon reaching the failure stress, the interface fails in both the axial
and the lateral direction. The failure load is always a tensile stress.
If the bedding reaction is applied to a QUAD element, a deformation
in the direction of the local z-axis will create compressive (negative)
stresses.
Yield load: Upon reaching the yield stress, the principal deformation component
of the interface increases without an increase of the stress.
Friction/cohesion: Defining a friction and/or a cohesion coefficient, the lateral shear
stress can not become larger than:
Friction coefficient * normal stress + Cohesion
Please note, that before reaching this limit the stiff-ness CT will pro-
duce the shear stress only if a deformation is present.

If the principal interface has failed (CRAC), then the lateral bedding acts only if 0.0 has been
entered for both friction- coefficient and cohesion.

The non-linear effects can only be taken into account by a non-linear analysis. The friction is
an effect of the lateral bedding, while all other effects act upon the principal direction.

3.12.2 Rigid Frictional Interface

The Rigid Frictional Interface describes the mechanical behavior of a thin interface layer inbe-
tween two bodies with frictional contasct by adopting a friction law of Coulomb type. For the
interface layer a quasi-rigid behavior is assumed.

A typical field of application is the modeling of soil-structure interaction in geotechnical analy-

ses. The Rigid Frictional Interface Element (I2D) is available in the FEA module TALPA.

Hint
For the Rigid Frictional Interface Element (I2D), an explicit provision of stiffness parame-
ters is normally not required; instead, the program establishes appropriate stiffness val-
ues automatically in a mesh adaptive manner. Explicit provision of stiffness parameters
overrides this mechanism, the provided values are adopted unmodified.

Interface strength is determined from the reference material by means of the strength
reduction factor:

MUE = RFAC · tnφreƒ (3.106a)

COH = RFAC · creƒ (3.106b)
CRAC = ƒt,reƒ (3.106c)

For the rigid frictional interface, the strength reduction factor defaults to RFAC = 1.0.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-83

AQUA | Input Description

(Hint continued...)

Alternatively, a direct input of strength parameters is supported, too.

Dilatancy coefficient and equivalent mass distribution have no effect on the interface be-
havior.

3-84 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.13 HMAT – Material Constants HYDRA

HMAT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Material number − !
TYPE Type of material law LT FOUR
DARC Seepage (Darcy, linear)
FORC Seepage (Forchheimer, nonlin.)
MISS Seepage (Missbach, nonlin.)
FLOW General diffusion (e.g. vapor)
FOUR Heatflow (Fourier, linear)
Hydration of concrete:
JONA Jonasson model
HSCM ”Shrinkage-Core” model
WESC Danish model acc. to Wesche

TEMP Temperature or pore pressure level ∗ 0

KXX Isotropic permeability or conductivity ∗ 0.
KYY or anisotropic permeability/conductivity ∗ KXX
KZZ or parameters A,B (Forchheimer), ∗ KXX
KXY or parameters C,M (Missbach) ∗ 0.
KXZ ∗ 0.
KYZ ∗ 0.
S Specific Capacity/Storage coefficient ∗ 0.
NSP effective porosity or moisture grade − *

Parameters for Hydration

A Constant a for JONA / HSCM / WESC − *
B Constant b for JONA / WESC − *
C Constant c for WESC − *
QMAX Maximum heat quantity for hydration kJ/ m3 0.
TK Reference time h 15

TITL Designation of material Lt32 -

HMAT allows to specify three individual sets of constants for three tasks diffusion, seepage
and heat flow for a material. Material properties have to be selected according to literature or
experimental data. But some rough estimates (without warranty) are given here.

For any material there might be up to 15 different sets of materials for different temperatures
[ ◦ Celsius] or pore water pressures [ kPa = kN/m2 ] . With a nonlinear analysis the material
values will then be interpolated between those values.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-85

AQUA | Input Description

Large jumps (e.g. by more than 10 times) of the material values K and S in adjacent regions
can lead to numerical problems in a non-linear calculation, i.e. to a poor iteration process.
These problems can be solved by material transition regions, smaller and more iteration steps
and/or a coarser iteration tolerance.

3.13.1 Hydraulic Parameters

For seepage (DARC,FORC,MISS) the unit for conductivity (KXX, KYY, KZZ) is [ m/sec] , for
storage coefficient (S) [ m3/m] . TEMP is the pressure in [ kPa] .

e.g. Hydraulic permeability (acc. Dyck, Peschke):

Type of soil k [ m/sec]

Sandy gravel 3·10−3 ... 5·10−4
Gravelly sand 1·10−3 ... 2·10−4
Medium sand 4·10−4 ... 1·10−4
Silty sand 2·10−4 ... 1·10−5
Sandy silt 5·10−5 ... 1·10−6
Silty clay 5·10−6 ... 1·10−8
Clay ≈ 10−8

Positive pressures represent saturated flow regions while negative values describe unsaturated
soils. Conductivities and Capacities will be interpolated. Free surface problems also use a
variation of the porosity to account for the effective capacity of the free surface.

Material values may be defined isotropic or anisotropic depending on a stress state from the
database. This is performed by additional data given with the same material number and the
types FVOL, FSIN or FSIT. The difference between FSIN and FSIT is given by the fact that
FSIN modifies the values across the crack, while FSIT does this perpendicular to the crack. It
is recommended to use a linear stress field for that purpose and not a plasticity field.

Within HYDRA the user has the possibility to define material properties for the elements either
via a given material number (engineering constructions) or via the nodes (element material
number = 0), especially for ground water models. Both methods may be used together within
the same system.

For a general diffusion according to potential theory, the unit for conductivity (KXX, KYY, KZZ)
is [ sec/m] , for storage coefficient (S) [ kg/m3/Pa] =[ sec2/m] .

3.13.2 Heat Conduction

Heat conduction according to the equations of Forier (FOUR). The unit for conductivity (KXX,
KYY, KZZ) is [ W/K/m] , for storage coefficient (S) specific capacity*Density [ J/Km3 ] . TEMP is
the temperature in degree Celsius or Kelvin, which may be selected with an explicit unit in the
table headder.

e.g.:

3-86 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Material Conductivity Capacity Elongation Emission

λ [ W/Km] c [ J/kgK] coeff. [ -] rate ε[ -]
[Link] 0.14 ... 1.20 1050
LW concrete 0.70 ... 1.20 1050
concrete 1.60 ... 2.10 1050 1.0·10−5
brickwork 0.50 ... 1.30 950 0.93
insulation 0.020 ... 0.090 850 -
steel 50 850 1.2·10−5 0.06 . . . 0.67
copper 380 850 1.6·10−5 0.04 . . . 0.78
aluminum 200 850 2.4·10−5 0.05 . . . 0.30
timber 0.13 ... 0.20 2500 0.18·10−3
Water 0.58 4187
(S = c·ρ)

If the materials have been defined with CONC, STEE and TIMB, the constants will be preset or
calculated as default for FOUR according to EN 12524 or DIN EN ISO 10456 and the design
codes EN 199x-1-2. For concrete and timber a definition of NSP will select the moisture ratio
with default of 3% for concrete and 10% for timber. For timber, the storage coefficient S is
determined taking into account the ratio of density to dry density (EN 1995-1-2, Table B2).

With explicit definition of a TEMP-value it is possible to create and modify tabulated values.
The default is to use the formulas defined in the Eurocode. The thermal conductivity of the

4500
1.800
4000
1.600
3500
1.400
3000
1.200
1.000 2500 S [kJ/m3/K]

0.800 2000
K [W/m/k]
0.600 1500

0.400 1000

0.200 500
0.00 [◦ C] 0.00 [◦ C]
200.00

300.00

400.00

500.00

600.00

700.00

800.00

900.00

200.00

300.00

400.00

500.00

600.00

700.00

800.00

900.00
100.00

100.00
1000.00

1100.00

1200.00

1000.00

1100.00

1200.00
0.00

0.00

Figure 3.16: Conductivity and Capacity of Concrete

concrete is given by an upper (A=1.0) and a lower (A=0.0) limit. The special effect for S is the
evaporation of pore water.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-87

AQUA | Input Description

.0 50.00 18000
18000
.0 45.00
16000 16000
.0 40.00
14000 14000
.0 35.00
12000 12000
.0 30.00 K [W/m/k]
k [W/m/K] 10000 10000
.0 25.00
8000 8000
.0 20.00
6000 6000 S [kJ/m3/K]
.0 15.00 S [kJ
.0 10.00 4000 4000

00 5.00 2000 2000

.0 0.00 [◦ C] 0.00 0.0 [◦ C]
[ C] [ C]

0.00

100.00

300.00

400.00

500.00

700.00

1000.00

1200.00
1100.00
0.00

100.00

200.00

300.00

500.00

600.00

700.00

800.00

900.00

1000.00

1200.00
1100.00
100.00

200.00

300.00

400.00

500.00

600.00

700.00

800.00

900.00

100.00

200.00

300.00

400.00

500.00

600.00

700.00

800.00

900.00
1000.00

1100.00

1200.00

1000.00

1100.00

1200.00
0.00

0.00
Figure 3.17: Conductivity and Capacity of Structural Steel

1.50 7.00
1.40 6.50
1.30 6.00
1.20 K [W/m/k] 5.50
1.10 5.00
1.00
4.50
0.90
4.00
0.80
0.70 3.50
0.60 3.00
0.50 2.50
0.40 2.00
0.30 1.50
0.20 1.00
0.10 0.50 S [kJ/m3/K]
[◦ C] [◦ C]
100.00

200.00

300.00

400.00

500.00

600.00

700.00

800.00

900.00

100.00

200.00

300.00

400.00

500.00

600.00

700.00

800.00

900.00
1000.00

1100.00

1200.00

1000.00

1100.00

1200.00
0.00

0.00

Figure 3.18: Conductivity and Capacity of Timber

3-88 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.13.3 Hydration of Concrete

For the hydration of concrete it is required to know the maximum heat release QMAX, a func-
tion for the effective age of concrete (see HYDRA CTRL TEFF) and a formula for the hydration
degree α governing all other properties. There are numerous possibilities with different param-
eters. All of them have in common:

TEMP Eine Referenztemperatur [ ◦ C] 10

QMAX The maximum heat quantity [kJ/ m3 ] !
TK The reference time τk [ h] 15
S The exponent for maturity function acc. Saul 1.00

TYPE JONA
Function of Jonasson, an extension to the Byfors definition:
 
τ
  
α = ep b n 1 + (3.107)
τk

Examples of those constants a,b and τk can be found in Appendix A of Heft 512 of the Ger-
man DAfStB, printed with the input record HMAT but the general rule is that you need tests!
Unfortunately there are publications with exchanged parameters a and b.

A,B Parameters a and b [ -[ -1.15,-1.00

The values have to be determined from experiments, values for the total heat in the literature
are often defined in [ kJ/kg] . However the following values might give a rough idea:

Q-max [ kJ/m3] a b τ k [ h]
B25 (Heft 512 DAfStB) 167700 -0.925 -0.42 41.82
B35WU (Heft 512 DAfStB) 135750 -1.185 -1.00 17.53
B35 (Heft 512 DAfStB) 105940 -1.605 -1.00 37.46

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-89

AQUA | Input Description

TYPE HSCM
”Shrinkage-Core” model:

 · (τ − τk )
α = τ > τk (3.108)
1 +  · (τ − τk )

τk is a period with very low chemical reaction, named d in the original formula. Values for a
mass concrete are given by Dussinger:

τk = 2.88[h]  = 0.029[1/ h] (3.109)

TYPE WESC
Danish model according to Wesche:

τk b
‚   Œ
α = ep − (3.110)
τ

ƒcc (t) € Š 0
β = =  · ep c · t −0.55 c = c1 · (3.111)
ƒcc (28d) z

The water cement ratio w0 /z has to be incorporated in the input value c. Please note that
parameter a is used in the original with two different meanings. The following parameters for
the Wesche model can be found in the literature.

Q-max [ kJ/kg] a c1
w0 /z 0.35 0.55 0.75
Z 55 / Z 45 F 380 1.10 1.15 1.20 -1.50
Z 45 L / Z 35 F 295 1.20 1.30 1.40 -2.80
Z 35 L 216 1.30 1.50 1.70 -4.40
Z 25 1.50 1.90 2.30 -7.10

Values for a mass concrete (Z 35L) are given by Dussinger:

τk = 24.87[h]
b = 0.84[−]
0 / z = 0.68[−] (3.112)
 = 1.63[−]
c1 = −4.4[−] ⇒ c = −4.4 · 0.68 = −2.99

Hint: If the maturity function according to Saul is used, the exponent s there might be specified
with item S.

3-90 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.14 CONC – Properties of Concrete

CONC

Item Description Unit Default

NO Material number (1-999) − 1

TYPE Type of concrete (see remarks for list): LT *
C, LC regular / light-weight
FCN Nominal strength class (fck /fck /fc ’ etc.) N/ mm2 *

N/ mm2
 
FC Compressiv strength of concrete 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FCT Tensile strength of concrete 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FCTK Lower fractile strength value fct =fctk,0.05 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
EC Elastic modulus 1090 *
MUE Poisson’s ratio or shear modulus − 0.2
kN/ m3
 
GAM Unit weight 1091 25
ALFA Thermal expansion coefficient [1/ K] 1083 1E-5
SCM Typical material safety factor − *
TYPR Type of service state line LT *
LINE constant elastic modulus
A,B short time lines (EN 1992)
N/ mm2
 
FCR Strength for non-linear analysis 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
ECR Elastic modulus for servicability 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FBD Design bond strength 1093 *
N/ mm2
 
FFAT Fatigue strength fcd,ƒ t 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FCTD Design tensile strength 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FEQR Equiv. tensile strength after cracking 1092 0.0
N/ mm2
 
FEQT Ultimate tensile strength 1092 0.0
N/ mm2
 
GMOD Shear modulus 1090 *
N/ mm2 1090
 
KMOD Bulk modulus *
kg/ m3 1189
 
RHO Density *
GF Fracture energy (MC 2010, [Link]) N/ mm *
MUEC Friction in cracks − *

SCM0 Material safety serviceabilitiy stress-strain curve − *

SCM1 Material safety ultimate limit stress-strain curve − *
SCM2 Material safety calculatoric stress-strain curve − *

TITL Material designation Lt32 *

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-91

AQUA | Input Description

Only if a value is given for FEQR or FEQT the tensile strength of the concrete is applied for the
design and nonlinear analysis.

3.14.1 Eurocode / DIN 1045-1 / OEN B 4700

According to Eurocode EN 1992 and other design codes derived from that the following types
are available:

C = regular concrete
LC = light-weight concrete

As the German DIN Fachbericht anticipates the design rules of the upcoming Eurocode, but
references cite explicitly the old DIN 1045-1, it is recommended to specify the correct material
type with C_EN or CDIN unambiguously.

The cylindrical strength is always to be input for FCN. The default value is 20.

Some properties are dependent on so called boxed values or other national regulations. The
definition of NORM is used to select those variants. The possible values for example are given
in table 3.1 and 3.2 of EN, resp. table 9 and 10 of DIN 1045-1 resp. table 4 of OEN B 4700
and not repeated here in detail.

FCN = ƒck 12 16 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
ƒck,cbe 15 20 25 30 37 45 50 55 60
FCN 55 60 70 80 90 100
ƒck,cbe 67 75 85 95 105 115

The default values for strength and elastic modulus are derived as follows:

FC = 0.85 · ƒck
2/ 3
FCT = 0.3 · ƒck (ƒck < 55)
= 2.12n((ƒck + (ƒck > 55)
8)/ 10 + 1)
EC = 9500(ƒck + 8)0.3 (EN 1992-1992)
EC = 22000(ƒcm / 10)0.3 (EN 1992-2004)
FBD = 2.25 · ƒct,0.05 / γ (Tbl. 5.3.)

The coefficients αcc and αc for the long term strength effects are defined in the national an-
nexes. The Eurocode suggests values between 0.8 and 1.0 and recommends as default the
value of 1.0. However SOFiSTiK uses a default on the safe side of 0.85, if not specified ex-
plicitly in the INI-file according to the national annex. An explicit definition of FC = αcc ·FCN
is possible of cause. However, for the fatigue, bond or tensile strength values all corrective
factors and the safety should be included in the input data.

For the elasticity modules we have to distinguish between a secant modulus Ecm (Input value
EC of this record) for elastic deformations, especially constraining forces and a tangential mod-
ulus Ec0,28 = 1.05 Ecm or Ec0,28 = Ecm / α , used for creep and nonlinear analysis (input item

3-92 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

ECR) where Heft 525 of DAfStb chapter 9.1 provides:

α = 0.8 + 0.2ƒcm / 88 < 1.0 (3.113)

The value ECR may be also defined with an explicit unit [-] as factor to the default value, as
recommended in Heft 600 of DAfStB with 0.85 for non lnear analysis.

For light-weight concrete (LC) according to density RHO has to be defined explicitly in kg/ m3 .
GAM and EC will then be defined appropriately.

Ecm = Ecm · (ρ/ 2200)2 (3.114)

For light-weight concrete, the tensile strength and bond values and limit strains will be scaled by
a factorη1 . For the ultimate limit stress strain law the bilinear version is selected. The different
coefficients for natural sand and other components are selected by AQUA automatically based
on the defined weight and strength.

The fatigue strength may be specified with item FFAT. The formula given in the EN 1992-1-1
Gl. 6.76 is dependent on a some parameters not fully known here: The number of load cycles,
the kind of the cement, the age at the time of the design and its own safety factor. Thus the
user has to specify the final value directly:
ƒck
 
ƒcd,ƒ t = k1 · βcc (t0 ) · ƒcd · 1− ; k1 = 0.85 / 1.0
250 (3.115)
p
βcc (t0 ) = es(1− 28/ t0 ) ; s = 0.20(R) / 0.25(N) / 0.38(S)

For detailed analysis of concrete according to appendix 1 you need to know the kind of cement.
You may specify this by appending a literal to the concrete grade

N normal cement (α = 0.0)

S slow hardening cement (α = -1.0)
R fast hardening / high strength cement (α = +1.0)

In case of a fire design it is required to distinguish between quartzitic and calcareous aggre-
gates. For the second case an additonal character C may be appended to the cement type:
NC, SC and RC.

The usual stress-strain curve of the C types is the parabolic-rectangular stress-strain diagram.
For non-linear analysis or deformation analysis, there are other types A/B available, following
the expression:

σ k · n − n2
= (3.116)
ƒc 1 + (k − 2) · n

with

n = ϵ/ ϵc1
(3.117)
k = Ec0 · ϵc1 / ƒc

For fc the value fck +8 is used for the curves A and B . The maximum strain is limited according

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-93

AQUA | Input Description

to the strength. The A line does not possess a descending branch, and it is thus possibly more
stable numerically. The C line has its stress values even for very large strains and will be the
most robust case.

The safety factors SCM are preset to 1.5 (in Italy to 1.6). However, they should be selected at
the design explicitly, because they are dependent on the loading combinations. For concrete
with high strength the factor will be increased by γ’, which will be incorporated in the strain-
stress laws immediately, to allow a global safety factor to be used for the design.

For non-linear analysis with a unified safety factor according to DIN 1045-1 the strength of the
concrete will be reduced to a value of 0.85α fck , while those of the reinforcements will be raised.
These non linear analysis stress-strain laws are generated automatically for DIN 1045-1. For
DIN EN1992 these alternate curves have to be selected with SSLA CALC 1.3 for CONC and
STEE explicitly.

For steel fibre concrete according to DAfStb-Richtlinie (Juni 2021) it is allowed to use higher
concrete tensile bending strength values for elements with concretes up to C50/60. If desired
the user has to enter that value of FCTD explicitly. Values are defined as follows:

ƒ ƒ
FCTD = ƒ,ctd = ƒ,ctk,ƒ  · αct / γct
ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ
FEQR = ƒeq,ctd, = ƒeq,ctk, · αct · κF · κG / γct
ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ
FEQT = ƒeq,ctd, = ƒeq,ctk, · αct · κF · κG / γct

ƒ
αc = 0.85 (C) / 0.75 (LC)
ƒ
κF = factor for fibre direction
ƒ
κG = factor for member size
ƒ
γct = 1.25

With these values the stress strain laws according to pictures R.1 or R.2. of the DAfStb paper
are created.

The increased saftey factor according [Link] EN 1992 (2004) for cast in place piles with kf =
1.1 has to be specified by the user explicitly.

3.14.2 DIN 1045 old / DIN 4227 / DIN 18806:

The old DIN can be addressed with:

B = regular concrete (DIN)

LB = light-weight concrete (DIN)
SB = pre-stressed concrete (DIN)

The default FCN is 25 for B and LB, and 45 for SB. FCT is defined by:

FCT = 0.25 · FCN2/ 3 (3.118)

Defaults in accordance with old DIN 1045 / DIN 4227 / DIN 18806:

3-94 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FCN 10 15 25 35 45 55
FC:
B (DIN 1045) 7 10.5 17.5 23 30
B (DIN 4227) - - 15.0 21 33
FBD: -
B (DIN 1045) 1.4 1.8 2.2 3.0
EC 22000 26000 30000 34000 37000 39000

as well as the following high-strength concretes:

FCN 65 75 85 95 105 115

FC 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0 60.0 64.0
EC 40500 42000 43000 44000 44500 45000

The density has to be specified in case of light-weight concrete. The default for GAM and EC
then complies with DIN 1055. A bilinear stress-strain curve is usually employed for light-weight
concrete.

For detailed analysis of creep and shrinkage according to DIN 4227 you need the kind of ce-
ment and the consistency. You may specify this by appending a Literal to the class of concrete

KS Normal cement (Z35 F/Z 45F) consistency stiff

KP Normal cement (Z35 F/Z 45F) consistency plastic
KR Normal cement (Z35 F/Z 45F) consistency soft
SL slow hardening cement (Z 25, Z35L / Z45L) / stiff
PL slow hardening cement (Z 25, Z35L / Z45L) / plastic
RL slow hardening cement (Z 25, Z35L / Z45L) / soft
SR very fast hardening cement (Z 55) / stiff
PR very fast hardening cement (Z 55) / plastic
RR very fast hardening cement (Z 55) / soft

DIN 4227 has some contradictions about the bond stress. Chapter 13 gives values which
correspond quite well to the ratios given in table 7 of appendix A1. But these values do not
match those given at DIN 1045 Table 19. Thus we have decided to enlarge the FBD values
for concrete SB by a factor of 1.43. With that amendment the value may be used for the bond
design according to chapt. 13 of DIN 4227.

For standard concrete a parabola-rectangular stress-strain diagram will be selected. SCM will
default to 1.00. If you analyse composite sections you might want to change the value. High
strength concrete will have lesser ultimate strains.

3.14.3 OENORM B 4700 / B 4750

Although the OENORM B 4700 calls itself close to Eurocode, it deviates just with the clas-
sification of concrete based on the cubic strength instead of the cylindrical strength. As the
designation is C resp. LC the user has to select the option NORM OEN.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-95

AQUA | Input Description

B = regular concrete based on cube strength (ÖNORM 4700)

LB = light-weight concrete on cube strength (ÖNORM 4700)
C = regular concrete on cylindrical strength (ÖNORM 4700)
LC = light-weight concrete, cylindrical strength (ÖNORM 4700)

The default FCN is 25 resp. 20.

Defaults in accordance with OENORM B 4700:

FCN 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0

FC 15.0 18.8 22.5 30.0 37.5
FCT 1.9 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.5
EC 27500 29000 30500 32500 35000

SCM is preset to 1.5, FCTK to 0.7 · FCT.

3.14.4 Swiss Standard SIA

The SIA 262 (2003) is very similar to the Eurocodes, but there are numerous deviations (E-
Modulus, bond strength, stress-strain law). As type we have therefore:

C = cylindrical strength of regular concrete (SIA 262)

LC = cylindrical strength of light-weight concrete (SIA 262)

The design strength is calculated according section [Link] and [Link] with two factors ηƒ c
and ηt . The first factor is applied for the definition of FCN automatically. As the second factor
is depending on the design situation it can be modified similar to the Eurocode with a boxed
value ALF-CC beforehand or later.

The elastic moduli are calculated based on the mean strength. For light-weight concrete the
values are corrected depending on the specific weight. The default stress-strain diagram is
always according to the deformation stress strain law of EC-2, even for the design. SCM will
be preset with 1.5.

FCN = ƒck 12 16 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
ƒck,cbe C 15 20 25 30 37 45 50 55 60
ƒck,cbe LC 13 18 22 28 33 38 44 50 55

3.14.5 French BAEL-99

The ”Association francaise de normalisation” has published with the BAEL 91 (Rgle tech-
niques de conception et de calcul des ouvrages et construction en beton arm suivant la meth-
ode des tats limites) a design code with similar regulations as the Eurocode but also with some
deviations in several points. We have implemented the revision of 1999.

This code allows a characteristic strength of the concrete depending on the age of the concrete
and a calculation strength depending on the duration of the loading t , to be defined by the user
explicitly. Further we have:

3-96 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FC = 0.85/Θ · ƒck
Θ = 1.00 (t > 24 h)
Θ = 0.90 (24h > t > 1 h)
Θ = 0.85 (1h > t )
FCT = 0.6 + 0.06 · ƒck (ƒck < 60)
= 0.275 · ƒck 2/ 3 (ƒck ≥ 60)
1/ 3
EC = 11000 · ƒck
FBD = 0.60 · Ψs 2 · ƒct,0.05 / γ ; Ψs = 1.5

High strength concrete up to 80 is defined in appendix F. These have modified stress-strain-

laws.

There is also a class DUCT for the UHPRFC Ductal FM. For the stress strain law the values
GF is taken as w0.3/lc.

3.14.6 Spanish EHE

The Spanish EHE (Instruccin de hormign estructural) is very similar to the Eurocode. Devia-
tions are mainly in the designations, the elastic modulus and in the design algorithms itself.

HA = Hormigón masa/armado 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50

HP = Hormigón pretensado 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50

3.14.7 Swedish BBK

The Swedish BBK has rather complex provisions for the safety factors, which are influenced
by the safety class (see NORM) and are different for the elasticity modulus and the strength.
The new release (2004) uses now the designations according to the EC, but keeps the safety
concept of the old BBK. Then we have:

C = 16, 20, 25, 28, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 54, 55, 58, 60
LC = 8, 12, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60

As the BBK does not state any details about the transition zone in the work law, the user has
the possibility to influence with FCR between 0.6FCK and 1.0FCK the shape of this curve.

3.14.8 Danish DS 411

The Swedish BBK has very complex provisions for the safety factors, which are influenced by
the safety class (see NORM). The following types are available:

C = 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60

For E-modulus and tensile strength specific formulas are provided in the design codes. For the
design it is allowed to use a rectangular stress block, but the default is the Parabula-Rectangle-
Diagram.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-97

AQUA | Input Description

3.14.9 Norwegian NS 3473

The classification of the Norwegian concretes NS is based on the cylindrical strength. Avilable
values are 20 / 25 / 30 / 35 /45 / 55 / 65 / 75 / 85 / 95. For Lightweight concrete (LNS) the
highest strength class is 75.

3.14.10 Italian design codes

The design code ”Decreto Ministeriale Italiane” published in 1996 as well as the 2005 version
of the ”Norme Tecniche” classifies the concrete based on the cubic strength Rck. Even the
Versions of 2008 and 2018 favour this type of strength.

CAN = 2008 / 2018 regular concrete with cube strength fk (γ=1.50)
CAL = 2008 / 2018 light weight concrete with cylindrical strength fck (γ=1.50)
CAN = 1996 regular concrete with cube strength Rck (γ=1.60)
CAP = 1996 prestressed concrete with cube strength Rck (γ=1.50)

The default values for design strength and elastic modulus are as follows:

FC = 0.83 · 0.85 · Rck (1996) = 0.85 · ƒck (2008)

2/ 3 2/ 3
FCT = 0.27 · Rck (1996) = 0.30 · ƒck (2008)
EC = 5700 · Rck 1/ 2 (1996) = (2008)
22000 · (ƒcm / 10)0.3
FBD = 2.25 · ƒct,0.05 / γ

3.14.11 British Standard BS 8110

As type we have:

BS = normal weight concrete BS 8110

The nominal strength FCN is the cube strength. The design strength is obtained by

FC = 0.67 FCN (3.119)

British Standard employ a parabolic rectangle curve, starting from a design cube strength β =
p p
FC/0.67 with 0.24 β strain at full plasticity and an initial stiffness of 5.5 β according to Figure
2.1. The safety factor SCM is preset to 1.5. The bond strength will be set to the non-physical
p
maximum value for table 3.28 of BS 8110 of ƒc .

For Hong Kong slight modifications to British Standards are selected with the country code
p
852. The initial stiffness will then be 5.0 β.

3.14.12 American concrete institute ACI 318M

As class we have the specified compressive strength fc ’ in MPa:

ACI = normal weight concrete ACI 318M

The test values of the cylindrical strength have to exceed the class value by a certain amount
based on the standard deviation. Chapter 5.3 specifies default values for this required distance
as 7.0, 8.5 and 10.0 MPa for class values of fc ’ up to 21, until 35 and above.

3-98 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Æ
As the value of ƒc ′ should not exceed the value of 25/3 MPa in general and different reduc-
tions
Æ have to be applied for lightweight concrete, we use the tensile stress to define the value of
ƒc ′ . The modulus of rupture fr is the upper fractile value of the tension strength. ACI [Link]
defines:
q
ƒr = 0.75 · ƒc ′ < 0.75 · 25/ 3 (3.120)

or for lightweight concrete:

q
ƒr = 0.70 · mn( ƒc ′ , 1.8 · ƒct−m )
q (3.121)
ƒr = 0.70 · 0.75 · ƒc ′
Æ
The ratio of the fractiles is thus 1.26. The mean value fct−m will be preset to 0.5 · ƒc ′ . All
other values will be derived from this value by a factor. If needed the lower fractile may be
given, which will then set the upper value. But this value is only used for those cases where
explicitly the value fr is used within a formula.

The bond strength will be set to the non-physical maximum value for chapter 12.2 of ACI 318
p
to a value of ƒc .

3.14.13 Brasilian NBR 6118-2003

As class we have NBR or C, where the used cement type and the consistency (Abatimento de
acordo) according NBR NM 67 is appended to the strength class for detailed analysis of creep
and shrinkage:

KS Normal cement (CP I and CP II) consistency stiff (0-4 cm)

KP Normal cement (CP I and CP II) consistency plastic (5-9 cm), default
KR Normal cement (CP I and CP II) consistency soft (10-15 cm)
SL slow hardening cement (CP III and CP IV) / stiff
PL slow hardening cement (CP III and CP IV) / plastic
RL slow hardening cement (CP III and CP IV) / soft
SR very fast hardening cement (CP V-ARI) / stiff
PR very fast hardening cement (CP V-ARI) / plastic
RR very fast hardening cement (CP V-ARI) / soft

The modulus of elasticity is given by Ec = 5600 · fck 1/ 2 and Ecs = 0.85Ec . The design curve is
a Parabola-Rectangle with 0.85 · fcd, as tensile strength we have fct,m = 0.3 · ƒck 2/ 3 ; fct,knƒ =
0.7 · fct,m ; fct,sp = 1.3 · fct,m . Bond strength fbd = η1 · η2 · η3 · fctk,nƒ /γc ; η1 =2.25.

3.14.14 Australian AS 3600 and New Zealand NZS 3101

TYPE AS or TYPE NZS selects the respective standard. The characteristic compressive
strength (i.e. 20, 25,32, 40, 50 or 65 MPa) can be entered using FCN (e.g. CONC TYPE
AS FCN 50). Only selected material parameters are currently pre-defined explicitly for AS and
NZS standards. The modulus of elasticity is a function of the mean strength value which is not
provided in these design codes. Therefore the modulus of elasticity is estimated similar to the
EC.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-99

AQUA | Input Description

3.14.15 Chinese Standards

According to GB 50010-2002 we have:

GB = Standard and high strength concrete

The nominal strength FCN (15 to 80) and the the design strength are taken from table 4.1.3./4.
Youngs modulus is derived from 4.1.5.

3.14.16 Indian Standards IS / IRC

With the IRC 112 a complety new design code has been released, which is strongly related to
the Eurocode EN 1992. The nominal strength FCN is now the cylindrical strength. However
there are a lot of deviations in the coefficients, which are not all described here. For example
the mean strength fcm is defined as fck +10 and the tensile strength is about 13% less. More
details may be found in the chapter for the Eurocode.

For the IRC 112 following concretes are availalbe:

C Concrete according to table 6.5

12, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90
and optional character appended for the kind of cement

For the IRC 112 following concretes are availalbe:

IS Concrete according to table 2

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90

3.14.17 Russian Standard SP

This design code has a standard safety of 1.3 for normal and light weight concrete, but also
a table with explicit design strength values Rbn . A modification of this design strength for long
term and short design situations should be done at the design in AQB by selecting DESI or
ACCI, but all other factors should be defined either with an explicit value or as a factor e.g.
0.9[−] at FC.

SNIP Concrete with compressive strength class according SP 63

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
and an optional character appended for
A fine granular concrete group A (naturally hardend
B fine granular concrete group B (autoclave hardened)
LSNI Light weight concrete with compressive strength class according SP 63

The compressive and tensile strength is selected according to tables 6.7/6.8. The elasticity
modulus is taken from table 6.11.

3.14.18 Linear Elastic Concrete

A linear elastic material without tensile stresses is specified for CE. This can be used for analy-
sis of stress distributions of foundations or older design codes with the working stress method.
FC is the allowed compressive stress in those cases. The modulus of this stress strain law
should be less than EC in general and may be specified with Item ECR.

3-100 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

TYPE=B,C,LC,SIA TYPE=LB

σ[N/ mm2 ] σ[N/ mm2 ]

ƒc ƒc

ε [%◦ ] ε [%◦ ]
−2.0 −3.5 −2.0 −3.5

σ[N/ mm2 ] TYPE=BS σ[N/ mm2 ] TYPE=CE

ƒc ƒc σ
E=
ε

ε [%◦ ] ε [%◦ ]
ε −3.5 −2.0 −3.5

TYPR=B,C,R,RS TYPR=A
σ[N/ mm2 ] σ[N/ mm2 ]

ƒc ƒc

ε [%◦ ] ε [%◦ ]
εc1 εc −2.2 εc

Figure 3.19: Stress strain law

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-101

AQUA | Input Description

3.15 STEE – Properties of Metals

STEE

Item Description Unit Default

NO Material number (1-999) − 1

TYPE Type of the material (see remarks) LT *
S Structural steel
B Reinforcing steel
Y Prestressing steel
YC Prestressing steel for cables
AL Aluminium alloy
CLAS Steel class or quality ∗ *

N/ mm2
 
FY Yield strength (f0.01 or f0.02 ) 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FT Tensile strength 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FP Elastic limit 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
ES Elastic modulus 1090 *
MUE Poisson’s ratio − 0.3
kN/ m3
 
GAM Unit weight 1091 *
ALFA Thermal expansion coefficient [1/ K] 1083 *
scm Typical material safety factor obsolete − *
use SCM0,SCM1,SCM2

EPSY Permanent strain at yield strength FY o/ oo *

EPST Ultimate strain εk o/ oo *
REL1 Coefficient of relaxation (0.70 fpk ) % *
REL2 Coefficient of relaxation (0.55 fpk ) LT/ % 0
R Relative bond strength − *
K1 Bond coefficient for crack width EN 1992 − 0.8/R
N/ mm2
 
FDYN Allowed stress range 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FYC Compressive yield strength (f0.02 ) 1092 FY
N/ mm2
 
FTC Compressive strength 1092 FT
TMAX Maximum plate thickness [mm] 1025 *
N/ mm2 1090
 
GMOD Shear modulus *
N/ mm2 1090
 
KMOD Bulk modulus *
SCM0 safety factor for sectional design − *
SCM1 safety factor for stability design − *
SCM2 safety factor for rupture design − *
Table continued on next page.

3-102 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Item Description Unit Default

TITL Material name Lt32 *

There are some, but not very rigorous checks about the usage. While structural steel types
(e.g. S 235, ST, AL etc) can be used only for cross sections, prestressing steel is only allowed
for reinforcements, cables and tendons.

3.15.1 Structural Steel

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

Eurocode:
EN 1993-1-1
Tab. 3.1 t ≤ 40 mm
*S 235 235 360 - - - 210000 78.5
S 275 275 430 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355 355 490 - - - 210000 78.5
S 450 440 550 - - - 210000 78.5
S 275N 275 390 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355N 355 490 - - - 210000 78.5
S 420N 420 520 - - - 210000 78.5
S 460N 460 540 - - - 210000 78.5
S 275M 275 370 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355M 355 470 - - - 210000 78.5
S 420M 420 520 - - - 210000 78.5
S 460M 460 540 - - - 210000 78.5
S 235W 235 360 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355W 355 490 - - - 210000 78.5
S 460Q 460 570 - - - 210000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

Eurocode:
EN 1993-1-1
Tab. 3.1 40 < t < 80 mm
S 235T 215 360 - - - 210000 78.5
S 275T 255 410 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355T 335 470 - - - 210000 78.5
S 450T 410 550 - - - 210000 78.5
S 275NT 255 370 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355NT 335 470 - - - 210000 78.5

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-103

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

S 420NT 390 520 - - - 210000 78.5
S 460NT 430 540 - - - 210000 78.5
S 275MT 255 360 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355MT 335 450 - - - 210000 78.5
S 420MT 390 500 - - - 210000 78.5
S 460MT 430 530 - - - 210000 78.5
S 235WT 215 340 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355WT 335 470 - - - 210000 78.5
S 460QT 440 550 - - - 210000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

Eurocode:
EN 10025-6 TMAX ...
S 500Q ∗) ∗) - - - 210000 78.5
S 550Q ∗) ∗) - - - 210000 78.5
S 620Q ∗) ∗) - - - 210000 78.5
S 690Q ∗) ∗) - - - 210000 78.5
S 890Q ∗) ∗) - - - 210000 78.5
S 960Q ∗) ∗) - - - 210000 78.5

∗) Material values in dependence on the defined max. thickness TMAX

For structural steel that should get the material values of the product standard EN 10025-2 till
-6 the plate thickness TMAX has to be input. E.g. the input

STEE 1 S 355 TMAX 80

STEE 2 S 355M TMAX 100

defines in the first case the limit values of the stiffness for the structural steel of the quality
355 according to EN 10025-2 for the plate thickness of 63 mm < t ≤80 mm and in the second
case the limit values of the stiffness for the structural steel of the quality 355M according to EN
10025-3 for the plate thickness of 80 mm < t ≤100 mm.

Note: In the National Annexes the material values may be specified differently.

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

DIN:
ST 33 190 330 - - - 210000 78.5
ST 37 240 370 - - - 210000 78.5
ST 52 360 520 - - - 210000 78.5
TMAX 40 (t ≤ 40 mm):

3-104 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

*S 235 240 360 - - - 210000 78.5
S 275 275 430 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355 360 510 - - - 210000 78.5
S 460 460 600 - - - 210000 78.5
TMAX 80 / 100 (40 < t ≤ 80 / 100 mm):
S 235 215 340 - - - 210000 78.5
S 275 255 410 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355 335 490 - - - 210000 78.5
* GU 52 260 520 - - - 100000 72.5
GU 17 240 370 - - - 210000 72.5
GU 20 300 500 - - - 210000 72.5
GU 200 200 380 - - - 210000 72.5
GU 240 240 450 - - - 210000 72.5
GU 400 250 390 - - - 169000 72.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

OENORM:
ST 44 285 430 - 230 -.2 206000 78.5
ST 55 355 540 - 285 -.2 206000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

SIA: TMAX 40 (t ≤ 40 mm):
*S 235 235 360 - - - 210000 78.5
S 275 275 430 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355 355 510 - - - 210000 78.5
S 460 460 550 - - - 210000 78.5
TMAX 100 (40 < t ≤ 100 mm):
S 235 215 340 - - - 210000 78.5
S 275 255 410 - - - 210000 78.5
S 355 335 490 - - - 210000 78.5
S 460 430 530 - - - 210000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

British
Standard: TMAX 16 (t ≤ 16 mm):
BS 275 275 430 - 205000 78.5

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-105

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

BS 355 355 500 - - - 205000 78.5
BS 460 460 550 - - - 205000 78.5
TMAX 40 (16 < t ≤ 40 mm):
BS 275 265 430 - 205000 78.5
BS 355 345 500 - - - 205000 78.5
* BS 460 440 550 - - - 205000 78.5
TMAX 63 (40 < t ≤ 63 mm):
BS 275 255 430 - 205000 78.5
BS 355 335 500 - - - 205000 78.5
BS 460 430 550 - - - 205000 78.5
TMAX 80 (63 < t ≤ 80 mm):
BS 275 245 430 - 205000 78.5
BS 355 325 500 - - - 205000 78.5
BS 460 410 550 - - - 205000 78.5
TMAX 100 (80 < t ≤ 100 mm):
BS 275 235 430 - 205000 78.5
BS 355 315 500 - - - 205000 78.5
BS 460 400 550 - - - 205000 78.5
TMAX 150 (100 < t ≤ 150 mm):
BS 275 225 430 - 205000 78.5
BS 355 295 500 - - - 205000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

EA:
EA 37 235 360 - - - 210000 78.5
EA 42 275 430 - - - 210000 78.5
EA 52 355 510 - - - 210000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

BSK TMAX 16 (t ≤ 16 mm):
BSK 235 235 340 - 210000 78.5
BSK 275 275 410 - 210000 78.5
BSK 355 355 490 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 355N 355 470 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 355M 355 450 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 420 420 500 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 460 460 530 - - - 210000 78.5

3-106 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

TMAX 40 (16 < t ≤ 40 mm):
BSK 235 225 340 - 210000 78.5
BSK 275 265 410 - 210000 78.5
BSK 355 345 490 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 355N 345 470 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 355M 345 450 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 420 400 500 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 460 440 530 - - - 210000 78.5
TMAX 63 (40 < t ≤ 63 mm):
BSK 275 255 410 - 210000 78.5
BSK 355 335 490 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 355N 335 470 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 355M 335 450 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 420 420 500 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 460 430 530 - - - 210000 78.5
TMAX 80 (63 < t ≤ 80 mm):
BSK 275 245 410 - 210000 78.5
BSK 355 325 490 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 355N 325 470 - - - 210000 78.5
TMAX 100 (80 < t ≤ 100 mm):
BSK 235 215 340 - 210000 78.5
BSK 275 235 410 - 210000 78.5
BSK 355 315 490 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 355N 315 470 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK TMAX 50 (t ≤ 50 mm):
BSK 460Q 460 550 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 500Q 500 590 - 210000 78.5
BSK 550Q 550 640 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 620Q 620 700 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 690Q 690 770 - - - 210000 78.5
TMAX 100 (50 < t ≤ 100 mm):
BSK 460Q 440 550 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 500Q 480 590 - 210000 78.5
BSK 550Q 530 640 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 620Q 580 700 - - - 210000 78.5
BSK 690Q 650 760 - - - 210000 78.5

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-107

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

NS TMAX 40 (t ≤ 40 mm):
NS 235 235 360 - 210000 78.5
NS 275 275 430 - 210000 78.5
NS 275N 275 390 - 210000 78.5
NS 275M 275 380 - 210000 78.5
NS 355 355 510 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 355N 355 490 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 355M 355 470 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 420N 420 540 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 420M 420 520 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 460N 460 570 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 460M 460 550 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 460Q 460 570 - - - 210000 78.5
TMAX 80 (40 < t ≤ 80 mm):
NS 235 215 340 - 210000 78.5
NS 275 255 410 - 210000 78.5
NS 275N 235 370 - 210000 78.5
NS 275M 255 360 - 210000 78.5
NS 355 335 490 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 355N 335 470 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 355M 335 450 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 420N 390 520 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 420M 390 500 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 460N 430 550 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 460M 430 530 - - - 210000 78.5
NS 460Q 440 550 - - - 210000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

DM-96 TMAX 40 (t ≤ 40 mm)
FEI 360 235 360 - - - 206000 78.5
FEI 430 275 430 - - - 206000 78.5
FEI 510 355 510 - - - 206000 78.5
TMAX 63,80,100 (t > 40 mm):
FEI 360 210 340 - - - 206000 78.5
FEI 430 250 410 - - - 206000 78.5
FEI 510 315 490 - - - 206000 78.5
TMAX 40 (t ≤ 40 mm):

3-108 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

FEG 400 180 - - - 206000 78.5
FEG 430 225 - - - 206000 78.5
FEG 520 255 - - - 206000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

MSZ:
S 37 230 370 - 200 - 206000 78.5
S 45 290 450 - 240 - 206000 78.5
S 52 350 520 - 280 - 206000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

AISC/ASTM; 200000 78.5
A 36 250 400
A 42 290 415
A 50 345 450
A 53 240 415
A 290 290 415
A 345 345 450
A 415 415 520
A 450 450 550
A 500A 230 310
A 500B 290 400
A 500C 315 425
A 500D 250 400
A 514 689 758 (TMAX 63,152 mm)
A 517 689 793 (TMAX 63,152 mm)
A 242 340 480 (COR-TEN, TMAX 19,25,102 mm)
A 588 340 480 (COR-TEN, TMAX 4,6,8 mm)
A 992 345 450
A 70W 485 586
A 100W 690 760

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

ABNT:
NBR 250 250 400 205000 78.5
NBR 350 350 450 205000 78.5

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-109

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

NBR 415 415 520 205000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

Australian: Flats and Sections:
AS 400 400 520 TMAX 17 (0 mm < t ≤ 17 mm)
AS 400 380 520 TMAX 100 (17 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)
AS 350 360 480 TMAX 11 (0 mm < t ≤ 11 mm)
* AS 350 340 480 TMAX 40 (11 mm < t ≤ 40 mm)
AS 350 330 480 TMAX 100 (40 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)
AS 300 320 440 TMAX 11 (0 mm < t ≤ 11 mm)
AS 300 300 440 TMAX 17 (11 mm < t ≤ 17 mm)
AS 300 280 440 TMAX >17 (17 mm < t)
AS 250 260 410 TMAX 11 (0 mm < t ≤ 11 mm)
AS 250 250 410 TMAX 40 (11 mm < t ≤ 40 mm)
AS 250 230 410 TMAX >40 (40 mm < t)
Hexagons, Rounds and Squares:
AS 400T5 400 520 TMAX 50 (0 mm < t ≤ 50 mm)
AS 400T 380 520 TMAX 100 (50 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)
AS 400TT 360 520 TMAX >100 (100 mm < t)
AS 350T4 340 480 TMAX 40 (0 mm < t ≤ 40 mm)
AS 350T5 340 480 TMAX 50 (0 mm < t ≤ 50 mm)
* AS 350T 330 480 TMAX 100 (50 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)
AS 350TT 320 480 TMAX >100 (100 mm < t)
AS 300T2 300 440 TMAX 17 (0 mm < t ≤ 17 mm)
AS 300T5 300 440 TMAX 50 (0 mm < t ≤ 50 mm)
AS 300T 290 440 TMAX 100 (50 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)
AS 300TT 280 440 TMAX >100 (100 mm < t)
AS 250T4 250 410 TMAX 40 (0 mm < t ≤ 40 mm)
AS 250T5 250 410 TMAX 50 (0 mm < t ≤ 50 mm)
AS 250TT 230 410 TMAX >50 (50 mm < t)
Hollow sections:
AS 450H 450 500
AS 350H 350 430
AS 250H 250 320

3-110 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

JIS
JIS 400 235 400 TMAX 40 (t ≤ 400 mm) 200000 77.0
400 215 400 TMAX 100 (40 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)
(SS 400, SM 400 and SMA 400W identical)
JIS 490 315 490 TMAX 40 200000 77.0
490 295 490 TMAX 100 ( 40 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)
JIS 520 355 520 TMAX 40 200000 77.0
520 335 520 TMAX 75 (40 mm < t ≤ 75 mm)
520 325 520 TMAX 100 75 mm < t ≤ 100 mm
(SM 520, SM 490Y and SMA 490W identical)
JIS 570 450 520 TMAX 40 200000 77.0
570 430 530 TMAX 75 (40 mm < t ≤ 75 mm)
570 420 530 TMAX 100 (75 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

IS
IS 410 250 400 - - - 211000 78.5
IS 440 290 440 - - - 211000 78.5
IS 490 330 490 - - - 211000 78.5
IS 540 390 540 - - - 211000 78.5
IS 570 430 570 - - - 211000 78.5
IS 590 430 590 - - - 211000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

GB GB 50017-2003
Q 235 215 360 TMAX 16 210000 78.5
235 205 TMAX 40 (16 mm < t ≤ 40 mm)
235 200 TMAX 60 (40 mm < t ≤ 60 mm)
235 190 TMAX 100 (60 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)

345 310 490 TMAX 16 210000 78.5

345 295 TMAX 35 (16 mm < t ≤ 35 mm)
345 265 TMAX 50 (35 mm < t ≤ 50 mm)
345 250 TMAX 100 (50 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)

390 350 520 TMAX 16 210000 78.5

390 335 TMAX 35 (16 mm < t ≤ 35 mm)

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-111

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

390 315 TMAX 50 (35 mm < t ≤ 50 mm)
390 295 TMAX 100 (50 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)

420 380 570 TMAX 16 210000 78.5

420 360 TMAX 35 (16 mm < t ≤ 35 mm)
420 340 TMAX 50 (35 mm < t ≤ 50 mm)
420 325 TMAX 100 (50 mm < t ≤ 100 mm)

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM

SNIP normative Resistances SB 16.13330.2011 Table 5.5
C 235 235 360 TMAX 8 206000 78.5
245 245 370 TMAX 20 206000 78.5
245 235 370 TMAX 30 (20 mm < t≤ 30 mm
255 245 370 TMAX 20 206000 78.5
255 235 370 TMAX 40 (20 mm < t≤ 40 mm)
285 275 390 TMAX 10 206000 78.5
285 265 380 TMAX 20 (10 mm < t≤ 20 mm)
345 325 470 TMAX 20 206000 78.5
345 305 460 TMAX 40 (20 mm < t≤ 40 mm)
345 285 450 TMAX 80 (40 mm < t≤ 80 mm)
345 265 430 TMAX 100 (80 mm < t≤ 100 mm)
345K 345 470 TMAX 10 (4 < t≤ 10 mm) 206000 78.5
375 355 490 TMAX 20 206000 78.5
375 335 480 TMAX 40 (20 mm < t≤ 40 mm)
390 390 540 TMAX 50 (4 < t≤ 50 mm) 206000 78.5
440 440 590 TMAX 30 (4 < t≤ 30 mm) 206000 78.5
440 410 570 TMAX 50 (30 mm < t≤ 50 mm)
590 590 685 TMAX 40 (10 < t≤ 40 mm) 206000 78.5

The specifications which are a part of the steel quality and are printed in italics (e.g. T, T8,
4) describe the thicknesses. They have to be input by the user only in the case of a CADINP
input.

The strength values especially for the high strength steels may vary depending on the manu-
facturer and the alloy considerably, a check of the assumed values against the actual values is
strongly recommended.

The maximum allowed plate thickness may be specified via TMAX, reducing the strength val-
ues according to the design codes. As different strength values within the section may lead to

3-112 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

consistency problems for some design tasks, we allow only for a unified approach based on
the maximum thickness. It will be checked during the generation of sections. For many grades
one may append an identifier for a maximum plate thickness for a direct definition.

Attention: The maximum thickness will be also used to control if the design of a composite
section with DESI in AQB will allow compressive strains beyond the yield limit. For sections of
classes 3 and 4, this limit will be observed by default. For sections of class 1 or 2, the strain
becomes unlimited by definition of TMAX 0.0.

The safety factor SCM0 is the value for the resistance of sections (γM0 = 1.0 according EN
1993-1-1). It will be preset according to the material and the design code and will be used to
calculate the design forces for steel and composite sections. For the design by member checks
the input ’CTRL FORC VAL3 GAM SCM’ can be used which is switching to the old safety factor
scm (γM1 according EN 1993-1-1).

For the Russian design steel the defaults are nominal values according to SB 16.13330.2011
any conversions, round off or higher values for rolled steel have to be specified by the user
explicitly.

3.15.2 Aluminium alloy

FY FT EPST BC np TMAX
AWP 3004 180. 220 10 B 23 6.0
AWP 3005 150. 170 10 B 38 6.0
AWP 3103 120. 140 20 B 31 25.0
AWP 5005 95. 125 20 B 25 12.5
AWP 5052 160. 210 40 B 17 40.0
AWP 5049 190. 240 30 B 20 25.0
AWP 5454 220. 270 20 B 22 25.0
AWP 5754 190. 240 30 B 20 25.0
AWP 5083 250. 305 30 B 22 40.0
AWP 6061T4 110. 250 120 A 23 12.5
AWP 6061T6 240. 290 60 B 23 12.5 / 80.0
AWP 6082T4 110. 205 120 A 25 12.5
AWP 6082T6 240. 295 60 B 25 6.0 / 12.5 /100.0
AWP 7020T6 280. 350 90 A 19 12.5
AWP 8011 110. 125 20 B 37 12.5

AW 6060T5 120. 160 80 B 14 5.0 / 25.0

AW 6060T6 140. 170 80 A 16 15.0
AW 6060TX 150. 195 80 A 18 3.0 / 25.0
AW 6060DT 160. 215 120 A 20 20.0
AW 6061T4 110. 180 120 B 8 25.0
AW 6061T6 240. 260 80 A 55 20.0

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-113

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST BC np TMAX
AW 6063T5 110. 160 70 B 13 3.0 / 25.0
AW 6063T6 160. 195 80 A 24 25.0
AW 6063TX 180. 225 80 A 21 10.0 / 25.0
AW 6063DT 190. 220 100 A 31 20.0
AW 6005T6 200. 250 80 A 20 5.0 / 10.0 / 25.0
AW 6106T6 200. 250 80 A 20 10.0
AW 6082T4 110. 205 140 B 8 25.0
AW 6082T5 230. 270 80 B 28 25.0
AW 6082T6 260. 310 100 A 25 5.0 / 15.0
AW 6082ER 240. 295 100 A 17 15.0 / 40.0
AW 6082DT 240. 310 100 A 17 5.0 / 20.0
AW 7020T6 275. 350 100 A 19 15.0 / 40.0
AW 7020DT 280. 350 100 A 18 20.0

FY FT EPST BC np TMAX
Eurocode
AC 42100 147. 203 20.
AC 42200 168. 224 15.
AC 43000 63. 126 12.5
AC 43300 147. 203 20.
AC 44200 56. 119 30.
AC 51300 70. 126 20.

FY FT EPST FP EPSY TMAX

DIN:
AL 18 80 180 - 60.0 * -
AL 20 100 200 - 88.0 * -
AL 22 160 215 144.5 * -
AL 25 180 250 - 144.5 * 5.0
AL 27 140 270 - 110.5 * -
AL 28 210 275 - 168.0 *
AL 31 230 310 - 229.5 * 20.0
AL 35 290 350 - 246.5 * 30.0

EC 9 and the new DIN 4113 (2002) use the American system for classification of aluminium
alloys. As there are more than 300 different materials available, with significant differences of
properties, the user should check the thickness limit and strength parameters thoroughly. For

3-114 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

the default values the following scheme has been used:

• For plates we use the type AWP to distinguish them properly from the profile and tubes.
For untreated alloys only the number of the alloy is necessary.
• For tubes and profiles the type AW is used and either ER or DT (drawn tubes) or the
important criteria of the heat treatment as T4, T5, T6 or TX for T66 has to be appended to
the alloy as characters.
• For the castings the case of a cocille and temper F or T6 has been selected as default.

As the reduction of the strength in the HAZ is depending on the welding process and the
thickness, the user has to define a separte Materialnumber for those regions with a explicitly
reduced values for FY and FT.

DIN 4113 requires the stress for aluminum to be reduced for creep effects according to chapter
6.3 with a factor c between 0.8 and 1.0. As the exact evaluation would be rather complex, this
is accounted for by the global factor of safety 1/c. The default on the safe side is a value of
1.25. Better values have to be specified explicitly by the user.

A reduction for generally higher temperatures has to be specified explicitly, but the reduction
for the fire case is available via the stress strain law.

The values ES and GAM are for all classes with 70000 [ MPa] and 28.0 [ kN/m3] preset, the
values FP and EPSY are selected according to the data of table 10 of the DIN 4113.

3.15.3 Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

Eurocode / Nat.
Annexes
B 220A 220 340 0 - - 200000 78.5
B 220B 220 340 0 - - 200000 78.5
B 220C 220 340 0 - - 200000 78.5
B 450A 450 472.5 25 - - 200000 78.5
B 450B 450 486 50 - - 200000 78.5
B 450C 450 517.5 75 - - 200000 78.5
B 500A 500 525 25 - - 200000 78.5
B 500B 500 540 50 - - 200000 78.5
B 500C 500 575 75 - - 200000 78.5
B 550B 550 594 50 - - 200000 78.5
B 600B 600 648 50 - - 200000 78.5
B 670B 670 800 50 - - 200000 78.5
= SAS 670/800 der Stahlwerk Annahütte
Y 1100 900 1100 35 - - 205000 78.5 ENC3
Y 1030 835 1030 35 - - 205000 78.5 ENC3
Y 1230 1080 1230 35 - - 205000 78.5 ENC3

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-115

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

Y 1450C 1100 1450 35 - - 130000 78.5 ENC2
Y 1570C 1300 1570 35 - - 205000 78.5 ENC2
Y 1670C 1385 1670 35 - - 205000 78.5 ENC2
Y 1770C 1470 1770 35 - - 205000 78.5 ENC2
Y 1860C 1545 1860 35 - - 205000 78.5 ENC2
Y 1770 1520 1770 35 - - 195000 78.5 ENC2
Y 1860 1600 1860 35 - - 195000 78.5 ENC2
Y 1960 1685 1960 35 - - 195000 78.5 ENC2
Y 2060 1600 2060 35 - - 195000 78.5 ENC2
Y 2160 1770 2160 35 - - 195000 78.5 ENC2
Y 1700 1460 1700 35 - - 195000 78.5 ENC2
Y 1820 1565 1820 35 - - 195000 78.5 ENC2

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

DIN 1045-1:
BST 220 220 340 - - -.2 210000 78.5
BST 420 420 500 - - -.2 210000 78.5
BST 500 500 550 - - -.2 210000 78.5
PST 835 835 1030 35 735 -.2 205000 78.5 3.3
PST 1080 1080 1230 35 950 -.2 205000 78.5 3.3
PST 1100 1100 1450 35 - - 130000 78.5 7.5
PST 1375 1375 1570 35 1150 -.2 205000 78.5 7.5
PST 1420 1420 1570 35 1220 -.2 205000 78.5 2.0
PST 1470 1470 1670 35 1250 -.2 205000 78.5 7.5
PST 1570 1570 1770 35 1300 -.2 195000 78.5 7.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

OEN B 4700:
BSOE 240 240 360 17 - .4 210000 78.5
BSOE 420 420 500 10 - .4 210000 78.5
BSOE 500 500 550 10 - .4 210000 78.5
BSOE 550 550 620 10 - .4 210000 78.5
BSOE 600 600 670 10 - .4 210000 78.5
PSOE 835 835 1030 70 - -.2 205000 78.5 3.3
PSOE 1080 1080 1230 60 - -.2 205000 78.5 3.3
PSOE 1375 1375 1570 60 - -.2 205000 78.5 7.5
PSOE 1420 1420 1570 60 - -.2 205000 78.5 2.0

3-116 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

PSOE 1470 1470 1670 60 - -.2 205000 78.5 7.5
PSOE 1570 1570 1770 60 - -.2 195000 78.5 7.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

SIA:
B 500A 500 525 20 - - 205000 78.5
B 500B 500 540 45 - - 205000 78.5
B 450C 450 520 65 - - 205000 78.5
Y 1030 830 1030 20 - - 205000 78.5 4.0
Y 1100 900 1100 20 - - 205000 78.5 4.0
Y 1230 1080 1230 20 - - 205000 78.5 4.0
Y 1570 1300 1570 20 - - 205000 78.5 4.0
Y 1670 1440 1670 20 - - 205000 78.5 4.0
Y 1770 1520 1770 20 - - 195000 78.5 2.5
Y 1860 1600 1860 20 - - 195000 78.5 2.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

BBK-04:
KS 260 260 - 50 - - 200000 78.5 ≤ 32
KS 500 500 - 50 - - 200000 78.5 ≤ 32
KS 600 600 - 50 - - 200000 78.5 ≤ 32
KSY 1030 835 1030 35 - - 205000 77.0 4.0
KSY 1670 1470 1670 35 - - 205000 77.0 4.0
KSY 1770 1500 1770 35 - - 205000 77.0 4.0
KSY 1860 1650 1860 35 - - 205000 77.0 4.0
KSY 2060 1790 2060 35 - - 205000 77.0 4.0

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

DS-411: ∅
BDS 410 410 - - - 200000 78.5 ≤ 32
BDS 500 500 - - - 200000 78.5 ≤ 32
BDS 550 550 - - - 200000 78.5 ≤ 32

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

NS-3473: ∅
BNS 500 500 - - - 200000 78.5 ≤ 32

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-117

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

BAEL-99:
FEE 215 215 215 - - 200000 78.5
FEE 235 235 235 - - 200000 78.5
FEE 400 400 400 - - 200000 78.5
FEE 500 500 500 - - 200000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

DM-96:
FEB 22 215 335 - - 200000 78.5
FEB 32 315 490 - - 200000 78.5
FEB 38 375 450 - - 200000 78.5
FEB 44 440 540 - - 200000 78.5
FEB 39 390 440 - - 200000 78.5
DM-2008, DM-2018
FEB 450A 450 540 22.5 - - 200000 78.5
FEB 450C 450 540 67.5 - - 200000 78.5
FEP 800 900 1000 35 - - 200000 78.5
FEP 1050 1125 1250 35 - - 200000 78.5
FEP 1350 1485 1650 35 - - 200000 78.5
FEP 1500 1620 1800 35 - - 200000 78.5
FEP 1600 1710 1900 35 - - 195000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

MSZ:
B 240B 240 380 210 - 200000 78.5
B 360B 360 500 310 - 200000 78.5
B 500B 500 600 420 - 200000 78.5
Y 1030 830 1030 720 - 195000 78.5
Y 1230 1080 1230 920 - 195000 78.5
Y 1670 1435 1670 1230 - 195000 78.5
Y 1770 1520 1770 1320 - 195000 78.5
Y 1860 1580 1860 1375 - 195000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

EHE:
B 400 400 440 50 - - 200000 78.5

3-118 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

B 500 500 550 50 - - 200000 78.5
Y 1570 1340 1570 35 - - 205000 78.5
Y 1670 1420 1670 35 - - 205000 78.5 2.0
Y 1770 1500 1770 35 - - 205000 78.5 2.0
Y 1860 1580 1860 35 - - 205000 78.5 2.0
Y 1960 1670 1960 35 - - 195000 78.5 2.0
Y 2060 1750 2060 35 - - 195000 78.5 2.0

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

British
Standard:
SBS 250 250 250 - - 200000 78.5
SBS 460 460 460 - - 200000 78.5
SBS 500 500 500 - - 200000 78.5
PSBS 1570 1256 1570 -5 - - 205000 78.5 8.0
PSBS 1620 1296 1620 -5 - - 205000 78.5 8.0
PSBS 1670 1336 1670 -5 - - 205000 78.5 8.0
PSBS 1720 1376 1720 -5 - - 205000 78.5 8.0
PSBS 1770 1416 1770 -5 - - 205000 78.5 8.0
PSBS 1860 1488 1860 -5 - - 205000 78.5 8.0
South Africa
TMH7:
SABS 250A 250 250 - - 200000 78.5
SABS 450B 450 450 - - 200000 78.5
SABS 500B 500 500 - - 200000 78.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

ACI/
AASHTO:
SACI 40 280 420 - - 200000 78.5
SACI 50 350 560 - - 200000 78.5
SACI 60 420 620 - - 200000 78.5
SACI 65 460 460 - - 200000 78.5
SACI 70 490 560 - - 200000 78.5
SACI 75 520 690 - - 200000 78.5
SACI 80 550 725 - - 200000 78.5
PSAC 160 1100 1250 - - 207000 78.5 2.0

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-119

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

PSAC 250 1730 1730 - - 197000 78.5 2.5
PSAC 270 1860 1860 - - 197000 78.5 2.5

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

NBR
CP 25 250 300 - - 210000 78.5
CP 40 400 440 - - 210000 78.5
CP 50 500 550 - - 210000 78.5
CP 60 600 660 - - 210000 78.5
CA 85 850 1050 - - 200000 78.5
CA 150RN 1280 1500 60 - -2 195000 78.5 7.5
CA 150RB 1350 1500 60 - -2 195000 78.5 3.0
CA 160RN 1360 1600 50 - -2 195000 78.5 5.0
CA 160RB 1440 1600 50 - -2 195000 78.5 2.0
CA 170RN 1490 1700 50 - -2 195000 78.5 5.0
CA 170RB 1580 1700 50 - -2 195000 78.5 2.0
CA 175RN 1490 1755 35 - -2 185000 78.5 7.0
CA 175RB 1580 1755 35 - -2 185000 78.5 2.5
CA 180RN 1530 1800 35 - -2 185000 78.5 7.0
CA 190RN 1610 1900 35 - -2 185000 78.5 7.0
CA 190RB 1710 1900 35 - -2 185000 78.5 2.5

FY FT’ FT FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

GB.
SGB 235 210 235 - - 210000 78.5
SGB 335 300 335 - - 200000 78.5
SGB 400 360 400 - - 200000 78.5
PSGB 1470 1040 400 1470 - - 210000 78.5 5.0
PSGB 1570 1110 410 1570 - - 205000 78.5 5.0
PSGB 1670 1180 410 1670 - - 205000 78.5 5.0
PSGB 1770 1250 410 1770 - - 205000 78.5 5.0
PSGB 1570S 1110 390 1570 - - 195000 78.5 5.0
PSGB 1720S 1220 390 1720 - - 195000 78.5 5.0
PSGB 1860S 1320 390 1860 - - 195000 78.5 5.0

3-120 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

GBJ:
SGB I 235 235 - - 210000 78.5 8.0
SGB II 335 335 - - 210000 78.5 2.5
SGB IV 380 835 - - 190000 78.5 5.0
PSGB IV 751 835 - - 190000 78.5 5.0

FY FT FP EPSY EPST ES GAM REL1

IS 456
IS 240 240 240 240 - - 200000 78.5
IS 415 415 485 415 - - 200000 78.5
IS 415D 415 500 415 - - 200000 78.5
IS 500 500 545 500 - - 200000 78.5
IS 500D 500 565 500 - - 200000 78.5
IS 550 550 585 550 - - 200000 78.5
IS 550D 550 600 550 - - 200000 78.5
IS 600 600 600 600 - - 200000 78.5
PSIS 800 800 800 1000 5.0 - 200000 78.5 5.0
PSIS 1050 1050 1250 1050 5.0 - 200000 78.5 5.0
PSIS 1350 1350 1650 1350 5.0 - 200000 78.5 5.0
PSIS 1500 1500 1800 1500 5.0 - 200000 78.5 5.0
PSIS 1600 1600 1900 1600 5.0 - 195000 78.5 5.0

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

IS IRC112
SIS 240 240 340 0 - - 200000 78.5
SIS 415 415 485 0 - - 200000 78.5
SIS 415D 415 500 0 - - 200000 78.5
SIS 500 500 545 0 - - 200000 78.5
SIS 500D 500 565 0 - - 200000 78.5
SIS 550 550 585 0 - - 200000 78.5
SIS 550D 550 600 0 - - 200000 78.5
SIS 600 600 600 0 - - 200000 78.5
PSIS 800 800 1000 0 - - 200000 78.5 IRC-112
PSIS 1050 1050 1250 0 - - 200000 78.5 IRC-112
PSIS 1350 1350 1650 0 - - 200000 78.5 IRC-112
PSIS 1500 1500 1800 0 - - 200000 78.5 IRC-112
PSIS 1600 1600 1900 0 - - 195000 78.5 IRC-112

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-121

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

AS/NZS:
SAS 250 250 250 - - 200000 78.5
SAS 400 400 400 - - 200000 78.5
SAS 450 450 450 - - 200000 78.5
SAS 500 500 500 - - 200000 78.5
PAS 1030 840 1030 - - 200000 78.5 3.0
PAS 1670 1340 1670 - - 205000 78.5 1.0
PAS 1700 1360 1700 - - 205000 78.5 1.0
PAS 1790 1468 1790 - - 195000 78.5 2.0
PAS 1830 1500 1830 - - 195000 78.5 2.0
PAS 1870 1533 1870 - - 195000 78.5 2.0

FY FT FP FYC ES GAM γs
SP
52-101-2003
SNIA 240 235 400 190 235 - 200000 78.5 1.10
SNIA 300 300 500 235 300 - 200000 78.5 1.10
SNIA 400 400 500 320 400 - 200000 78.5 1.13
SNIA 500 500 600 345 460 - 200000 78.5 1.15
SNIB 500 410 500 290 360 - 200000 78.5 1.20

FY FT FP FYC ES GAM γs
RK 5.03-
33-2005
SNIA 600 600 800 360 540 - 200000 78.5 1.15
SNIA 800 800 1000 360 575 - 200000 78.5 1.15
SNIA 1000 1000 1000 360 600 - 200000 78.5 1.20

FY FT FP FYC ES GAM γs
SNIP
2.03.01:
SNIA 240 210 400 210 210 - 210000 78.5 1.05
SNIA 400 350 500 280 350 - 210000 78.5 1.05
SNIA 500 435 600 300 435 - 200000 78.5 1.10
SNIA 600 520 800 300 470 - 190000 78.5 1.15
SNIA 800 695 980 300 500 - 190000 78.5 1.20

3-122 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FY FT FP FYC ES GAM γs
SNIA 1000 870 1000 300 500 - 190000 78.5 1.20
SNIB 500 415 1000 290 390 - 170000 78.5 1.20
SNIB 1200 1050 1200 785 500 - 200000 78.5 1.20
SNIB 1300 1130 1300 835 500 - 200000 78.5 1.20
SNIB 1400 1210 1400 940 500 - 200000 78.5 1.20
SNIB 1500 1300 1500 1000 500 - 200000 78.5 1.20
SNIB 1600 1390 1600 1000 500 - 200000 78.5 1.20
SNIB 1700 1475 1700 1000 500 - 200000 78.5 1.20

For the steel type B it is possible to attach to the grade extra characters defining the ductility:

A Reinforcing bars with standard ductility (cold deformed)

B Reinforcing bars with high ductility (warm deformed)
C Reinforcing bars with very high ductility (warm deformed)

For prestressing steel according to EN it is possible to add a A or B at the type in order to

consideration of the class according to EN 1992-1-2 table 3.3.

For the German steel type BST the characters SA/SB resp. MA/MB for bars resp. meshes
allow also to select between new DIN 1045-1 and old DIN 1045.

The safety factor is preset for most reinforcing and prestressing steels to 1.15 and 1.05 (BS)
respectively. The safety factor becomes effective immediately for the calculation of the full
plastic internal forces of steel and composite sections.

For non-linear analysis with a constant safety factor according to DIN 1045-1 the strength of the
concrete will be reduced, while those of the steel will be raised. For this a special serviceability
stress-strain law is generated with a safety factor of 1.3.

The Russian SNIP has a reduced strength for shear links and inclined bars. This value is taken
from the value FP. In the very general case, it might be necessary to use a separate material
with a reduced strength.

Attention:

Some material parameters may depend on other parameters not known to the program. E.g.
the dynamic stress range of the reinforcements is not only depending on the diameter TMAX
of the bars but also on the curvature and the type of the material of the duct (steel, plastic). In
all those cases it is necessary to use different material numbers and to specify the deviating
values explicitly.

3.15.4 Prestressing Steel for Cables according to EN 1993-1-11

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

Eurocode
YC 1370 1135 1370 40.0 - - * 83. -

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-123

AQUA | Input Description

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1

YC 1470 1220 1470 40.0 - - * 83. -
YC 1570 1300 1570 40.0 - - * 83. -
YC 1670 1485 1670 35.0 - - * 83. -
YC 1770 1470 1770 30.0 - - * 83. -
YC 1860 1545 1860 30.0 - - * 83. -
YC 1960 1630 1960 30.0 - - * 83. -
YC 2060 1710 2060 30.0 - - * 83. -
YC 2160 1790 2160 30.0 - - * 83. -

Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-11 provides different elastic moduli for different prestressing steels
depending on the selected cable sections (group B tension components).

The selection is made via a suffix to the prestressing steel class:

O spiral strands rope

OS spiral strands rope stainless
F fully locked coil rope
R strand wire rope with CWR
RS strand wire rope with CWR stainless
C strand wire rope CF
P bundle of parallel wires
S bundle of parallel strands

The material safety is preset with 1.0. Further information is available in the description of the
record CABL.

3.15.5 Relaxation
Relaxation of tendons is implemented in AQUA/AQB as a product. While the time factor is
specified in AQB, AQUA defines the stress dependant factor for the reference time of 1000 h.
This may be accomplished either by a linear relation established by two values at 0.55·fpk and
0.70·fpk or via selected literals for item REL2 as quadratic function according to CEB / EN1992
or the general function according to BPEL annexe 2 or AS 3600.

Literal 0.60 · ƒpk 0.70 · ƒpk 0.80 · ƒpk

CEB model code 1990
CEB1 4.00 % 8.00 % 12.00 % normal
CEB2 1.00 % 2.00 % 5.00 % improved
CEB3 2.00 % 4.00 % 6.67 % bars
Euronorm EN 1992 (2004)
ENC1 5.39 · ρ1000 · e6.7μ (t/ 1000)0.75(1−μ) 10−5 ordinary (ρ1000 = 8.0)
ENC2 0.66 · ρ1000 · e9.1μ (t/ 1000)0.75(1−μ) 10−5 low relaxation(ρ1000 =2.5)

3-124 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Literal 0.60 · ƒpk 0.70 · ƒpk 0.80 · ƒpk

ENC3 1.98 · ρ1000 · e8.0μ (t/ 1000)0.75(1−μ) 10−5 bars (ρ1000 =4.0)
Eurocode EC 2 < 2004
ECL1 4.50 % 8.00 % 12.00 % ordinary
ECL2 1.00 % 2.50 % 4.50 % low relaxation
ECL3 1.50 % 4.00 % 7.00 % bars
BPEL 91
RN Annexe 2 8.00 % Annexe 2 relaxation normale
TBR 2.50 % très basse relaxation
0.0 % 1.00 % AS 3600/5100
AS 0.0 % 2.00 % Rb (Chapter 6.3.4)
0.0 % 3.00 %
at 0.40 fpk
IRC 0.0 % 5.00 % IRC 112
IRCL 0.0 % 2.50 %
at 0.50 fpk

In Germany the values of the general technical approval. The values of a typical approval are
provided as default, but may be redefined with MEXT if required.

3.15.6 Bond Properties

The bond properties are specified highly different within the codes. They depend both on the
concrete and the steel properties. When defining the concrete the maximum bond stress for
optimal bond properties is specified. The value R defines then the relative bond strength for
this steel as specified in:

Tab. 6.2 EN 1992-1-1 ( R = 0.3 ÷ 0.8)

Tab. 15 DIN 1045-1 ( R = 0.3 ÷ 0.8)
Tab. 7 DIN 4227 A1 ( R = 0.3 ÷ 0.9)
§9.3.1 GB 50010 (R = α /0.14 = 0.737 ÷ 1.077)

If different bond properties should be applied, different materials have to be specified. The
bond value is needed for

• Reinforcements
• Crack width
• Fatigue
• Limitation of stress increase for tendons

The relative bond properties are mainly intended in the design codes to account for the reduced
values of tendons. But it should also account for different diameters and properties of passive
reinforcements. For the crack width a mean value has to be used where the diameter and the

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-125

AQUA | Input Description

bond properties become effective.

Please see also remarks for FBD in record CONC.

The second coefficient is used for those design codes using special values not clearly de-
ductible from the relative bond coefficients alone. This is especially the base version of the
Eurocode, but also the russian SNIP:

§4.14 SNIP 2.03.01 ( K1 := η = 1.0 ÷ 1.4)

§7.2.12 SP 52-101 ( K1 := φ2 = 0.5 ÷ 0.8)

The defaults are given in principal in the following table. However, there are some deviations
depending on the design code and the strength possible:

R K1
Reinforcing steel 1.0 0.8
Prestressing steel 0.5 1.6

3.15.7 Stress-Strain Relations

The stress-strain law may have up to 4 segments:

• Up to the proportional limit (FP/ES,FP)

• Up to the yield limit (EPSY,FY) EPSY may be defined absolute (positive) or relative to the
strain limit (negative)
• Up to the tensile strength (EPST,FT)
• Constant to the nearly infinity (1000 o/oo)

Depending on the steel type and grade the values EPSY and EPST as well as FP will be
preset. With explicit definitions you may suppress:

• If FP is not lesser than FY the first part will be omitted.

• If EPST is not greater than EPSY the third part will be omitted.

More general stress-strain laws are specified via record SSLA.

In general the stress-strain laws are identical for serviceability and ultimate limit design. How-
ever, for reinforcing steel according to EC2 and DIN 1045-1 there are numerous explicit
changes.

As the safety factor concept will not generate an affine curve for the ultimate state, the safety
factor will be applied immediately.

Although the tensile strength for reinforcement steel with standard ductility will be reached at
25 o/oo, it is not allowed to use this in the design according to DIN 1045-1. The stress strain
laws for design and non linear analysis differ therefore for those materials.

3-126 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Standard Bilinear Standard Trilinear

σ(N/ mm2 ) σ(N/ mm2 )

ƒy ƒt
ƒy

ϵ(%) ϵ(%)
2.0(−EPSY)

S (Eurocode 2) PS (Eurocode 2)

σ(N/ mm2 ) σ(N/ mm2 )

ƒt ƒt
0.8ƒt
ƒy / 0.9ƒ t

ϵ(%) ϵ(%)
(EPST) 5.0(−EPSY)

Figure 3.20: Stress Strain Laws

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-127

AQUA | Input Description

3.16 TIMB – Timber and Fibre Materials

TIMB

Item Description Unit Default

NO Material number (1-999) − 1

TYPE Type of material LT *
see following table
CLAS Quality class / Strength − *
type of matrix for compound fibres

N/ mm2
 
EP Elastic modulus parallel to fibre 1090 *
N/ mm2
 
G Shear modulus 1090 *
N/ mm2
 
E90 Elastic modulus normal to fibre 1090 *
QH Poisson’s ratio yz (polywood panels) − *
QH90 Poisson’s ratio xy / xz (solid wood) − *
kN/ m3
 
GAM Unit weight 1091 *
ALFA Temperature elongation coefficient [1/ K] 1083 0.0
SCM Material safety factor − 1.3/*
N/ mm2
 
FM Bending strength 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FT0 Tensile strength parallel to the fibre 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FT90 Tensile strength normal to the fibre 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FC0 Compressive strength parallel to fibres 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FC90 Compressive strength normal to fibres 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FV Shear strength at center (shear force) 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FVR Shear strength at the edge (torsion) 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FVB Shear strength for plate bending 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FM90 Bending strength normal to fibres 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
G90 Shear modulus for plate bending 1090 *
OAL Meridian angle of anisotropy degree 0.0
OAF Descent angle of anisotropy degree 0.0

KMOD Strength modification permanent loading − *

KMO1 or long term loading − *
KMO2 or middle term loading − *
KMO3 or short term loading − *
KMO4 or very short term loading − *
KDEF modification for long term deflections − *
Table continued on next page.

3-128 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Item Description Unit Default

TMAX maximum thickness for plates [mm] 1025 *

kg/ m3 1189
 
RHO characteristic density *

TITL Material designation Lt32 *

TIMB allows the definition of all materials with a preferred fibre orientation. As type you have the
timber classes of Eurocode, respective DIN, OENORM and SIA and the German compound
fibre types. As the EN 1995 does not specify any strength values, those values have to be
specified for all other countries explicitly.

With the EN 1995 (EC5) and the derived design codes correction factors kmod have been
introduced for the permissible stresses and kdeƒ for the deformations. The distinct value is
depending not only on the material but also on the service class and the duration of the loading.
The following table shows the values for solid timber, however there are much more values
available within the program and the user may change theses values explicitly.

Service Class
Class of load duration
1 2 3
permanent 0.60 0.60 0.50
long term 0.70 0.70 0.55
medium term 0.80 0.80 0.65
short term 0.90 0.90 0.70
very short term 1.10 1.10 0.90
k-def 0.60 0.80 2.00

The service class may be either specified in general with the definition of the design code
NORM or be appended to the class definition with a colon. The input of TIMB C 30:2 selects a
solid soft wood of strength class 30 and the service class 2.

The base values of the strength are given in EN 338 resp. EN 1194. But the transverse shear
strength FV has to be defined reduced as kcr · ƒ accounting for cracks. In Germany this
coefficient has been selected to provide the same shear strength for all strength classes.

Types and defaults:

TYPE CLAS Explanation

EN 1995, DIN 1052-2004:
C 14 / 16 / 18 / 20 / 22 / 24 / Solid soft wood
27 / 30 / 35 / 40 / 45 / 50
D 30 / 35 / 40 / 50 / 60 / 70 Solid hard wood
GL 24 / 28 / 32 / 36 homog. laminated timber
24C / 28C / 32C / 36C combined laminated timber

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-129

AQUA | Input Description

TYPE CLAS Explanation

PLY 25 / 40 / 50 / 60 Plywood
PART 1/4/5/6/7 Particle board
OSB 2/3/4 OSB
FIB HB Hardboard Fibre board
MHB Medium hardboard
MDF Medium density
SB Soft Fibre board
SIA 265:
C 20 / 24 / 27 / 35 / 45 Solid soft wood
D 30 Solid hard wood (Beech / Oak)
GL 24H / 28H / 36H homog. laminated timber
24K / 28K / 36K combined laminated

TYPE CLAS Explanation

DIN 1052 A-1
S 7 / 10 / 13 Timber, Sorted acc. DIN 4076
MS 10 / 13 / 17 Timber, Sorted acc. DIN 4076
BS 11 / 14 / 16 / 18 glued laminated timber
DIN 1052 old
NA 1/2/3 Soft wood
BS 1/2 glued laminated timber
LA/LB/LC Hard wood
ÖNORM B3001
FTK/L/BE spruce,fir,pine / larch
beech,oak
GFK/CFK/ Values strongly depend Glas-/Carbon-/Synthetic-
SFK on fibre properties! compound fibre materials
EP 40000 / 5000 12.5 Epoxid resin
UP 30000 / 4500 12.5 Unsaturised poliester resin
VE 20000 / 3500 10.7 Vinil ester resin

There are many composite materials in timber constructions. Although a precise treating is
possible with composite sections or FLAY, the design codes provide equivalent materials for
that purpose. As the strength is no strongly dependant on the thickness of the construction
part, the definition of that value with TMAX is mandatory.

The description of a transverse orthotropy material law has one direction that has different
properties (fibre direction), while the description in the plane perpendicular to this remains

3-130 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

isotropic. The law defined with TIMB is formal equivalent, however not identical with that de-
fined via MATE. If x is chosen as this special direction it holds:
σ (σy + σz )
ε = − μ90 · (3.122)
E E90

σy σz σ
εy = − μ· − μ⋆90 · (3.123)
E90 E90 E

σz σy σ
εz = − μ· − μ⋆90 · (3.124)
E90 E90 E

E
μ⋆90 = μ90 · (3.125)
E90

It should be noticed, that the poisson’s ratios μ90 and μ90 ∗ are no longer bound to 0.5 and are
strongly connected to the ratio of the elasticity moduli, as the resulting stress-strain matrix has
to be symmetric.

The order of the indices of stress and strain components notation is defined as follows:

[ x y z xy xz yz ] general three-dimensional case

[ x y xy z ] plane strain condition, axial symmetry
[ x y xy ] plane stress

For the axial symmetric case x denotes the axis of rotation while y represents the radial and z
the tangential direction.

Furthermore holds:

E1 = E90 , E2 = E , μ1 = μ90 , μ2 = μ , G1 = G90 , G2 = G (3.126)

General three-dimensional case:

The three-dimensional material stiffness matrix is obtained by inversion of the strain-stress
matrix and reads (z being the direction normal to the isotropic plane = fibre direction):

1−n·μ
2
2 μ1 +n·μ2 μ
E1 · (1+μ )·m 2
E1 · (1+μ )·m E1 · m2 0 0 0
1 1
μ1 +n·μ22 1−n·μ22 μ
E1 · (1+μ )·m E1 · (1+μ )·m E1 · m2 0 0 0
1 1
μ2 μ2 1−μ1
E1 · E1 · E2 · 0 0 0
D= m m m (3.127)
0 0 0 G1 0 0
0 0 0 0 G2 0
0 0 0 0 0 G2

E1
n = , m = 1 − μ1 − 2 · n · μ2
2
(3.128)
E2

Plane strain conditions: The x direction is defined as the fibre direction (=normal to the isotropic

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-131

AQUA | Input Description

plane). The reduced stress-strain matrix yields:

1−μ1 μ
E2 · m E1 · m2 0
μ 1−n·μ2 2
E1 · m2 E1 · (1+μ )·m 0
D = 1
(3.129)
0 0 G2
1μ +n·μ2
2 μ
E1 · (1+μ E1 · m2 0
1 )·m

E1
n= , m = 1 − μ1 − 2 · n · μ2
2
(3.130)
E2

Plane stress conditions: The x direction is defined as the fibre direction (=normal to the
isotropic plane). The material stiffness matrix is obtained via inversion of the reduced strain-
stress matrix and reads:
 
E2 E1 ·μ2
0
1−n·μ22 1−n·μ22
E1
 
 
D =  E1 ·μ2
 , n = E
E1 (3.131)
0 
1−n·μ22 1−n·μ22

  2
0 0 G2

Axial symmetry:

The general case of anisotropy does not need to be considered since axial symmetry would
be impossible to achieve under such circumstances. A case of interest in practice is that of
the fibre direction parallel to the rotational axis x, i.e. the x direction is normal to the plane of
isotropy. For such a case the material stiffness matrix reads:
1−μ21
n μ2 (1 + μ1 ) 0 μ2 (1 + μ1 )
€ Š
μ2 (1 + μ1 ) 1 − nμ2 0 μ1 + nμ2
D = A · 2 2 (3.132)
G90
0 0 A 0
μ2 (1 + μ1 ) μ1 + nμ2
2 0 1 − nμ2
2

E2 · n E1
A = , n = , m = 1 − μ1 − 2 · n · μ2
2
(3.133)
(1 + μ1 ) · m E2

Definition of fibre direction:

Depending on the element type we have slightly different orientations of orthotropy:

For beams the fibre direction is identical with that of the beam axis.

For planar systems (TALPA) the value OAF is the angle between the fibre direction and the
element x-direction. The values E90 and μ90 then hold within the isotropic plane whose normal
is given by the (skew) fibre direction.

For shells and plates it might be possible (eg. plywood) that there are fibres in both x and y
direction. The anisotropy effects thus reduces to different shear moduli for in plane membrane
shear (Gm=0.5E90 /(1+μ)) and the transverse shear force directions (G). This may be accom-
plished either with an explicit definition E90 == E or with a layered material (FLAY). For the case

3-132 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

of vertical boards tied together, you may use the orthotropy factors of thickness description (→
QUIAD) or use a 3D model.

In three-dimensional systems (continuum elements) the default fibre direction is the element z-
direction. Other fibre directions can be specified by defining the three-dimensional orientation
of the isotropic plane (=plane, whose normal direction is the fibre direction) via meridian and
descent angle, known from geology (compare MATE).

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-133

AQUA | Input Description

3.17 MASO – Masonry / Brickwork

MASO

Item Description Unit Default

NO Material number (1-999) − 1

STYP Type of brick stone LT SB
CL Clay brick
CS Calcium silicate/lime sand
LC Lightweight concrete
C concrete brick
AC aerated concrete
MS manufactured stones
NS Natural stones
N/ mm2
 
SCLA Strength of brick stone 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
MCLA Group or strength of mortar 1092

i,ii,iia,iii,iiia Standard mortar

DM Thin bed mortar
LM21,LM36 Light mortar
numerical Qualified mortar

N/ mm2
 
FK Compressive strength fk 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FB Compressive brick strength fb 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FM Mortar strength fm 1092 *

N/ mm2
 
FVK0 Adhesional shear strength fk,0 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FV Maximum shear strength 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FT Tensile strength 1092 *
N/ mm2
 
FTB tensile brick strength 1092 *
SCM Material safety factor − *
N/ mm2
 
E Elastic modulus 1090 *
N/ mm2
 
G Shear modulus 1090 0.4E
MUE Poisson’s ratio − 0.25
kN/ m3
 
GAM Unit weight 1091 *
ALFA Temperature elongation coefficient [1/ K] 1083 *

TITL Material name Lt32 *

The parameters follow EN 1996-1-1. It is to be defined in the national annex if the properties
are based on experiments (i) or on calculatoric values (ii) specified with table 3.3 and formulas
3.1 to 3.2. In both cases there are groups 1 to 4 depending on the holes in the brick, which
have to be defined appended to STYP with a colon (eg. SB:3)

3-134 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

In all those cases where the design code describes a reduction of the K-value, this may be
defined with a definition like 80[%] for FK.

AQUA supports the German national annexe. Table Na.4 for HLzA/B etc. is selectable with
group 2, table NA.5 for HLzW etc. is selectable with group 3. Table NA.9 is selectable for solid
bricks (Vn, Vbn, Vm, Vmb) with group 1, solid bricks (Vbl S und Vbl SW) with group 2, solid
bricks (V und Vbl) with group 3 and hollow bricks (Hbl S und Hbn) with group 4.

For masonry according to BS 5628-1/2 the Literals "‘BS-1"’ resp. "‘BS-2"’ with the group iden-
tifier A to D appended with a colon has to be given for the STYP definition. Selectable are the
mortar designations I to IV. FT is the tensile strength for bending according Table 3 ”parallel to
bed joints”, FV is the vertical shear strength according pict. 2 and clause (25, part 2), FV0K is
the basic shear value according clause 25 part 1, FBT is the bending tensile strength according
Table 3 ”perpendicular to bed joints”. FT and FBT vary considerably and should therefore be
specified.

There are not yet any specific design routines available.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-135

AQUA | Input Description

3.18 SSLA – Stress-Strain Curves

SSLA

Item Description Unit Default

EPS Strain value o/ oo -

or type of state in a headder record LT
SERV Serviceability
ULTI Ultimate Limit
CALC Calculatoric values
SIG Stress value N/ mm2 -
or safety factor in headder record −
TYPE Type of vertex LT POL
POL discontinuous slope Neigung
SPL continuous slope
LIM no extension
EXT extension to infinite strains
TEMP Temperature level grd 0
EPST Thermal strain o/ oo -
EPSS Scaling or shifting of ordinates − -
SHIF shift by -EPST
<0 shift by EPSS*EPST
>0 scale with creep factor

TS Tension Stiffening for Reinforcement LT -

I Initial crack
II Completed crack pattern
I_S I for short time loading
II_S II for short time loading
I_F I but first crack at fctk,0.05
I_FS I_S but first crack at fctk,0.05
MUET Reinforcement ratio As/Abeƒ ƒ − -
MNOC Material number of the concrete − 1
FCTF Factor for tensile concrete strength fctm − 1.0

Stress-Strain curves define the dependency of the stress from the strains. They are required
for the design and nonlinear analysis. There are three different types to be distinguished:

• SERV Curves for the serviceability based on mean values.

• ULTI Curves for the ultimate resistance based on the design values.
• CALC Curves for a nonlinear analysis.

For the materials according to the several design codes CONC, STEE, TIMB and MASO there

3-136 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

are corresponding stress-strain curves are available as default.

For reinforcing and prestressing steel the EN 1992-1-1 specifies two variants for the stress-
strain curves:

a an inclined top branch with a strain limit and a maximum stress

b a horizontal top branch without strain limit

An exception to this is the National Annex DIN, which only explicitly prescribes variant a. For
EN 1992-1-1 and all available National Annexes the variant a is the default. A switch to variant
b is made by input 0 for the ultimate strain of the reinforcing or prestressing steel in the record
STEE item EPST.

For a nonlinear analysis it is most reliable and most economical to use the method of double
book keeping (Quast) where the true deformations are evaluated based on the mean values
and the ultimate capacity is evaluated separately with the design values. This is congruent to
the classic approach of a linear analysis and a design as a post processing step. EN 1992-
1 covers this in section 5.8.(3) with the very first sentence or the more detailed hints in the
German NA to this subject. This is controlled in AQB/ASE/STAR2 with an input of:

DESI ULTI KSV ULD ULD ; NSTR SERV KSV SL SL

For stability problems it might be requested to apply a safety factor on the stiffness too. If this
factor is included in the stiffness or at the load is a matter of taste, but the nonlinear nature
of the problem does not allow to use the same factor on either side of the equations. This is
controlled in AQB/ASE/STAR2 with an input of:

DESI ULTI KSV ULD ULD ; NSTR ULTI KSV SLD SLD

While the mean values of the concrete are specified in the design codes, there is no definition
for the reinforcing steel. A common assumption is to increas the strength by a factor of 1.1. As
this is comparable to the safety factor and a yielding will decrease the stiffness considerably it
is also common practice to use the option SLD SL instead.

However, it might be desirable to perform design and nonlinear analysis within a single run.
Then special curves are needed based on design values of the strength, but a stiffness based
on the mean values with a special saftey factor. This is controlled in AQB with an input of:

NSTR NONL KSV CALD CALD

EN 1992-1 covers this in section 5.8.(3) with the second and third sentence. As the German
NA provides an alternate version in section 5.7 with a global system safety of 1.3, the user has
to decide between those two methods by the definition of the safety factor for the CALC curve.
The default is according to 5.7. It has to be pointed out, that this method does not include any
safety on the stiffness. Thus there are three possibilities to include that:

• Reduction of the ECM according Heft 600 DAfStB with 0.85, to be specified with TVAR
ALF-CE 0.85 SCOP DESI
• Division of the total curves by a factor 1.3, which is not provided here

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-137

AQUA | Input Description

• Ultimate load analysis with a factor of 1.3 and stress-strain curves without a safety factor

If the default stress-strain curves are not applicable, stress-strain curves must be defined im-
mediately after the input of the material. For special applicationes each set may have multiple
temperature levels, to be defined in ascending order of temperature. A stress-strain curve
starts with one of the possible headers:

SSLA SERV safety_factor [ LIM/EXT] [ TEMP tempval]

SSLA ULTI safety_factor [ LIM/EXT] [ TEMP tempval]
SSLA CALC safety_factor [ LIM/EXT] [ TEMP tempval]

The safety factors are predefined as specified with the material, but may be changed if needed.
In particular it is possible to modify a standard stress-strain law with an own safety factor, by
defining a header record only. The design codes use the safety factors quite differently, some
materials will be divided by the safety factor in total, others reduce only the maximum stress
value and keep the elasticity modulus. A positive safety factor will select the first case, while
a negative value will select the second one. For the standard design tasks the material safety
factors are chosen by AQB depending on the loading condition and design code.

For the CALC curves we have a slightly other rule to account for the German NA. A negative
safety factor will activate the curve according to chapter 5.7, while a positive safety factor
will trigger the rule according to chapter 5.8 with a safety factor γce for Ecm . This factor is
predefined in the INI-file, but may be overwritten as boxed value with a TVAR GAM-CE. A
safety factor of 0.0 will deactivate the calculatoric curves.

The stress-strain curve follows. Each consists of several data points in an ordered sequence.
For each data point it is specified whether it should behave as a vertex (linear polygon line) or
it should be part of a smooth curve (quadratic or cubic parabola).

σ σ

POL SPL

ϵ ϵ

Figure 3.21: Stress-Strain Curves

The user must make sure that a sufficiently large strain range gets covered and that the zero
point constitutes a data point of its own. Strains outside the defined range will have for TYPE
EXT the last defined stress value and will use the tangent at the last point, provided this has a
positive elasticity module. If the TYPE is specified as LIM, stresses outside the defined range
will become zero, which however lead to trouble in numerical behaviour of non-linear iterations.

3-138 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

On the other hand the stresses outside the defined range are extrapolated by an input of TYPE
EXT. Default is EXT, however for ultimate limit state of concrete it is LIM.

For concrete without explicit data points and without temperature it is possible to define with
EPSS a factor for the strains. This may be used to account for creep effects as specified in
the EN 1992 with 1+ϕ. It should be noted however, that in this case the creep becomes also
effective for variable actions.

For a fiber or a FE-section the general analysis method will account for temperatures according
to the Eurocodes EN 1992 to 1999 automatically. However for special cases it is also possible
to define between 2 and 15 discrete temperature levels TEMP, to be interpolated. EPST defines
the thermal elongation for that temperature, the default will be taken from the Eurocode.

For a zonal method, the section will be subdivided in several zones (polygons) by different
material numbers, where every zone has a constant average temperature to be specified for
each of these materials with TEMP. One may shift the stress strain curve wih a definition of
EPSS SHIF by the thermal strain allowing to activate all eigenstresses directly without the
need to define a temperature at the section itself in detail.

The contribution of the concrete between the cracks (Tension Stiffening) may be taken into
account by a modification of the stress strain law of the concrete or the steel. With a single
record SSLA SERV a modification of the reinforcement stress strain law for that purpose is
possible. However a solution is only possible if the ratio of reinforcement is large enough to
avoid the complete rupture of the reinforcement, which is equivalent to the requirement that
the initial crack stress in the reinforcement must not exceed the yield limit.

The reinforcement ratio MUET is only determined in advance for an annular section (or those
with a similar evenly distributed reinforcement). For all other cases, the design task should
adopt the stress strain law accordingly.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-139

AQUA | Input Description

3.19 MEXT – Extra Material Constants

MEXT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of material − 1
EXP Name of an (exposure) class Lt4 -
TYPE Type of constant LT !
VAL Value of material constant ∗ -
VAL1 First additional material value ∗ -
VAL2 Second additional material value ∗ -
VAL3 Third additional material value ∗ -
VAL4 4th additional material value ∗ -
VAL5 5th additional material value ∗ -
VAL6 6th additional material value ∗ -
VAL7 7th additional material value ∗ -
VAL8 8th additional material value ∗ -
VAL9 9th additional material value ∗ -
VA10 10th additional material value ∗ -
...
VA20 20th additional material value ∗ -

With MEXT you may define special material values for any type of material. The values may
be assigned to different regions (edges) of the material with separate values. This is defined
by a freely selectable literal EXP. Defaults for those values may be specified in the INI-file. It
has to be checked individually to which extend the defined data is really used in the analysis
modules.

The follwong idents for TYPE are allowed:

3.19.1 AIR - Air Contact Ratio

The value AIR defines the air contact ratio between >0.0 and <1.0 to be used for the creep and
shrinkage process. The values 0.0 and 1.0 are used as the default setting. AQUA then checks
whether the edges are actually on the outside / inside and adjusts the value if necessary. The
item VAL is valid for the total cross section. The values for the individual construction stages
can be defined at VAL1 till VAL9.

You can find further explanations and examples for this workflow in our Online Help -> Tutorials

[Link]
cross-section_air-[Link]

3-140 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.19.2 CNOM - Nominal Cover

The value CNOM defines the nominal cover for reinforcements. This value is defined in many
design codes based on the exposure class and my be provided within the INI-files. The full
range of tables may become quite lareg however.

3.19.3 CRW - Crack width

The crackwidth CRW is used for the design of the crackwidth.

3.19.4 EIGE - Parameters for Creep-Coefficients

The coefficients cording EN 1992-1 for concrete are defined as follows:

VAL coefficient βc0 for exponent of creep evolution (0.30)

VAL1 coefficient βc1 for creep (1.00)
VAL2 coefficient βc2 for creep evolution (1.00)
VAL3 coefficient βcd1 for drying shrinkage (1.00)
VAL4 coefficient βcd2 for drying evolution (1.00)
VAL5 coefficient βc1 for autogenous shrinkage (1.00)
VAL6 coefficient βc2 for autogenous shrinkage evolution (1.00)

The coefficients according EN 1992-2 B.104 are defined as follows:

VAL coefficient ϕd0 for B.104.4 eq. B.127 (1000 / 3200)

VAL1 coefficient βbc1 for B.104.3 eq. B.125 (1.00)
VAL2 coefficient βbc2 for B.104.3 eq. B.126 (0.37 / 0.40)
VAL3 coefficient βcd1 for B.104.1 eq. B.124 (1.00)
VAL4 coefficient βcd2 for B.104.1 eq. B.124 (0.007 / 0.021)
VAL5 coefficient βc1 for B.104.1 eq. B.122 (1.00)
VAL6 coefficient βc2 for B.104.1 eq. B.123 (2.80)
VAL7 coefficient βc3 for B.104.1 eq. B.123 (1.10)
VAL8 coefficient βc4 for B.104.1 eq. B.123 (96.0)

Warning

There are no practical experiences for the procedure according to EN 1992-2 B.104.
The use is recommended only with caution in exceptional cases. The feature can be
activated by adding "H" next to the concrete class, e.g. C 60H.

Explicit coefficients for tendon relaxation according to EN 1992-1 is required as a table. The
default for ENC2 in Germany is a typical table for low relaxation steel from a general technical
approval (abZ). The definition of an explicit table starts with a headder without EXP with up
to 9 descending time values. The following records contain on ascending order the losses in
percent for selected ratios of Ri/Rm. As EXP the literal "‘Rnn"’ has to be specified, where nn
ist the ration of Ri/Rm in percent.

The default German table would be defined as follows:

MEXT 12 TYPE EIGE EXP - VAL 1000000 500000 5000 1000 200 10 1

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-141

AQUA | Input Description

MEXT 12 TYPE EIGE EXP 'R55' VAL 1.2 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
MEXT 12 TYPE EIGE EXP 'R60' VAL 2.8 2.5 1.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
MEXT 12 TYPE EIGE EXP 'R65' VAL 5.0 4.5 2.0 1.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
MEXT 12 TYPE EIGE EXP 'R70' VAL 7.0 6.5 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
MEXT 12 TYPE EIGE EXP 'R75' VAL 10.0 9.0 4.5 3.0 2.5 1.2 0.0
MEXT 12 TYPE EIGE EXP 'R80' VAL 14.0 13.0 6.5 5.0 4.0 2.0 1.0

3.19.5 EIGC, EIGS - Explicit curves for creep an shrinkage

With these types explicit curves for the evolution of the creep (EIGC) or shrinkage (EIGS) may
be defined. The values VAL, VAL2, VAL4 ... VA31 are the time values in days (absolute for
EIGS, effective for EIGC) The values VAL1, VAL3, VAL5 ... VA32 are the function values of the
curve, which will be multiplied with an explicitly defined base value or a value calculated based
on the environmental conditions.

Multiple curves for creep are allowed with different loading start times of the creep curve. For
any creep interval the curve nearest before the current start time will be selected and shifted
to the true start point.

Example for a definition of three explicit creep curves and an explicit shrinkage curve with
name CURV for a concrete no. 1:

! Creep curve for T0=7

MEXT 1 EXP 'CURV' TYPE EIGC VAL 7.0 VAL1 0.00 $$
VAL2 14.0 VAL3 0.42 $$
VAL4 28.0 VAL5 0.70 $$
VAL6 100.0 VAL7 0.86 $$
VAL8 500.0 VAL9 1.30 $$
VA10 2000.0 VA11 1.70 $$
VA12 5000.0 VA13 1.80

! Creep curve for T0=107

MEXT 1 EXP 'CURV' TYPE EIGC VAL 107.0 VAL1 0.00 $$
VAL2 500.0 VAL3 0.80 $$
VAL4 2000.0 VAL5 1.10 $$
VAL6 5000.0 VAL7 1.40

! Creep curve for T0=500

MEXT 1 EXP 'CURV' TYPE EIGC VAL 500.0 VAL1 0.00 $$
VAL2 2000.0 VAL3 0.60 $$
VAL4 5000.0 VAL5 1.10

! Shrinkage curve for T0=7

MEXT 1 EXP 'CURV' TYPE EIGS VAL 7.0 VAL1 0 $$
VAL2 10.0 VAL3 -50E-6 $$
VAL4 28.0 VAL5 -120E-6 $$
VAL6 180.0 VAL7 -190E-6 $$
VAL8 800.0 VAL9 -200E-6 $$

3-142 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

VA10 5000.0 VA11 -210E-6

Several EXP may be used to define sets of variant curves for different environmental conditions
or nominal effective thickness.

3.19.6 KR - Equivalent roughness

With KR, VAL defines the equivalent roughness according to Table 7.13 of EN 1991-1-4, which
is especially needed for wind and wave loading on circular sections:

Surface Roughness Surface Roughness

k [ mm] k [ mm]
glass 0.0015 galvanised steel 0.2
polished metal 0.002 spinning concrete 0.2
smooth painting 0.006 cast in situ concrete 1.0
spray painting 0.02 rough timber 2.0
blasted steel 0.05 rust 2.0
cast iron 0.2 masonry 3.0

Hint: In table 4 of DIN 1055 part 4 slightly larger values are defined for k. The value VAL1 is
the friction coefficient to be used for forces from flow along a surface, especially along a beam
axis.

Surface Frictional value

smooth (e.g. Steel, smooth concrete) 0.01
rough (e.g. rough concrete, tar roofs) 0.02
very rough (e.g. corrugated, ripped, folded) 0.04

3.19.7 TEMP - Temperature environment

With type TEMP the temperature environment and the transition conditions are defined:

VAL The temperature itself with default unit [ C ◦ ]

VAL1 The thermal resistance α with default unit [ W/ K/ m2 ]
VAL2 The emmission grade ϵ for the Boltzmann law [ − ]

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-143

AQUA | Input Description

3.20 BORE – Soil or Bore Profile

See also: BLAY, BBAX, BBLA, BTAB

BORE

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of the soil profile − 1

X Coordinates of the start point [m] 1001 0.0
Y [m] 1001 0.0
Z [m] 1001 0.0
NX Direction of the soil profile − *
NY Default: in gravity direction − *
NZ (since not available in AQUA: NZ=1.0) − *
ALF Rotation angle of the local axis degree 0.0
HGWL lowest ground water level [m] 1006 0.0
HGWH highest ground water level [m] 1006 0.0
TITL Title of the soil profile LT32 *

With BORE a soil or bore profile is described defining material layers along an axis. The use
of which is different.

• General description of soil mechanic strata

• Properties of the constrained soil modulus for the analysis of settlements or a half space
modelling with HASE.
• Soil bedding modulus for the pile elements. These values are derived from the soil mod-
ulus above by a multiplication with a form factor with typical values between 0.5 and 2.0.
More precisely the soil modulus is transferred to a Winkler bedding constant [ kN/m3 ] by a
division with some structural dimension and is then integrated by a multiplication with the
width of the pile section. Please refer to the explanations of the record BBLA for formulas
and examples.

For simple regular cases it is also possible to define design stresses for the soil pressure with
record BTAB. These values are than applicable without reference to the strata data.

3-144 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.21 BLAY – Layer of the Soil Strata

See also: BORE

BLAY

Item Description Unit Default

S Ordinate along the profile axis [m] 1001 *

MNO Material number from this ordinate − *
kN/ m2
 
ES Stiffness modulus from this ordinate 1096 *
MUE Poisson’s ratio −
VARI Type of stiffness ES variation within a layer Lt4 CONS
CONS constant
LINE linear
PARA parabolic
kN/ m2
 
DES Increment of ES within a current layer 1096 *
kN/ m2
 
PMAX Max. pressure at pile foot 1096 *
kN/ m2
 
PMAL Max. lateral pressure 1096 *
kN/ m2
 
C Cohesion 1096 *
PHI Soil-Pile friction angle deg *
GAM Specific weight kN/ m3 *
GAMA Specific weight under buoyancy kN/ m3 *

Hint
PHI, GAM and GAMA are not supported at the moment for the HASE calculation.

BLAY is used for the definition of the soil layers of a corresponding BORE profile. This data is
then used in program HASE for the determination of the stiffness and resistance properties of
soil and piles.

The following example illustrates the functionality of the BLAY command:

BORE NO #nb X #x Y #y Z #z
BLAY S #s1 ES #Es1 VARI para PMAX #P1
BLAY S #s2 ES #Es2 VARI line DES #dEs2 PMAX #P2
BLAY S #s3 ES #Es3 VARI cons PMAX #P3
BLAY S #s4

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-145

AQUA | Input Description

s1 Es1 s1 P1

L1 L1

s2 Es2 s2 P2
dEs2
L2 L2

s3 Es3 s3 P3

L3 L3

s4 s4

Stiffness distribution Resistance distribution

Figure 3.22: Distribution of BLAY properties along the BORE axis

Bore profile #nb consist of three soil layers

• First layer L1 starts at the depth #s1 and ends at the next defined depth #s2. L1 is assigned
a parabolic stiffness distribution. Since there is no explicit stiffness increase #dEs1 defined,
a continuous distribution is realized - the concluding stiffness value will be equal to the
stiffness value of the subsequently defined BLAY (#Es2).
• Second layer L2 has a linear stiffness distribution. This time, #dEs2 is defined, so the
concluding stiffness value will be #Es2+#dEs2.
• Third layer L3 has a constant stiffness distribution with the value #Es3.

If there is only one BLAY defined, then the ending depth is by default 999m. If the number
of BLAY record is larger than 1, the last BLAY defines the ending depth S while the other
properties of this BLAY are ignored.

Apart from stiffness modulus ES, all other properties of the BLAY record (MNO, MUE, PMAX,
PMAL, C, PHI) are constant within a layer.

Stiffness modulus ES and Poisson’s ration MUE can alternatively be set by reference of a
material number, where corresponding elastic material properties are defined. If within the
same BLAY record MNO and ES and/or MUE are defined, the values defined within BLAY
have precedence over those defined by material MNO. If the Poisson’s ratio MUE is defined
and larger than 0.0, then ES is interpreted as the elastic modulus, and a Boussinesq method
is used in program HASE (see HASE manual for more details).

By default (no input) the non-linear resistance properties (PMAX, PMAL and C) are switched
off, meaning that the x-pile nodal forces are not limited (elastic analysis). As in the default
case, the input of a resistance property smaller or equal zero will result in the x-pile contact
forces to be unlimited. Any input of the resistance properties larger than zero will activate the

3-146 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

non-linearities along the x-pile.

Hint
• As a prerequisite for a meaningful soil-layer interpolation, all defined bore profiles
(BORE) within a grid must have the same number of layers (BLAY).
• For a consistent input of the BLAY-resistance properties it is required that within a
layer of each of the used bore profiles the resistance properties be either defined
or undefined. Otherwise the interpolated properties can have unpredictable values.
In other words, the input where the resistance properties within a layer for some bore
profiles are defined, while for the others are not defined, will most likely yield undesired
results.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-147

AQUA | Input Description

3.22 BBAX – Axial Beddings

BBAX

Item Description Unit Default

S1 Start ordinate [m] 1001 *

S2 End ordinate [m] 1001 999.99
kN/ m2
 
K0 Constant value of pile bedding 0
K1 Parabola variation 1096 0
K2 Linear variation ” 0
K3 Quadratic variation ” 0
M0 Load value (e.g. negative skin friction) [kN/ m] 1095 0
C0 Maximum skin friction [kN/ m] 1095 0
TANR Soil/pile friction angle coefficient −
TAND Soil/pile dilatancy angle coefficient −
KSIG Lateral pressure coefficient − 0.0
D0 Constant rotational stiffness [kNm] 1099 0
D2 Linear rotational stiffness [kNm] 1099 0
kNsec/ m2 1220
 
CA0 Constant axial damping 0
CA2 Linear axial damping [kN] 1101 0
PMAX Max. pile foot force (Extended Piles, only) 0

Hint
The ordinates S1 and S2 are measured along the axis of the bore profile, defined with the
BORE command.

The axial bedding describes the skin friction of the pile in dependence from the deformation
and from the lateral bedding force of the pile. A positive value of the load M0 acts on the pile
in the direction of the pile head.

skin friction

CO + TAND · SIG

k
−M0 displacement

Figure 3.23: Axial bedding

3-148 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Further explanations for the axial beddings are contained in the record BBLA.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-149

AQUA | Input Description

3.23 BBLA – Lateral Beddings

BBLA

Item Description Unit Default

S1 Start ordinate [m] 1001 *

S2 End ordinate [m] 1001 999.99
kN/ m2
 
K0 Constant value of the pile bedding 0
K1 Parabola variation 1096 0
K2 Linear variation ” 0
K3 Quadratic variation ” 0
P0 Form factors as variation along − 1
P1 the periphery − 1
P2 − 1
P3 − 1
PMA1 Maximum compression at S1 [kN/ m] 1095 -
PMA2 Maximum compression at S2 [kN/ m] 1095 -
kNsec/ m2 1220
 
CL0 Constant lateral damping 0
CL1 Parabola variation ” 0
CL2 Linear variation ” 0
CL3 Quadratic variation ” 0
SM0 Constant mass distribution [t/ m] 1181 0
SM2 Linear variation of mass distribution [t/ m] 1181 0

Hint
The ordinates S1 and S2 are measured along the axis of the bore profile, defined with the
BORE command.

Elastic supports have many related parameters. Therefore those values are combined to spe-
cial property elements for a geometric line.

All the corresponding BBAX and BBLA records follow the BORE record in the order defined by
the s ordinate. All data for the s ordinate refer to the parametric system of coordinates. The
default is the global z axis.

Within a section the bedding is interpolated:

1/ 2 2
z − z1 z − z1 z − z1
   
K = K0 + K1 · + K2 · + K3 · (3.134)
z2 − z1 z2 − z1 z2 − z1

The pile bedding at the beginning of the section is K0, and the one at its end is K0+K1+K2+K3.
The individual values correspond to constant, parabolic, linear and quadratic distributions.

3-150 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Figure 3.24: Parts of the bedding

The default value for S1 is the latest S2 value. The initial default is -999.99.

The factors for the variation along the periphery are effective in the four quadrants (angle of 0,
90, 180 and 270 degrees). The angle refers to the local z axis. For linear analyses the factor
(P0+P2)/2 is used for the principal bending (MY,VZ), while (P1+P3)/2 is used for the transverse
bending (MZ,VY).

P0=P1=P2=P3=1.0 (linear) P0=P2=0.5, P1=P3=1.0 (linear)

P2

P2

P1 y P3 P1 y
P3

P0

P0
z z
P2 P2

y y
P3 P3
P1 P1

P0 P0
z z

P1=1.0, P0=P2=P3=0.5 (non-linear) P1=0.0, P0=P2=P3=0.5 (non-linear)

Figure 3.25: Distribution of the bedding in transverse direction

The form factor is generated from the fact that the acting bedding force pL per length is given
by the following simplified relation from the deformation uL :
Es
ϖpL = D · C · L = D · · L (3.135)
Deƒ ƒ

According DIN we have e.g. Deƒ ƒ = min(D,1.0). For more complex cases where the bedding
stress is not uniform but more like a cosine, there are of course other values possible. There-
fore several design codes recommend to use any value between 0.5 and 2.0 to get the most
unfavourable results. Thus SOFiSTiK will not change the prescribed values in any kind.

For the bedding in axial direction a similar form factor may be defined based on a shear mod-

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-151

AQUA | Input Description

ulus instead of the stiffness modulus following the relation:

Es
pA = π · D · C ·  = π · D · ·  (3.136)
2 · (1 + μ) · Deƒ ƒ

Thus the factors cancel each other in general and it is sufficient to use the stiffness modulus
Es for the axial bedding as well. In most cases the maximum skin friction is the more essential
part of the relation. However some value has to be specified, otherwise there would be no skin
friction at all.

Further there is a a rather sophisticated approach for the interaction of both directions available.
The friction has very different causes:

σ = KSG · σ + K() · [() + TAND · ()] (3.137)

τ = K() · () < TANR · σ + C0 (3.138)

The first part of the pressure is described by the vertical earth pressure and the horizontal
pressure coefficient. The second part is given by the elastic constants which consist of a
stiffness and a dilatation.

3-152 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.24 BTAB – Foundation pressures

See also: BORE

BTAB

Item Description Unit Default

OPT Input option: LT8 -

B foundation width
S soil pressure
A6.x:y soil table A6.1 - A6.8, with optional appendix
for the conistency y (only tables A6.6 - A6.8):
:S stiff
:H semi-hard
:F hard
D embedment depth [m] 1006 *
kN/ m2 1089
 
V1 design stress at width b1 *
kN/ m2 1089
 
V2 design stress at width b2 *
kN/ m2 1089
 
V3 design stress at width b3 *
kN/ m2 1089
 
V4 design stress at width b4 *
kN/ m2 1089
 
V5 design stress at width b5 *
kN/ m2 1089
 
V6 design stress at width b6 *
kN/ m2 1089
 
V7 design stress at width b7 *
kN/ m2 1089
 
V8 design stress at width b8 *
kN/ m2 1089
 
V9 design stress at width b9 *
kN/ m2 1089
 
V10 design stress at width b10 *
FACS Factor on stresses (see DIN A6.4) − 1.0

BTAB allows the definition of design soil pressures which might be specified instead of the
geotechnical design for simple regular cases.

There are following input possibilities:

• The user defines only one value for the soil pressure V1 without specifying any options for
OPT

BTAB OPT - V1 240

• The user defines for OPT explicitly a literal for the table in DIN 1054: A6.1, A6.2, A6.5,
A6.6, A6.7 or A6.8 with optional appendix for the conistency (only for tables A6.6 - A6.8).
E.g.:

BTAB OPT A6.1

or

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-153

AQUA | Input Description

BTAB OPT A6.6:F

• The user defines a Header-Record with OPT B and the desired width values V1 to V10,
followed by an arbitrary number of soil pressures (OPT S) per depth D for the selected
width values. E.g.:

BTAB D OPT V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
- B 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
1.0 S 210 210 210 210 210
2.0 S 280 420 560 700 700
3.0 S 380 520 660 800 800
4.0 S 480 620 760 900 900

3-154 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.25 SMAT – Material Properties for Springs and Beam Hinges

See also: SFLA

SMAT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of link material − !

LTYP Link type − *
STD Standard spring
IHNG Implicit Hinge
PMM PMM interaction
MTYP Material type − PLAS
PLAS Elasto-plastic, anisotropic
PISO Elasto-plastic, isotropic hardening
PKIN Elasto-plastic, kinematic hardening
HYPE Hyperelastic
Link capacity
P+ Tension (≥ 0) [kN] 1101 -
P- Compression (≤ 0) [kN] 1101 -(P+)
VY+ Shear Vy (≥ 0) [kN] 1102 -
VY- Shear Vy (≤ 0) [kN] 1102 -(VY+)
VZ+ Shear Vz (≥ 0) [kN] 1102 -
VZ- Shear Vz (≤ 0) [kN] 1102 -(VZ+)
MY+ Bending My (≥ 0) [kNm] 1104 -
MY- Bending My (≤ 0) [kNm] 1104 -(MY+)
MZ+ Bending Mz (≥ 0) [kNm] 1104 -
MZ- Bending Mz (≤ 0) [kNm] 1104 -(MZ+)
Interaction
ALPH My-Mz interaction exponent − 0.0
P1 unused
P2 unused

TITL Designation of link material LT32 -

General
SMAT defines a link material with the corresponding properties (header record). The defini-
tion of further reaction specific characteristics including work laws is followed directly after by
the command SFLA; SMAT and SFLA together provide a complete definition of link material
properties.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-155

AQUA | Input Description

LTYP
The following link types are available:

STD Standard spring material with the reaction types P, PT, M (cf. SARB TYPE).
IHNG Material for the definition of the force-displacement relationship of the beam end
reactions (Implicit Hinge) (cf. SARB TYPE).
PMM Special material definition for the consideration of the P-My-Mz interaction. Available
are the reactions analogous to IHNG; the reactions My and Mz are additionally
coupled by the interaction exponent α (see ALPH).

MTYP
The following material types are available:

PLAS Anisotropic elasto-plastic material law. For the initial loading the material reaction
is developed according to the defined work law (plastic hardening). Unloading and
reloading on the other hand are linear elastic actions and are defined by the unload-
ing/ reloading modulus Er of the work law. The anisotropic model distinguishes
tension and compression, with mutually independent hardening behavior in the re-
spective directions. The provided work law may be non-symmetric, featuring differ-
ent branches in tension and compression.
PISO Elasto-plastic material law with isotropic hardening. Similar to PLAS, except that the
evolution of plastic hardening strains is not differentiated according to tension and
compression; plastic strains developed during tension are effective with respect to
compressive hardening and vice versa.
This type of material is usually accompanied by a work law with symmetric branches
for tensile and compressive response – its functionality, however, is not restricted to
the symmetric case.
PKIN 5 Elasto-plastic material law with kinematic hardening. For the kinematic hardening
rule, the initial elastic range is preserved during plastification – in contrast to the
isotropic and anisotropic hardening cases. In this model, the hardening effect is
represented by a shift rather than by an extension of the elastic domain.
This type of material is usually accompanied by a work law with symmetric branches
for tensile and compressive response exhibiting positive final gradients – its function-
ality, however, is not restricted to the symmetric case.
HYPE Hyperelastic material law. The material reaction develops according to the defined
work law, both for loading and unloading processes. Since there is no differentiation
between loading and unloading paths, there is no plastic deformation – the material
behaves elastic.

The material types PISO and PKIN are not available for the link types IHNG and PMM.

For further information regarding the respective material type characteristics, please refer to
subsection 3.25.2.
5 Kinematic hardening is supported by ASE, only.

3-156 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.25.1 General link material (→ SMAT LTYP IHNG or PMM)

Link capacity
For the individual link reactions the upper and lower limits of the capacity can be defined.
These limits can then be referenced by the corresponding work laws (see SFLA) during their
definition.

Hint
This definition alone does not cause the actual limitation of the corresponding permissible
reaction force. The actual reaction, and with it the possible limitation of the permissible
force, must be defined together with the corresponding work law.

The values for the tension P+ and compression capacity P- play a special role. With the
definition of these capacities it is possible to formulate other reactions R with respect to the
axial load of the link element. The input of the normal force dependent family of work law
curves (see SFLA LEV) for the reaction R describes an interaction between the actual acting
normal force and the reaction R ( P-R interaction). For P ≥ P+ or P ≤ P− due to the interaction
the reaction is R ≡ 0.0; for the normal force levels in between, the permissible reaction R is
described by the user specified family of the work laws.

The capacity values are taken into consideration for the IHNG and PMM link types.

ALPH
The interaction exponent α ≥ 1.0 describes the interaction between the My and Mz reactions
according to
‚ Œα α
My Mz

+ ≤1 (3.139)
My,m Mz,m

For example, with ALPH = 1.0 a linear interpolation between My and Mz is carried out. With
increasing exponent ALPH, the fullness of the interaction curve increases as well; with ALPH =
2.0 the interaction curve corresponds to an ellipse.

The default value ALPH = 0.0 defines a decoupled behavior of the My and Mz reactions (
mathematically this corresponds to α → ∞ in Eq. 3.139)

The interaction exponent ALPH is only active for the PMM link type.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-157

AQUA | Input Description

Figure 3.26: P − My − Mz Interaction

3.25.2 Material type characteristics and examples

In the example folder [Link]/english/spring the differences between AQUA-
SMAT...MTYP PLAS-PISO-PKIN-HYPE are illustrated. For additional information see
[Link]/english/spring/a1_spring_overview.dat.

The four examples:

[Link]/english/spring/spring_law_1_plas.dat
[Link]/english/spring/spring_law_2_piso.dat
[Link]/english/spring/spring_law_3_pkin.dat
[Link]/english/spring/spring_law_4_hype.dat

use the same SMAT work laws, as shown in Figure 3.28. The only difference is that the work
law for PKIN has an increasing end-tangent, see remarks to PKIN in Figure 3.28. Normal
plastic work laws (MTYP PLAS+PISO+HYPE) should have a horizontal end-tangent to clearly
define the final strength (Figure 3.28).

The four material types PLAS, PISO, PKIN and HYPE result in a different response under a
single cyclic loading. Resulting spring force-displacement curves are illustrated in Figure 3.28.

PLAS Anisotropic hardening

Plastic deformation induced hardening effects an extension of the elastic stress domain. The
anisotropic model distinguishes tension and compression, with mutually independent harden-
ing behavior in the respective directions. Tension hardening, e.g., does not affect the current

3-158 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

p p y
P[kN]
P [kN]
tensile and compressive behavior, e.g.,
P[kN]
500
and compression.
7
200
200.0
(
(5)

0.0 0.0 0.0

u [mm] u [mm]

0.0
-400.0

-200.0

0.0

200.0

400.0

0.0

200.0

400.0
[mm] [mm]

0.0
−400

−200

−400

−200
200

400

200

400
−200
-200.0

P
P P
P
−500
MTYP PLAS + PISO + HYPE MTYP PKIN

Figure 3.27: Spring work laws

compressive strength 6 . The yield function reflects an according differentiation between tensile
and compressive behavior:



|σ| − ƒ
y,c εp,c for σ ≤ 0
ƒ :=


(3.140)
σ − ƒy,t εp,t for σ > 0


In the example (Figure 3.28), the initial tensile hardening (1) is followed by an unloading step
to σ = 0 (2). So far, no compressive hardening has been triggered. Therefore, the continued
unloading path follows the initial loading path defined by the compressive branch of the work
law (3).

Isotropic Hardening
In contrast to the anisotropic approach, plastic strains are effective for hardening irrespective
of their direction (compression/ tension). Tensile plastification, e.g., also induces compres-
sive hardening and vice versa.7 Consequently, the yield function adopts the same hardening
variable tensile and compressive behavior:



|σ| − ƒ
y,c −κp for σ ≤ 0
ƒ :=


(3.141)
σ − ƒy,t κp for σ > 0



κp := m εp,c , εp,t (3.142)

In the example (Figure 3.28), the initial tensile hardening (1) is followed by an unloading step
to σ = 0 (2). For compression, the so far developed hardening strain is also effective, causing
a correpondingly extended elastic domain (4).

PKIN Kinematic Hardening

For many materials, it can be observed that plastic straining in tension also induces a reduction
of the compressive yield strength for a subsequent compressive loading (and vice versa). For
steel materials, this effect is known as Bauschinger effect. The kinematic hardening model
6 This assumption particularly holds for materials that exhibit different and quasi-independent mechanisms for

tensile and compressive behavior, e.g., concrete. The work laws in this case are usually non-symmetric for tension
and compression.
7 Work laws for isotropic hardening are usually symmetric for tension and compression – functionality, however,

is not restricted to the symmetric case.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-159

AQUA | Input Description

N[kN] N[kN]
(1)
spring element 10 spring element 10
300 300

200 200

100 100
(2)
0.0 [mm] 0.0 [mm]

0.0
0.0

−200

−150

−100

−50
−200

−150

−100

−50

50

100

150
50

100

150

200
−100 −100

−200 −200

−300
−300
(3) (4)

(a) MTYP PLAS (b) MTYP PISO

N[kN]
N[kN] spring element 10
400 feder element 1001
300 (7)
(5) (1)
200
200
(6) 100

0.0 [mm] 0.0 [mm]

0.0

0.0
−200

−100

−100

−150
100

200

50

100

150
−100
(5′ )
−200
−200

(1′ )
(c) MTYP PKIN (d) MTYP HYPE

Figure 3.28: Result for MTYP PLAS-PISO-PKIN-HYPE

aims at describing this effect and defines plastic hardening as a translation of the initial yield
strength ƒy0 without changing the extension of the initial elastic domain. Mathematically, this
notion is adopted by introducing the so-called back stress q as a function of the plastic defor-
mation εp . 8

The yield function reads now

ƒ := σ − q εp − ƒy0 (3.143)

The adopted kinematic hardening model is characterized by the following conditions:

• Initial loading follows the the original work law.

• The extension of the initial elastic stress space, defined by the initial yield strength ƒy0 ,
remains unchanged.
8 Work laws for kinematic hardening are usually symmetric for tension and compression and exhibit positive final
gradients.

3-160 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

N[kN]
feder element 1001
400

200

0.0
[mm]
−100

0.0

100

200

300

400
−400

−300

−200

−200

−400

Figure 3.29: Kinematic Hardening for cyclic loading

• The allowable stress space is limited by the final tangents of the defined work law.
• For sufficient plastification in positive or negative direction, the end tangent is reached.
Possibly, a stretching of the nonlinear portion of the work law beyond ƒy0 is performed,
siehe Figure 3.31.

Subsequently, we describe the response based on the provided work law according to ??.
Important is the first point in the work law (5) that defines the length of the unloading part.
The unloading part from point (1) does not end at σ = 0 but at point (6). From there first the
linear part is attached to reach (5’). Then the nonlinear part of the worklaw (5)-(1) is streched
(5’)-(1’) and added to reach the lower end tangent of the negative part of the worklaw at (1’)
(end tangent = green line in Figure 3.31).

For multiple cyclic loading with increasing load factor PKIN shows the typical kinematic hard-
ening force-displacement curve (see Figure 3.29).

Figure 3.30 shows the kinematic hardening for a curved work law without linear part (fy=0).

The stretching of the nonlinear part of the work law for a curved work law with linear part
(fy=60) is demonstrated in figure 3.31. In a first unloading the new zero point of the work law
is reached (red circle). If at that point the original work law curve would be added, you would
never reach the lower end tangent (two upper pictures). Therefore the nonlinear part of the
work law is streched to reach the lower end tangent (lower picture).

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-161

AQUA | Input Description

N[kN]
feder element 1001

300

200

100

0.0
[mm]
0.0
−200

−100

100

200

300

400
−100

−200

−300

Figure 3.30: Kinematic Hardening for curved work law

HYPE Hyperelastic
The response is nonlinear elastic, without plastic deformation. Upon load reversal, HYPE
follows the same path as in the loading phase (7) (Figure 3.28).

3-162 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

P[kN]
400

200

0.0
0.0 [mm]

200

400

600
−600

−400

−200

−200

−400
P
P[kN]
400

200

0.0

[mm]
0.0

200

400

600
−600

−400

−200

−200

−400
P
P[kN]
400

200

0.0
[mm]
0.0
−600

−400

−200

200

400

600

−200

−400
P

Figure 3.31: Stretching of the nonlinear part of the work law

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-163

AQUA | Input Description

3.26 SFLA – Force-Displacement Laws and Nonlinear Properties

See also: SMAT

SFLA

Item Description Unit Default

Standard spring
TYPE Type of reaction LT4 !
P Axial force reaction
PT Transversal force reaction
M Axial moment reaction
General link
TYPE Type of reaction LT4 !
N Normal force
Vy Shear force Vy
Vz Shear force Vz
Mt Torsional moment Mt
My Bending moment My
Mz Bending moment Mz
Performance limits
PERF Performance point

General
The SFLA command complements the SMAT command and allows specification of nonlinear
characteristics and work laws for the individual reactions of the link material. The work law
describes the loading path under uni-axial monotonic loading (backbone curve). Material re-
action under unloading and reloading conditions takes place according to the chosen material
type (→ SMAT MTYP).

A work law consists of up to 20 (U,F) tuples, identifying points on the curve. These points
are entered by consecutive SFLA commands. Segments inbetween these points are linear
(polygonal shape); alternatively they can be chosen to be smoothened by cubic splines. The
input of of the points must be made in such a way that U is arranged in monotonically ascending
order.

Partial material safety factors are not considered automatically; they must be incorporated in
the specified work laws explicitly.

Hint
For strains beyond the defined range, a linear continuation using the tangent of the bound-
ing defined curve point is assumed (linear perturbation). This holds both for tensile and

3-164 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

(Hint continued...)

compressive branches of the curve; a continuation from the tension domain into the com-
pression domain and vice versa is not performed, however.

TYPE
The available reaction types TYPE depend on the chosen link type (→ SMAT LTYP).

Hint
The reaction type TYPE must be specified with the first command line, i.e. the one which
identifies the first point of the curve (work law).This definition is retained for subsequent
points, i.e., subsequent command lines. A subsequent command line with changed TYPE
marks the beginning of a new work law or the beginning of a new family of work laws (see
LEV)), respectively.

3.26.1 Work laws and nonlinear properties for standard spring elements
(→ SMAT LTYP STD)

TYPE Description Unit Default

TYPE Type of reaction LT4 !

Axial force kN/ m2
 
P 1155

Transversal force kN/ m2

 
PT 1155

kNm/ m2
 
M Axial moment 1156

Work law
U Displacement [mm] 1003 or rotation [mrd] 1004 ∗ !
F Area related force or moment, units according to TYPE ∗ !
(see above)
S Type of supporting point ∗ POL
POL Polygon point, sharp bend
SPL C2 -continuous point (cubic spline)
or stiffness kN/ m2 / m 1097 , kNm/ m2 / rd 1100
   
∗ -
Hardening modulus kN/ m2 / m 1097 , kNm/ m2 / rd 1100
   
SH ∗ -
FP Elastic (proportional) limit, units according to TYPE (see ∗ -
above)
Additional nonlinearities
kN/ m2
 
CRAC Optional tensile strength (cracking) 1155 -
kNm/ m2
 
1156

GAP Optional initial slip in positive direction [mm] 1003 -

[mrd] 1004
GAPN Optional initial slip in negative direction cf. GAP GAP
FRIC Optional friction coefficient (for TYPE PT) [−] -
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-165

AQUA | Input Description

TYPE Description Unit Default

kN/ m2
 
COH Optional cohesion (for TYPE PT) 1089 -

Special predefined shapes

For some common work law shapes, a special definition in one single input line is possible:

• Linear elastic shape: Input of S, only.

• Elastic - ideal plastic shape: Input of S and F.
• Trilinear shape: Input of S (elastic stiffness), FP (proportionality limit), SH (hardening mod-
ulus) and F (plastic limit).
• Plastic limit (Limitation of the capacity): Input of F, only.

Additional nonlinearities
Additional nonlinear characteristics can be specified for respective reaction types. These fea-
tures are described in subsequent subsections.

The following table provides an overview which additional nonlinear features are available de-
pending on reaction type, material type and shape of the work law.

Reaction type Material type Work law shape

P PT M PLAS9 PISO PKIN HYPE
CRAC ✓ ✓10 ✓ ✓ ✓ − − any
GAP ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ − ✓ any
GAPN ✓ −11 ✓ ✓ ✓ − ✓ any
FRIC − ✓ − − ✓ − − linear
COH − ✓ − − ✓ − − linear

Hint
For material type MTYP PKIN, additional nonlinearities are not feasible.

Gap model - Initial slip

Provision of an optional initial slip is accomplished independent of the work law by defining
corresponding GAP and GAPN properties.

Initial slip is differentiated in positive (tension) and negative (compression) directions. The
magnitude of maximum slip is not affected by possible plastic deformation during the response
history, it remains at its initial value. Upon load reversal, slip may be activated again (cf.
Figure 3.32).
9 Combination of reaction type PT and PLAS is supported by FEABENCH, only.
10 Supported by FEABENCH, only.
11 For reaction type PT, GAPN ≡ GAP is always implied.

3-166 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

N[kN]

300
springelement 10
200

100

0.0
0.0
−100

[mm]

100

150

200

250

300
−50

−100 50

−200

−300

Figure 3.32: Spring work law with GAP > 0 and GAPN = GAP

Crack model
An optional tensile strength can be provided independent of the work law via definition of a
corresponding CRAC property for the respective reaction.

In contrast to a tension limitation by means of a corresponding work law definition, CRAC

assures that

• upon reaching the specified cracking strength, the transferable tensile force drops to zero.
• continued loading is accompanied by corresponding crack-growth.
• upon load reversal, the crack-opening must be completely reversed before compressive
forces can be transfered again.

Coulomb friction model

For reaction type PT, via the optional input of FRIC and COH, it is possible to effectively con-
strain the allowed stress transfer in transversal direction depending on the magnitude of the
axial stress σP according to the Coulomb limit:

 COH FRC
z}|{ z }| {
 c − tn (ϕ) ·σP for σP ≤ 0



τPT ≤ (3.144)

 c for σP > 0



0 if cracked in P direction

Hint
Coulomb friction model and crack model are mutually exclusive, i.e., it is not feasible to

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-167

AQUA | Input Description

(Hint continued...)

simultaneously define cracking strength and friction parameters for reaction type PT.

3.26.2 Work laws for general link elements

(→ SMAT LTYP IHNG or PMM)

TYPE Description Unit Default

TYPE Type of reaction: LT4 !

N Normal force [kN] 1101
VY Shear force Vy [kN] 1102
VZ Shear force Vz [kN] 1102
MT Torsional moment Mt [kNm] 1103
MY Bending moment My [kNm] 1104
MZ Bending moment Mz [kNm] 1104
Work law
U Displacement [mm] 1003 or rotation [mrd] 1004 ∗ !
F Force or moment, units according to TYPE (see above)1 ∗ !
S Type of supporting point ∗ POL
POL Polygon point, sharp bend
SPL C2 -continuous point (cubic spline)
or stiffness [kN/ m] 1095 , [kNm/ rd] 1098 ∗ -
SH Hardening modulus [kN/ m] 1095 , [kNm/ rd] 1098 ∗ -
FP Elastic (proportional) limit, unit according to TYPE (see ∗ -
above) 1
P-R interaction
LEV Normal force reference level [%] , -
[−]

Work laws are entered in a similar fashion as for standard springs, including the possibility of
refering to special predefined shapes (cf. subsubsection 3.26.1).

LEV
The formulation of a normal force-dependent reaction R (P-R interaction) is possible by defining
a family of work laws; each curve within this family being characterized by a specifically defined
normal force reference level LEV12 . The input of the reference level is carried out relative to the
link capacity SMAT P+/ P- (in [%] or as factor [−] ).
1 Inthe case that corresponding link capacities have been defined via SMAT, a relative input of F in [%] oder
[−] is recommended. Doing so, a value < 0.0 refers to the MIN-values while a value > 0.0 refers to the MAX-
values of the capacities corresponding to the respective type of reaction.
12 The reference level LEV must be specified at the input of the first point of each family of curves. This definition

is retained for the subsequent points of the curve, until a change of LEV occurs. This change marks the beginning
of a new curve for the family of curves for the present TYPE. A change in the reaction type TYPE completes the
definition of the family of curves and marks the beginning of a new curve (family) for the new TYPE.

3-168 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Hint
The input for the definition of a family of curves must be arranged in a monotonically
increasing order for normal force reference level LEV.

The pictures 3.33 and 3.34 show for example the definition of a family of curves for the reaction
My and the resulting P − My interaction diagram.

MyM[kNm] S U
400.0
S U

S U
S U

200.0

S U
S U
-U -S 0 S U
0.0
-U -S
phi-yM[mrad]
-20.0

-10.0

0.0

10.0

20.0
-U -S

-U -S -200.0
-U -S

-U -S

-U -S
-400.0
P-level=M -1000.0[kN] P-level=M -980.0[kN]
P-level=M -950.0[kN] P-level=M -700.0[kN]
P-level=M -546.0[kN] P-level=M -200.0[kN]
P-level=M -70.2[kN] P-level=M 0.0[kN]
P-level=M 100.0[kN]

Figure 3.33: P − My Family of curves

P [kN]
-400.0

-200.0

200.0

400.0
0.0

My [kNm]
0.0

-500.0

-1000.0
phi-y,pl= 0.0[mrad] phi-y,pl= 0.8[mrad]
phi-y,pl= 2.3[mrad] phi-y,pl= 5.4[mrad]
phi-y,pl= 11.6[mrad] phi-y,pl= 24.0[mrad]

Figure 3.34: P − My Interaction

3.26.3 Performance limits

PERF Description Unit Default

Performance point
U Displacement [mm] 1003 or rotation [mrd] 1004 ∗ !
F Performance criterion label LT4 -
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-169

AQUA | Input Description

PERF Description Unit Default

Additional attributes referring to global performance criteria

CAT Performance category reference [LT4] -
MREF Performance threshold, material number reference [−] -
LIMT Performance threshold, limit type [−] -
COMP Compressive limit
TENS Tensile limit

To categorize and simplify assessment of the link reaction (Performance), a work law along the
deformation axis can optionally be divided in arbitrary sections, also known as Performance
Intervals. The subdivision takes place by the definition of Performance Limits, which mark the
interval boundaries.

A set of performance limits is associated with the preceding work law; it is performed by enter-
ing the corresponding tuples of U and F values in consecutive commands:

• U marks the associated deformation threshold of the performance limit.

• F is a free identifier of up to 4 letters. Example: ”S” for marking the deformation limit
associated with the serviceability limit state.

Just as for the work laws themselves, input of the performance limits within a set must be
arranged according to U in monotonically ascending order. A new set of performance limits
must be marked by a corresponding TYPE PERF in the first command line.

The following input example sets 5 performance limits for the previously defined My work law13
(see also Figure 3.33).

!Link material:
SMAT NO 112 LTYP IHNG P+ 100 P- -1000 MY+ 400 TITL "Plastic Hinge"
...
!Family of curves for reaction My:
...
!Curve for P-level 0.2*(P-) = -200kN:
SFLA S 400000 SH 20000 FP 0.8[-] F 1.0[-] LEV -0.2[-] TYPE MY

!Associated set of performance limits:

SFLA U -10.0 F "-U" TYPE PERF
SFLA U -5.0 F "-S"
SFLA U 0.0 F "0"
SFLA U 5.0 F "S"
SFLA U 10.0 F "U"
...

In case of a family of curves, additionally the following is to be noted:

13 The
points FP and F of the trilinear work low are entered in relation (80% and 100%, respectively) to the
moment capacity MY+, which is defined via the SMAT command.

3-170 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

• Generally, for each work law of a family of curves corresponding performance limits can be
specified.
• Within one family of curves, the consistency of the performance limits must be ensured, i.e.
– The number of limits with U < 0.0 must be the same for all work laws of the family of
curves.
– The number of limits with U > 0.0 must be the same for all work laws of the family of
curves.
– The limit identifiers (labels) are the same for all the work laws of the family of curves
(the first set of performance limits defines the identifiers for the entire family of curves).

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-171

AQUA | Input Description

3.27 LCA – Material Definitions for Life Cycle Assessment

LCA

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of the material − *

TYPE Indicator LT4 !
GWP Global Warming Potential
PHAS Phase Lt16 !
VAL Value [∗] 1239/1240 -

The definitions for the life cycle assessment can be done for individual materials with the record
LCA. Currently, it is possible to enter the global warming potential, which is defined via the CO2
equivalent per material.

The corresponding phases of the life cycle of a building are defined with PHAS. It is possible
to input the values individually for each phase or as a sum for several phases.

• Definition for a phase

LCA NO 1 TYPE GWP PHAS A2 VAL 20

• Definition of the sum for the phases A1-A3

LCA NO 1 TYPE GWP PHAS A1-A3 VAL 60

The basic unit for the global warming potenial (GWP) is kgCO2e = kilogramm CO2 equivalent.
The values for the individual materials can be defined per mass or per volume. The default for
all steel materials is kgCO2e/kg or kgCO2e/lbm and for concrete kgCO2e/m3 bzw. kgCO2e/ft3.

With a restart CTRL REST 2 it is possible to define the values of the life cycle assessment in
a separate AQUA run for already existing materials. Please note that only the last calculated
input is valid. This means that existing values are overwritten at restart.

With the following input variants it is possible to delete the material values of the life cycle
assessment from the CDB:

LCA deletes all definitions

LCA TYPE GWP deletes all definitions for GWP
LCA NO 2 TYPE GWP deletes all definitions of the material 3 for GWP
LCA NO 3 TYPE GWP PHAS A3 deletes phase A3 of the material 3 for GWP

3-172 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.28 SVAL – Cross Section Values

See also: SREC, SCIT, PROF, CABL, SECT

SVAL

Item Description Unit Default

NO Cross-section number − 1
MNO Material number or preferred beamtype −/ LT 1
CENT centric beam
BEAM excentr. beam (Reference axis)
TRUS only truss (no bending)
CABL only cables

m2
 
A Cross section area 1012 1.0
m2
 
AY Shear area for y 1012 -
m2
 
AZ Shear area for z 1012 -
m4
 
IT Torsional moment of inertia 1014 *
m4 A3 /12
 
IY Moment of inertia y 1014

m4
 
IZ Moment of inertia z 1014 IY
m4
 
IYZ Moment of inertia yz 1014 0
m6
 
CM Warping modulus 1016 0
YSC Coordinates of shear centre [mm] 1011 0
ZSC relative to the elastic centre [mm] 1011 0

YMIN Ordinate of the left edge fibre [mm] 1011 *

YMAX Ordinate of the right edge fibre [mm] 1011 *
ZMIN Ordinate of the top edge fibre [mm] 1011 *
ZMAX Ordinate of the bottom edge fibre [mm] 1011 *
1/ m3 1018
 
WT Shear stress due to Mt = 1.0 *
1/ m2 1017
 
WVY Shear stress due to Vy = 1.0 *
1/ m2 1017
 
WVZ Shear stress due to Vz = 1.0 *

YS Coordinates of of the elastic centre [mm] 1011 *

ZS [mm] 1011 *

only in connection with input for YMIN - ZMAX

NPL Plastic axial resistance [kN] 1101 -
VYPL Plastic shear y-y resistance [kN] 1102 -
VZPL Plastic shear z-z resistance [kN] 1102 -
MTPL Plastic primary torsional resistance [kNm] 1103 -
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-173

AQUA | Input Description

Item Description Unit Default

MYPL Plastic bending y-y resistance [kNm] 1104 -

MZPL Plastic bending z-z resistance [kNm] 1104 -
BCYZ Buckling strain curves for for y-y and z-z axes -

TITL Cross section designation Lt24 -

This record allows the input of cross sections without the corresponding geometric data, which
are necessary of course in detailed stress analysis, yield zone theory or reinforced concrete
dimensioning. Thus they can be used only for the static analysis.

With NO and a Literal for MNO you may also subsequently specify which element type should
be selected for elements with automatic type selection with that section. This definition can be
redefined at any time for any existing section. All other input values will be ignored in that case.

The default for YS is 0.0. If the ordinates YMIN and YMAX are defined, YS is in the middle
between YMIN and YMAX. The default of ZS is defined analogously.

If IT is defined as zero, special attention should be paid so that the torsional degree of freedom
does not lead to undefined rotation capability during the assembly of the total static system
(Error message: Parts of the system can move freely.).

The default for IY is equivalent to a rectangular section with a width of 1 m and the given area
A.

In accordance with Saint Venant’s estimate, the default value for the torsional moment of inertia
is
A4
T = (3.145)
4 · π 2 · (y + z )

This value is exact for circular and elliptical sections.

Deviations for a rectangular section:

a/b 1/1 2/1 10/1

exact 0.140 0.458 3.13
approx. 0.152 0.486 3.01

The defaults for ymin up to zmax assume as a first guess a rectangular cross section and apply
then appropriate corrections from the radius of gyration.

SVAL can also be used for defining a modified cross section. This can be done either by
using a negative NO to modify an already defined cross section, or by making a copy of an
existing cross section by means of a negative MNO. The values A through CM may be then
then defined with a unit of [−] ,[0/ 0] or [0/ 00] as factors for the corresponding values, and
are thus preset to 1.0[−] . The new cross section has no geometric properties any more.

3-174 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

CADINP 3.1: Example

PROF 1 HEB 300
PROF 2 HEB 300
SVAL -1 IT 0.5[-]
SVAL 3 -2 IT 0.5[-] IZ 9000[cm4]
SECT 4
SV IT 0.5[-]
PROF 1 HEB 300

Cross section 1 receives 50% of the torsional moment of inertia. The geometry of the cross
section gets erased. Cross section 3 has 50% of the torsional moment of inertia of cross
section 2 and a slightly higher Iz but no geometry. Cross section 2 was not modified. Cross
section 4 is a cross section with IT reduced by half and with complete geometry. (Only possible
with AQUA license)

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-175

AQUA | Input Description

3.29 SREC – Rectangle, T-beam, Plate

See also: SVAL, EDGB, SHRW, SCIT, PROF, CABL, SECT

SREC

Item Description Unit Default

NO Cross section number − 1

H Total height [mm] 1011 -
B Width for rectangular, T-beam [mm] 1011 1000
HO Thickness of the plate (upper part) [mm] 1011 0
BO Effective width of the plate (upper part) [mm] 1011 0
SO Offset of reinforcement position - [mm] 1024 H/10
SU Offset of reinforcement position + [mm] 1024 SO
SS Offset of side reinforcement [mm] 1024 SO
MNO Material number − *

MRF Material number of reinforcement − *

MRFL Material link reinforcement − *
RTYP Reinforcement subtype LT *
CORN single points at corner
CU perimetric reinforcement
SYM symmetrical reinforcement
ASYM asymmetrical reinforcements
for more options see below
cm2
 
ASO Basic reinforcement position - 1020 0
cm2
 
ASU Basic reinforcement position + 1020 0
DASO Diameter of top reinforcement [mm] 1023 *
DASU Diameter of bottom reinforcement [mm] 1023 DASO
DASS Diameter of side reinforcement [mm] 1023 DASO
A Distance of reinforcements [mm] 1011 *
AMIN Minimum distance of reinforcements [mm] 1011 *
AMAX Maximum distance of reinforcements [mm] 1011 *
cm2 / m 1021
 
ASL Area of shear link reinforcements *
INCL Inclination of shear links cot|deg 0
Table continued on next page.

3-176 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Item Description Unit Default

REF Location of local coordinate origin LT C

C elastic centre
Y+/Y-/M in beam direction right/left/mid-
dle
Y+Z-/Y-Z-/Z- in beam direction upper
right/left/middle
Y+Z+/Y-Z+/Z+ in beam direction lower right/left-
/middle
Y+P/Y-P/PM in beam direction plate right/left-
/middle
SC shear centre

YM explicit offsets in relation to the mid point [mm] 1011 -

ZM mid point = H/2 (independent on the definition REF) [mm] 1011 -

IT Torsional moment of inertia −/ m4 *

AY Shear deformation area for VY −/ m2 0
AZ Shear deformation area for VZ −/ m2 0
BCYZ Buckling curve selector LT *
SPT Number of stress points (0/ 2/ 4/ 6) LT 0
with shear design of flanges (1/ 3/ 5/ 7)
with lower (or upper) plate reinforcement for torsion
(8)
INTE Interface between web and plate LT -
INDE indented shear joint
ROUG rough shear joint
EVEN even shear joint
SMOO smooth (very even) shear joint
CINT Roughness coefficient of interface − *
MUE Friction coefficient of interface − *
BEFF Width of equivalent hollow section [mm] 1011 *
BDL Total width of the plate for T-beams [mm] 1011 BO, B
if BDL > BO (downstandig beam) or BDL > B (up-
standig beam), additional dead weight is taking into
account

TITL Cross section designation Lt32 *

Depending on the definition of values one of the following section types is generated:

H Plate with implied width of 1 m or width BO

H,B Rectangular cross section
H...BO T-beam cross section

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-177

AQUA | Input Description

In the case of a T-beam, the total width of the plate BDL can be defined additionally in order to
design it as a single beam (without T-beam philosophy). The increased dead weight is taken
into account here and the greater width can be used for load applications. Only the widths BO
or B are used for the static values in order to obtain realistic shear areas.

BO BO

SO

HO

HO
H

SU

B B B

Figure 3.35: Dimensions of the Cross Section

When nothing is input for REF, the origin of the coordinate system of the cross section is
assumed to be at the elastic centre. This is of relevance for beams with a reference axis. The
required dimensions of the cross section can be calculated by AQB. For this task, B or H can
be input negative when only that dimension should be changed.

The distribution of the reinforcement is controlled with the option RTYP, the diameter DASO/U,
the distance A and some entries for maximum distances between bars of the selected INI-File
of the design code. A definition of the total numbers of bars is possible by the usage of the unit
[-] with ASO resp ASU.

Columns:
CU ASO as layer 0 at all 4 sides with bar spacing (circumferential)
SYM ASO as layer 0 each at upper and lower side, however if the distance is
greater than MaxBarDistanceC (300 mm), intermediate bars with layer 3 will
be added
SZM ASO as layer 0 each at right and left side, however if the distance is greater
than MaxBarDistanceC (300 mm), intermediate bars with layer 3 will be
added
CORN ASO as layer 0 concentrated in the corners, bars between according to the
selected design code
CORN:n as CORN, but bars in corners with multiplicity of n (1≤n≤7)
CORN:nZ as CORN:n, but oriented left/right
p
CORN:nB as CORN:n, but with bundles (bars with a larger equivalent diameter D · n)

In all cases the diameter will be preset to the smallest allowed value from the INI-File (MinBar-
DiameterC = 12mm), and the absolute basic reinforcement according to the number of bars
(total minimum of 4) with that diameter.

As the reinforcement is saved as single bars, there will be some maximum allowable distances

3-178 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

AMAX established in the design codes for columns, bending members and torsional members.
The bars in the corners are positioned with the minimum distance AMIN, along the layouts with
A. Unless AMAX is defined quite large, intermediate constructive bars will be inserted with that
maximum distance in between.

Figure 3.36: Reinforcement as Single Bars

Beams:
ASYM two main layers ASU at lower (1) and ASO at upper (2) side, optional inter-
mediate bars in layer (3) at the sides
ASZM similar to [ASYM] but right (1) and left (2)

If the distance of the reinforcement layers (1 below) and (2 above) becomes greater than the
limit MaxBarDistanceT (350 mm), additional reinforcement at the sides of the web will be intro-
duced with layer (3). Although this is mandatory for torsion, you might suppress this by entering
a zero value for IT or a large value for AMAX, but then these sections will not be designable
for torsion any more. This layer (3) will be fixed unless a "‘:F"’ is appended to the RTYP literal,
then it might be increased for biaxial bending design.

The cover of the reinforcement from the side edge is preset to the minimum cover from the
upper or lower edge, but not larger than one-fourth of the width. It may be changed with item
SS.

Please note, that DIN 1045-1 uses the cover of the compressive reinforcement (effective dis-
tance - D/2) as a limit for the lever arm during the shear design of the cracked section. Thus
the diameter has always an effect on the shear design.

For ASL a minimum value for the shear links may be specified. The default is zero for sym-
metric reinforcements (compression members) and taken from the design code otherwise. As
some design tasks require to distinguish between the minimum and the provided shear rein-
forcements, the definition should specify only the minimum shear reinforcements. The value
may be specified in cm2 / m 1021 or cm2 / m2 1022 or as ratio in [-].
   

MRF = 0 must be specified for unreinforced concrete sections. The input of MRF or MRFL is
not allowed for steel or timber cross sections.

The torsional inertia and elastic torsional stress is always calculated based on the distribution
of the torsional moment on the web with the full height and the plate with a reduced width. To
avoid constraint torsion for concrete constructions the effective torsional moment of inertia can
be reduced by IT explicitly or with the unit [%] to a relative value. A value of 0.0 is allowed but
may lead to kinematic systems.

For the equivalent hollow cross section used in computing the torsion reinforcement only the

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-179

AQUA | Input Description

web is used. The thickness of the equivalent hollow cross section BEFF is set according to the
selected design code:

• EN 1992-1-1 and National Annexes: The width is taken as the double value of the rein-
forcement cover, but not shorter than A/U in accordance with EN 1992-1-1 6.3.2 (1).
• DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA, DIN FB 102: The width is taken as the double value of the reinforce-
ment cover in accordance with DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA 6.3.2, DIN FB 102.
• OEN EN 1992-1-1/NA: The width is taken with a sixth of the diameter of an inscribed circle
in accordance with F. Leonhadt und E. Mönning: Vorlesungen über Massivbau, Erster Teil:
Grundlagen zur Bemessung im Stahlbetonbau, Kapitel 9.3.3, Seite 233-235, but not shorter
than the double value of the reinforcement cover in accordance with OEN EN 1992-1-1/NA.
• SIA 262: The width is taken to at least an eighth of the diameter of an inscribed circle in
accordance with SIA 262.

If the compressive stress in the concrete is exceeded, a larger value can be specified with
BEFF.

If SPT is defined with a value +8, and the reinforcement in the plate is specified within the outer
third, then a second layer is created in the inner third and the torsion is distributed on web and
flanges.

By default, shear deformation areas are always computed – independent of the material type –
and accounted for consistently for beam analysis according to Timoshenko-theory. The shear
correction factor for the shear deformation areas is 5/6 of the area for rectangular cross sec-
tions. For T beam cross sections, a numerical integration is occured according to the Boundary
Elements Method (CTRL STYP BEM 3). This behavior can be overruled by explicit specifica-
tion of the respective shear deformation areas Ay and AZ with a value in m2 or by a factor
 

with the explicit unit of [%] . Specifying 0.0 deactivates the effect of shear deformation areas
for the beam analysis.

The design of the transverse shear takes place at the most unfavourable location (neutral axis
or connection to the plate). A definition of SPTS 3 selects one of the flanges, SPTS 5 or 7 both
flanges for a design. If a definition of the interface is made, the design of the interface will be
done always.

3-180 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.30 EDGB – Edge beam

See also: SVAL, SREC, SHRW, SCIT, PROF, CABL, SECT

EDGB

Item Description Unit Default

NO Cross section number − 1

H Total height [mm] 1011 -
B Width for rectangular, T-beam [mm] 1011 1000
HO Thickness of the plate (upper part) [mm] 1011 H/4
BO Effective width of the plate (upper part) [mm] 1011 2*B
SO Offset of reinforcement position - [mm] 1024 H/10
SU Offset of reinforcement position + [mm] 1024 SO
SS Offset of side reinforcement [mm] 1024 SO

MNO Material number − *

MRF Material number of reinforcement − *
MRFL Material link reinforcement − *

REF Location of local coordinate origin LT C

C elastic centre
Y+/Y-/M in beam direction web middle
right/left/middle
Y+Z-/Y-Z-/Z- in beam direction web upper
right/left/middle
Y+Z+/Y-Z+/Z+ in beam direction web lower
right/left/middle
Y+P/Y-P/PM in beam direction plate middle
right/left/middle
Y+P-/Y-P-/P-M in beam direction plate upper
right/left/middle
Y+P+/Y-P+/P+M in beam direction plate lower
right/left/middle
SC shear centre

YM explicit offsets in relation to the mid point of [mm] 1011 -

ZM the web (independent on the definition REF) [mm] 1011 -

FSYM Suppress rotation of principal axes LT NONE

YES Iyz is always set to 0.0
NONE Iyz is not adjusted
FLIP Mirroring on the z axis LT NONE
YES positive face (y to the left)
NONE negative face (y to the right)
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-181

AQUA | Input Description

Item Description Unit Default

cm2 /[−]
 
ASO Basic reinforcement position -Z or number of bars 1020 *
cm2 /[−]
 
ASU Basic reinforcement position +Z or number of bars 1020 *
DASO Diameter of top reinforcement [mm] 1023 *
DASU Diameter of bottom reinforcement [mm] 1023 DASO
DASS Diameter of side reinforcement [mm] 1023 DASO
A Distance of reinforcements [mm] 1011 *
FIXS Fixing of the side reinforcement LT YES
YES No increase of the side reinforcement dur-
ing design.
NONE Possible increase of the side reinforcment
during design
PASU Additional lower (or upper) plate reinforcement for tor- LT NONE
sion
YES With
NONE Without
cm2 / m
 
ASL Area of shear link reinforcements 1021 *
INCL Inclination of shear links cot|deg 0

IT Torsional moment of inertia −/ m4 *

AY Shear deformation area for VY −/ m2 0.
AZ Shear deformation area for VZ −/ m2 0.
AYZ Shear deformation area for VY + VZ −/ m2 0.
SPT Stress points LT YES
YES With
NONE Without
CUTZ Distance z from the top for the shear cut for web [mm] 1011 H/2
CUTF Additional shear cut for flange LT NONE
YES With
NONE Without

INTE Interface between web and plate LT -

INDE indented shear joint
ROUG rough shear joint
EVEN even shear joint
SMOO smooth (very even) shear joint
CINT Roughness coefficient of interface − *
MUE Friction coefficient of interface − *
BEFF Width of equivalent hollow section [mm] 1011 *
Table continued on next page.

3-182 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Item Description Unit Default

BDL Total width of the plate [mm] 1011 BO, B

if BDL > BO (downstandig beam) or BDL > B (up-
standing beam), additional dead weight is taking into
account

TITL Cross section designation Lt32 *

Similar to the standard T-beam in record SREC, an edge beam section can be easily defined
with EDGB. However, this is stored in the database as a polygonal cross section and calculated
with CTRL STYP BEM 3 for the shear stresses.

When nothing is input for REF, the origin of the coordinate system of the cross section is
assumed to be at the elastic centre. This is of relevance for beams with a reference axis.

The distribution of the reinforcement is controlled with the diameter DASO/U, the distance A
and some entries for maximum distances between bars of the selected INI-File of the design
code. A definition of the total numbers of bars is possible by the usage of the unit [-] with ASO
resp ASU. If the distance of the reinforcement layers (1 below) and (2 above) becomes greater
than the limit MaxBarDistanceT (350 mm), additional reinforcement at the sides of the web will
be introduced with layer (3). Although this is mandatory for torsion, you might suppress this by
entering a zero value for IT, but then these sections will not be designable for torsion any more.
This layer (3) for the side reinforcement will be fixed. With FIXS NO it might be increased for
biaxial bending design.

The cover of the reinforcement from the side edge is preset to the minimum cover from the
upper or lower edge, but not larger than one-fourth of the width. It may be changed with item
SS.

For ASL a minimum value for the shear links may be specified. The default is zero for sym-
metric reinforcements (compression members) and taken from the design code otherwise. As
some design tasks require to distinguish between the minimum and the provided shear rein-
forcements, the definition should specify only the minimum shear reinforcements. The value
may be specified in cm2 / m 1021 or cm2 / m2 1022 or as ratio in [-].
   

MRF = 0 must be specified for unreinforced concrete sections. The input of MRF or MRFL is

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-183

AQUA | Input Description

not allowed for steel or timber cross sections.

To avoid constraint torsion for concrete constructions the effective torsional moment of inertia
can be reduced by IT explicitly or with the unit [%] to a relative value. A value of 0.0 is allowed
but may lead to kinematic systems.

For the equivalent hollow cross section used in computing the torsion reinforcement only the
web is used. The thickness of the equivalent hollow cross section BEFF is set according to the
selected design code:

• EN 1992-1-1 and National Annexes: The width is taken as the double value of the rein-
forcement cover, but not shorter than A/U in accordance with EN 1992-1-1 6.3.2 (1).
• DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA, DIN FB 102: The width is taken as the double value of the reinforce-
ment cover in accordance with DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA 6.3.2, DIN FB 102.
• OEN EN 1992-1-1/NA: The width is taken with a sixth of the diameter of an inscribed circle
in accordance with F. Leonhadt und E. Mönning: Vorlesungen über Massivbau, Erster Teil:
Grundlagen zur Bemessung im Stahlbetonbau, Kapitel 9.3.3, Seite 233-235, but not shorter
than the double value of the reinforcement cover in accordance with OEN EN 1992-1-1/NA.
• SIA 262: The width is taken to at least an eighth of the diameter of an inscribed circle in
accordance with SIA 262.

If the compressive stress in the concrete is exceeded, a larger value can be specified with
BEFF.

If PASU YES is defined and the reinforcement in the plate is specified within the outer third,
then a second layer is created in the inner third and the torsion is distributed on web and
flanges.

By default, shear deformation areas are always computed – independent of the material type –
and accounted for consistently for beam analysis according to Timoshenko-theory. The shear
correction factor for the shear deformation areas is 5/6 of the area for rectangular cross sec-
tions. For T beam cross sections, a numerical integration is occured according to the Boundary
Elements Method (CTRL STYP BEM 3). This behavior can be overruled by explicit specifica-
tion of the respective shear deformation areas Ay and AZ with a value in m2 or by a factor
 

with the explicit unit of [%] . AYZ is also determined automatically, unless AZ and / or AZ was
not specified manually. The shear area AYZ can also be negative under certain circumstances.
An explicit input is only possible here in the unit m2 . Specifying 0.0 deactivates the effect of
 

shear deformation areas for the beam analysis.

In order to check the shear stresses due to shear forces, a shear cut is created in the web
of the edge beam section with default of CUTZ H/2 for the z position. The position of this
shear cut can be modified by the user with an input of CUTZ and can be adapted to the most
unfavourable position of the shear stess. With CUTF YES a shear cur in the flange is defined
for the check of flange connection. If a definition of the interface between web and plate is
made, the design of the interface will be done always.

For the standard edge beam, the control options STEU FACE and STEU BEWQ can also be
used.

If further modifications are required for this cross section, it can be exploded in the program

3-184 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

SOFiPLUS, i.e. it can be divided into the components of the corresponding polygonal cross
section. The polygonal cross section can then be graphically edited and modified using the
Cross Section Editor.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-185

AQUA | Input Description

3.31 SHRW – Shear Wall

See also: SVAL, SECT

SHRW

Item Description Unit Default

NO Cross section number − !

T Thickness of the wall [mm] 1011 !
L Length of the wall [mm] 1011 !
SS Offset reinforcement lateral [mm] 1024 35
SZ+ Offset reinforcement position Z+ [mm] 1024 SS
SZ- Offset reinforcement position Z- [mm] 1024 SS

MNO Material number − *

MRF Material number of reinforcement − *
MRFL Material shear reinforcement − MRF

Base reinforcement
A Distance of reinforcements [mm] 1011 150
D Diameter of base reinforcement [mm] 1023 10
RTYP Reinforcement of the edges LT SYM
SYM symmetric reinforcement
ASYM asymmetric reinforcement
explantion below

Edge reinforcement Z+
LZ+ Length of edge reinforcement Z+ [mm] 1011 -
AZ+ Number of bars Z+ (one side ) - 3
DZ+ Diameter of edge reinforcement Z+ [mm] 1023 D
cm2 1020
 
RZ+ Maximum total edge reinforcement Z+ -

Edge reinforcement Z-
LZ- Length of edge reinforcement Z- [mm] 1011 LZ+
AZ- Number of bars Z- (one side ) - AZ+
DZ- Diameter of edge reinforcement Z- [mm] 1023 DZ+
cm2 1020
 
RZ- Maximum total edge reinforcement Z- RZ+

TITL Cross section designation Lt32 *

The record SHRW is used to create simple cross sections as shear walls for stability and
earthquake checks including design.

According to the input, the cross section can receive only a base reinforcement in layer M0 or

3-186 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

also additional edge reinforcements. The reinforcement distribution of the edges is determined
with the literal for RTYP:

SYM symmetric edge reinforcement (default)

both edge reinforcements in layer M1, only input of the values for Z+ required
ASYM asymmetric edge reinforcements
edge reinforcement Z+ in layer M1 and edge reinforcement Z- in layer M2
input of the values for Z+ and / or for Z-

Apart from the material number for the shear reinforcement, no further information on shear
design (e.g. minimum shear reinforcement) is given. Torsion is not taken into account.

The location of the local coordinate system lies in the elastic centre.

The following cross section is generated:

Figure 3.37: Shear wall with edge reinforcements

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-187

AQUA | Input Description

3.32 SCIT – Circular and Tube Sections

See also: SVAL, SREC, PROF, CABL, SECT

SCIT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Cross section number − 1

D Outer diameter [mm] 1011 -
T Thickness (0.0 = solid section) [mm] 1011 -
SA Outer reinforcement offset [mm] 1024 T/10
SI Inner reinforcement offset [mm] 1024 SA
MNO Material number of cross section − *

MRF Material number of reinforcement − *

MRFL Material of shear reinforcement − MRF
RTYP Reinforcement subtype COLU
COLU Column
HOOP hooped column
BEND Bending member
cm2
 
ASA Outer basic reinforcement 1020 -
cm2
 
ASI Inner basic reinforcement 1020 -
DAS Diameter of reinforcement [mm] 1023 *
A Maxium distance of reinforcements or count[-] on bars [mm] 1011 *
cm2 / m 1021
 
ASL Area of shear link reinforcements 0

IT Torsional moment of inertia −/ m4 *

AY Shear deformation area for VY −/ m2 *
AZ Shear deformation area for VZ −/ m2 *

TITL Cross section designation Lt32 *

3-188 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

SA

D T
S

AS ASA

Figure 3.38: Circular cross section

Record QC is intended for the definition of reinforced or timber sections. It is not suited to
define steel sections. These should be defined with PROF and the types BAR. COLD.

The distance SI is taken relativ to the inner radius for an annular section, but on the outer radius
for a solid section. The basic reinforcement may be also specified with explicit unit in [cm2 /m].
There will be at least four locations for the reinforcements. The default will provide six bars, the
number is controlled with item A. If that value is defined negative or with the explicit unit [-], the
given value is taken as the number of bars directly.

Bending members do not have a minimum longitudinal reinforcement, while columns do not
have a minimum shear link area. If a bending member with a longitudinal basic reinforcement
is required, an explicit value for A will trigger this. As the provisions of most design codes are
not covering circular sections, any minimum shear reinforcement has to be selected explicitly
via ASL in cm2 / m 1021 The default of diameter of reinforcement DAS is depending on chosen
 

design code.

The definition of CTRL RFCS in AQUA is also effective for the SCIT section.

Values for IT, AY and AZ are either absolute values or if defined with unit [%] as factors to the
theoretical values.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-189

AQUA | Input Description

3.33 CABL – Cable Sections

See also: SVAL, SREC, SCIT, TUBE, SECT

CABL

Item Description Unit Default

NO Section number − 1
D Nominal diameter [mm] -
TYPE Type of cable section (see remarks) LT -
INL Type of Inlay LT FE
FE, FEN, FEC = Fiber Inlays
SE, SES, SEL = Steel Inlays
MNO Material number of a prestressing steel for cables − 1
record STEE TYPE YC

F Sectional or fill factor − *

or metallic cross section area mm2
K Rupture or cable factor − *
or characteristic breaking load kN
W Weight factor (kg/m/mm2 ) * 100 ∗ *
or weight kg/ m
KE Loss factor (clamping of endpoints etc.) − 1.0
REF Reference of factors F/K/W LT *
DIN according to DIN 3051
EN according to EN 12385-4
GAMR Partial factor γR according to EN 1993-1-11 Tab. 6.2 − 1

TITL Cross section designation Lt32 *

Figure 3.39: Cable Sections

3-190 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Cables without a type will be taken as a round steel bar.

3.33.1 Default Cable Types

The following cable types are available:

6x7 EN 12385-4 Tab. 5

8x7 EN 12385-4 Tab. 6
6x19 EN 12385-4 Tab. 7
8x19 EN 12385-4 Tab. 8
6x36 EN 12385-4 Tab. 9
8x36 EN 12385-4 Tab. 10
6x35N EN 12385-4 Tab. 11
6x19M EN 12385-4 Tab. 12
6x37M EN 12385-4 Tab. 13
17x7 EN 12385-4 Tab. 14
18x7 EN 12385-4 Tab. 14
34x7 EN 12385-4 Tab. 15
35x7 EN 12385-4 Tab. 16

1x7 DIN Spiral cable with 7 wires

1x19 DIN Spiral cable with 19 wires
1x37 DIN Spiral cable with 37 wires
1x61 DIN Spiral cable with 61 wires
...
1x547 DIN Spiral cable with 547 wires

3052 DIN 3052 Spiral cable 1x7

3053 DIN 3053 Spiral cable 1x19
3054 DIN 3054 Spiral cable 1x37
3055 DIN 3055 Stranded cable 6x7
3056 DIN 3056 Stranded cable 8x7
3057 DIN 3057 Strand 6x19 Filler
3058 DIN 3058 Strand 6x19 Seale
3059 DIN 3059 Strand 6x19 Warrington
3060 DIN 3060 Strand 6x19
3061 DIN 3061 Strand 8x19 Filler
3062 DIN 3062 Strand 8x19 Seale
3063 DIN 3063 Strand 8x19 Warrington
3064 DIN 3064 Strand 6x36 Warrington-Seale
3065 DIN 3065 Strand 6x35 Warrington covered
3066 DIN 3066 Strand 6x37 Warrington-Seale
3067 DIN 3067 Strand 8x36 Warrington-Seale
3068 DIN 3068 Strand 6x24 Standard
3069 DIN 3069 multiple Strand 18x7

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-191

AQUA | Input Description

3070 DIN 3070 Flat strand 10x10

3071 DIN 3071 multiple Strand 36x7

VVS Pfeifer full locked coil cables (DIN)

VVS-1 BTS full locked coil cables in opposite/crosslay stranding
VVS-1P BTS full locked coil cables in equal lay/compound stranding
VVS-2 BTS full locked coil cables in opposite/crosslay stranding
VVS-2P BTS full locked coil cables in equal lay/compound stranding
VVS-3 BTS full locked coil cables in opposite/crosslay stranding
VVS-3P BTS full locked coil cables in equal lay/compound stranding
VVS-4 BTS full locked coil cables in opposite/crosslay stranding
VVS-4P BTS full locked coil cables in equal lay/compound stranding

PE-nnn Pfeifer cables PE-3 to PE-100 (Y 1450C)

PG-nnn Pfeifer cables PG-5 to PG-125 (Y 1770C with ES 160000)
PV-nnn Pfeifer cables PV-40 to PV-2000 (Y 1570C with ES 160000)

The ultimate forces of the cables are obtained only based on the tensile strength values given
above)

DINA-nn Stahlton cables DINA-13 to DINA-199 (Y 1670C with ES 205000)

HIAM-nn Stahlton cables HIAM-56 to HIAM-421 (Y 1670C with ES 205000)

3.33.2 Explanation of the Cable Factors

Cable sections differ from circular sections in several reducing factors which are preselected
for the specific design code and the type of inlay:

FE = Fibre inlay
FEN = Natural fibre inlay
FEC = Chemical fibre inlay
SE = Steel inlay
SES = Steel cable inlay
SEL = Steel strand inlay

In the Eurocode EN 12385-4 appendix A to C the definitions of the factors are given:

Metallic cable section Am = C · d2

Minimum ultimate force Fmn = K · d2 · ƒr
Weight per length M = W · d2

In DIN 3051 part 3 the factors have been defined in a different way as:
2
Metallic cable section qm = ƒ · d 4· π
Minimum ultimate force Fmn = k · Fr = k · qm · σz
Weight per length G = qm · 

The loss factor ke taking into account the type of fixing of the cable endings is defined else-

3-192 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

where e.g. in EN 1993-1-11 Tab. 6.2 or DIN 18800. The formula given in EN 12835-4 appendix
A.2 for the ultimate force for cables with diameters larger than 60 mm is not applied. It does
not contain a strength and is not applicable in general cases.

The user has to check all factors in detail, as they depend on the type of anticorrosive lining and
the intended usage (e.g. for cableways). Cable sections may only be used for cable elements
or automatic elements, which derive their type from the cable section type.

The safety factor 1.5 according to EN 1993-1-11 equation (6.2) is considered automatically.
The partial factor γR according to EN 1993-1-11 Tab. 6.2 is defined at GAMR. The determined
tension resistance Frd is the minimum value of the equation (6.2) EN 1993-1-1.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-193

AQUA | Input Description

3.34 SECT – Freely defined Cross Sections

See also: CS, INTE, SV, POLY, CIRC, PANE, PLAT, PROF, Reinforce-
ment, CUT, SPT, SFLA, WIND, WPAR
SECT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Cross section number − 1

MNO Material number for cross section − *
MRF Material number of reinforcement − *
MRFL Material link reinforcement − -
ALPH Angle of rotation Degrees 0
YM Offset of all cross section ordinates [mm] 1011 0
ZM Offset of all cross section ordinates [mm] 1011 0
FSYM Suppress rotation of principal axes LT -
- Iyz set to 0.0 when smaller than
0.001·(Iy+Iz)
YES Iyz is always set to 0.0
NONE Iyz is not adjusted
BTYP preferred beam type LT BEAM
CENT centric beam
BEAM excentr. with reference axis
TRUS only truss (no bending)
CABL only cables
COMP centric compressive member
COLU excentr. column
BCY Buckling strain curve for y-y axis LT *
BCZ Buckling strain curve for z-z axis LT BCY
BCT Lateral torsional buckling curve LT -
ALF Exponent for My in interaction − *
BET Exponent for Mz in interaction −/ LT *
I like a double-T shape
SH like a rectangular hollow shape
TITL Cross section designation Lt32 -

FEM Name of a Data base containing a FEM mesh of the Lt96 -

section
LTEM Load case of a temperature field − -
T Time value of the temperature field sec last
LTAU Loadcase number of the FEM database in which the − 9900
unit shear stress distributions are saved (for each
construction stage 4 load cases)

3-194 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Freely defined cross sections always begin with the record SECT, which defines the cross sec-
tion number. All subsequent input records describe this one cross section, which may consist
of several partial cross sections (external outline, inner perimeter, reinforcement arrangement
etc.). The input for each cross section ends either by the next SECT record, which can be
empty, or by the END record.

Freely defined cross sections are divided into three groups (see 1.1):

* solid cross sections

* thin-walled cross sections
* FE-sections

A coordinate system y - z is established for every SECT definition, the origin of which is in
general on the reference axis defined by the two nodes of a beam. All coordinate data of the
input records which follow a SECT record refer to this coordinate system. The directions of the
axes are identical to those of the local beam element and defined in accordance with Chapter
2.1 (y to the left, z downward). The local coordinate axes y’ and z’ of a centric beam are only
shifted parallel to the cross section coordinate system, so that the origin is at the elastic centre
of the cross section.

Prestressing Tendons (AQBS, GEOS) always refer to the input coordinate system. It may be
appropriate to take this into account when selecting the zero point.

If desired, however, it is also possible to rotate the cross section by any angle or into the
direction of the principal axes (ALPH ’S’) as well as to translate it (items ALPH, YM and ZM).
For all rotations, it is not the reference coordinate system but the cross section elements that
are rotated. The definition of ALPH will force AQB to do the stress analysis for the rotated
principal axis system. The input of CTRL AXIS -2 within AQB has then no effect on this section
any more.

On the other hand a definition of FSYM YES will suppress the rotation of the principal axis
completely. This is intended for sections describing only half of a full symmetric section, but
may have very dangerous effects if applied to general sections. The value of Iyz has consider-
able effects on deformations and also forces within constrained systems. This option enforces
also uni-axial bending (Vy=0, Mz=0) within AQB.

With BTYP you may specify your preferred beam element type for that section. This info may
be used for the mesh generation and the specification of minimum reinforcements.

For the design of a reinforced concrete cross section with AQB, it is always necessary, to
specify the location of the intended reinforcement - single, linear, or perimetric reinforcement-
by means of the records RF, LRF, CRF or CURF. Freely defined cross sections cannot be
dimensioned with STB/STBA. MRF defines the material number of reinforcement. Only if the
link reinforcement has a different quality of material a combined value is to be entered. Then
this combined value represents the default for the records CUT.

The material number should, in general, be specified by SECT. The declaration of a material
number with individual cross section elements is only appropriate for composite cross sections.
In case of composite sections, ideal cross section values are calculated, based on the material

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-195

AQUA | Input Description

defined in SECT; e.g.:

(A · E)
A = (3.146)
Ereƒ

All cross section elements are addressed with an arbitrarily selected identification number,
which has up to four characters in general. In AQB and ResultViewer you may specify a mask
to select specific elements for the output. You might for example then select all elements with
a zero at the end.

The buckling strain curve can be input for stability checks. The permissible input values are 0
(none), a, b, c or d. Appropriate technical knowledge is required for making this choice in case
of general cross sections. AQUA, attempts to model most cases with the following defaults:

strong weak
axis axis
Profiles without welding joints
Annular and SH-shapes a a
U, L and solid circle shapes c c
Double T-shapes h/b > 1.2 t ≤ 40mm a b
t > 80mm d d
others b c

all others
I-strong > 1.67 · I-weak and
I-t < 0.50 · I-weak
tmax ≤ 40 mm b c
tmax > 40 mm c d
I-strong < 1.67 · I-weak or
I-t > 0.50 · I-weak
tmax ≤ 40 mm b b
tmax > 40 mm c c

The buckling curve ”e” may be input to select the old AISC-curve with the Euler hyperbola for
λ > 0.5 and a quadratic parabola for the plastic region. The safety factors have to be large
enough for this curve!

For ultimate plastic design according EN 1993-1-1 the interaction of the bending moments
requires to exponents α and β. As these factors depend strongly on the type of the section, it
is possible to define them explicitly or to chose from the two predefined formulas.

Hint
For some records (e.g. TVAR and PROF) it makes a difference if those records are

3-196 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

(Hint continued...)

defined within a section or separately. A definiton of SECT 0 will allow to terminate the
current section.

3.34.1 Parametric Sections

It is very common, especially in the bridge design, that very similar sections are derived from
a template. AQUA will therefore not only allow this parametric approach, but it will also store
the parametric information along with the cross section in the database, in order to allow easy
prototyping.

Primary solution for that task are formula expressions to be defined for any coordinate or per-
manent radius (CIRC, CRF) as well as the thicknesses of thin-walled elements and their shear
connections with up to 256 characters in the form of ”=formula”. These formulas will be saved
with the section and may be reevaluated for any section with different values along an axis (see
GAX/GAXP) or with explicit definitions locally with TVAR commands.

Formulas should use variables with a designated unit, only then the interpretation of #B + 20
can be handled in a unique way. Simple cases may be also defined in the default sectional
units. As an alternate possibility the unit of the formula may be appended, but in that case all
the used variables must not have assigned a unit.

The following variables will be predefined for an axis:

#S_ACT The actual distance along the axis

#S_XI(x) Array of s-values of the support lines along the axis
#S_XI(2.5) is the S-value in the middle of 2nd and 3rd support

Then we may define coordinates relative to up to three other reference points. As a reference
you may use every stress point, polygon vertex, panel or circular element. The reference
is done via this explicit 4-character identifier. The specified coordinates are relative to that
reference. However if the coordinates are not a formula and either CTRL REFD 0 has been
specified or the reference is preceeded by an @ the coordinates are taken as absolute, which
is used for the export of sections.

It is also possible to specify the position of the reference point by an axis, for that case the
reference has to be specified as the ID of that axis with a colon prefix, e.g. ”:AX_0”. The local
coordinates (y,z) are then given by the 3D-distance to the same parameter on the reference
axis projected in the plane of the section.

If points with multiple identifiers are present, then only the first occurrence of that point is used
and the others are neglected. If a reference point is not part of the section itself, you should use
the material number 0 for it. However, you may have an arbitrary number of nested references,
i.e. a reference point may use a reference itself. For thin walled elements start and end point
may be addressed by a reference with an index.

As the references may be used on single points, start points and end points, the following
examples use a generic description. Thus REF holds for REFP resp. REFA or REFD.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-197

AQUA | Input Description

PT PTZ

PT z
z

PT0 PTY
y y

Figure 3.40: Carthesian References

Case 1: Carthesian References

• You may define the coordinates relative to the reference point in absolute Cartesian coor-
dinates y and z (left picture) by specifying:
REF PT0
For a derived instance the relative distance is kept as an absolute value or taken from the
given formula for this type of reference.
• You may define the coordinates relative to two reference points in absolute cartesian coor-
dinates y and z by specifying:
REF PTY PTZ
Now the y-ordinate is taken relative to PTY while the z-ordinate is taken relative to PTZ.
If a reference of only one coordinate is desired the reference of the other coordinate may
be specified as ’0000’ relative to the origin of the coordinate system. As shortcut it is also
possible to specify only a single reference with a preceeding > to inherit only the right
ordinate y or a ˆ for the elevation value (z).

• It is also possible to specify negative references. The coordinates will then be used with an
alternate sign, allowing easy description of [Link] the coordinates itself, the double
of the coordinate values of the mirroring center or line have to be specified. (yne =2•ymrr -
yorg )

REF -PTY Mirroring to a point

REF PTY -PTY Mirroring to the y-axis
REF -PTY PTY Mirroring to the z-axis

Case 2: Polar References

PTD
PTD

PT0 PT0

Figure 3.41: Polar References

The point PTD (at item REFD, RFDA or RFDE) defines the direction of the reference relative

3-198 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

to the PT0 point. Instead of a point it is also possible to specify the name of a variable or a
formula containing the angle of the direction in radians: ”=#VARNAME”

The y-coordinate is then measured in the radial direction along, while the z-coordinate is per-
pendicular and positive to the left. The input is done via:

REF PT0 ∼PTD absolute coordinates

REF PT0 +PTD affine scaling only along direction
REF PT0 *PTD affine scaling in both directions

For a variant construction the (+) will maintain the ratio of distances in the radial direction and
maintain the value perpendicular to that.

Example for polar reference in absolute coordinates:

Figure 3.42: Polar Reference in absolute coordinates

The point PTD is defined as geometry point e.g. G1 outside the polygon and is referenced with
∼G1. The variable POL1 at the y coordinate of the polygon point P varies the length from y =
250 to y’ = 500 mm during the interpolation. The z coordinate of the geometry point G1 as well
as the point PT0 can also input with a variable TVAR along an axis (carthesian reference).

SECT 100 MNO 1 MRF 2 FSYM NO BTYP BEAM TITL "master 100"
TVAR 'POL1' VAL 0[mm]
POLY TYPE O MNO 1
VERT '0100' Y -500 Z 0 EXP 1
VERT '0101' Y 500 Z 0 EXP 1
VERT '0102' Y "=#POL1,250" Z 1000 EXP 1 REFP '@0101' REFD '@~G1'
VERT '0103' Y "=#POL1,-250" Z 1000 EXP 1 REFP '@0100' REFD '@~G1'
SPT 'G1' Y 0 Z 2000 MNO 0

! variable POL1 in SOFiMSHC

GAXV 'A1' NAME 'POL1' S 0.0 V 250.000[mm] DV 0.02500 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A1' NAME 'POL1' S 10.0000 V 500.000[mm] DV 0.0 TYPE POLY

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-199

AQUA | Input Description

Example for polar reference with affine scaling only along direction:

Figure 3.43: Polar Reference affine scaling along direction

For the variant with affine scaling only along direction the point PTD has to be defined here
as geometry point G1 which is variable along an axis. In this example the geometry point
G1 moves upwards in z direction. The referencing is done with +G1. For the extension in
longitudinal direction the y coordinate of the polygon point P has to get an information for the
extension, here with the variable POL3 with 250 mm at the start and 500 mm at the end.

The length of the polygon edge y changes to y’ according to the distance ratio:

y/(PT0-PTD) of the first cross section to y’/(PT0-PTD’) of the last cross section = 0.5 resulting
from the ratio variable POL3 of the first cross section to last cross section 250/500 = 0.5.

SECT 300 MNO 1 MRF 2 FSYM NO BTYP BEAM TITL "master 300"
TVAR 'POL3' VAL 0[mm]
TVAR 'G13' VAL 0[mm]
POLY TYPE O MNO 1
VERT '0100' Y -500 Z 0 EXP 1
VERT '0101' Y 500 Z 0 EXP 1
VERT '0102' Y "=#POL3,250" Z 1000 EXP 1 REFP '@0101' REFD '@+G1'
QP '0103' Y "=#POL3,-250" Z 1000 EXP 1 REFP '@0100' REFD '@+G1'
SPT 'G1' Y 0 Z "=#G13,2000" MNO 0

! variables POL3 and G13 in SOFiMSHC

GAXV 'A3' NAME 'POL3' S 0.0 V 250.000[mm] DV 0.02500 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A3' NAME 'POL3' S 10.0000 V 500.000[mm] DV 0.0 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A3' NAME 'G13' S 0.0 V 2000.00[mm] DV -0.05000 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A3' NAME 'G13' S 10.0000 V 1500.00[mm] DV 0.0 TYPE POLY

3-200 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Example for polare reference affine scaling in both directions:

Figure 3.44: Polar Reference affine scaling in both directions

As in the previous cross section the geometry point is variable along the axis and the variable
POL4 is defined for the extension in longitudinal direction. Additionally, for the extension in
transverse direction the variable POLZ is defined. This is input for the z coordinate of the
polygon point P. The reference to the geometry point G1 is done with *G1 for the extension of
both directions.

As result the width z is changing to z’ according the distance ratio of the variable POLZ of the
first cross section to the last one 100/200 = 0.5 additionally to the length of the polygon edge y
to y’ as described for the previous cross section.

SECT 400 MNO 1 MRF 2 FSYM NO BTYP BEAM TITL "master 400"
TVAR 'G14' VAL 0[mm]
TVAR 'POL4' VAL 0[mm]
TVAR 'POLZ' VAL 0[mm]
POLY TYPE O MNO 1
VERT '0100' Y -500 Z 0 EXP 1
VERT '0101' Y 500 Z 0 EXP 1
VERT '0102' Y "=#POL4,250" Z "=#POLZ,1000" EXP 1 REFP '@0101' REFD '@*G1'
VERT '0103' Y "=#POL4,-250" Z "=-#POLZ,1000" EXP 1 REFP '@0100' REFD '@*G1'
SPT 'G1' Y 0 Z "=#G14,2000" MNO 0

! variables POL4, POLZ and G14 in SOFiMSHC

GAXV 'A4' NAME 'POL4' S 0.0 V 250.000[mm] DV 0.02500 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A4' NAME 'POL4' S 10.0000 V 500.000[mm] DV 0.0 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A4' NAME 'POLZ' S 0.0 V 100.000[mm] DV 0.02500 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A4' NAME 'POLZ' S 10.0000 V 200.000[mm] DV 0.0 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A4' NAME 'G14' S 0.0 V 2000.00[mm] DV -0.05000 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A4' NAME 'G14' S 10.0000 V 1500.00[mm] DV 0.0 TYPE POLY

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-201

AQUA | Input Description

Case 3: Constructional References

PT3
PTD

PT0 PT

Figure 3.45: Constructional references

If three points are given, then the third point may be provided with a prefix operator defining
the distance or elevation to be taken from that point and searching the corresponding point on
the line REF-RFD:

REF PT0 PTD >PT3 Distance (y)

REF PT0 PTD ˆ PT3 Elevation (z)
REF PT0 PTD PT3 Perpendicular point

If for the first two cases the third point is specified as the point itself, this will create points with
the same selected coordinate, which is needed for example for points with a fixed distance, but
a height depending on the cross inclination.

For a circle you may specify an additional point. The distance of this point to the centre will then
specify the radius of the circle. For steel shapes the angle of orientation is used in a similar
way.

REF .... REFR PTR

Example for a construction reference with distance (y) - cut with a vertical line:

Figure 3.46: Construction reference with distance (y)

The point PTD is defined as geometry point e.g. G1 outside the polygon and is referenced
with >G1. The value y of the polygon point P should be constant and is input with 250 mm.
However, it is also possible to define the coordinate y of the polygon point P variable along an
axis with TVAR.

3-202 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Since the geometry point G1 shifts upwards with a variable height as a result of the Carte-
sian reference the cross section becomes smaller in height, while the width of the lower edge
remains the same.

SECT MNO 1 MRF 2 FSYM NONE BTYP BEAM TITL "master 100 vertical"
TVAR 'G11' VAL 0[mm]
POLY TYPE O MNO 1
VERT '0100' Y "=250,250" Z 1000 EXP 1 REFP '@0103' REFD '@>G1'
VERT '0101' Y "=-250,-250" Z 1000 EXP 1 REFP '@0102' REFD '@>G1'
VERT '0102' Y -500 Z 0 EXP 1
VERT '0103' Y 500 Z 0 EXP 1
SPT 'G1' Y 0 Z "=#G11,2000" MNO 0

! Variable G11 in SOFiMSHC

GAXV 'A1' NAME 'G11' S 0.0 V 2000.00[mm] DV -0.05000 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A1' NAME 'G11' S 10.0000 V 1500.00[mm] DV 0.0 TYPE POLY

Example of a construction reference with elavation (z) - cut with horizontal line:

Figure 3.47: Construction reference with elavation (z)

The point PTD is defined as geometry point G1 outside the polygon and is referenced with
ˆ G1. The value z of the polygon point P should be constant and is input with 1000 mm.
However, it is also possible to define the coordinate z of the polygon point P variable along an
axis with TVAR.

Since the geometry point G1 shifts upwards with a variable height as a result of the Cartesian
reference the lower edge of the cross section becomes smaller, while the heigth of the cross
section remains the same.

SECT MNO 1 MRF 2 FSYM NONE BTYP BEAM TITL "master 200 horizontal"
TVAR 'G12' VAL 0[mm]
POLY TYPE O MNO 1
VERT '0100' Y 250 Z "=1000,1000" EXP 1 REFP '@0103' REFD '@^G1'
VERT '0101' Y -250 Z "=1000,1000" EXP 1 REFP '@0102' REFD '@^G1'
VERT '0102' Y -500 Z 0 EXP 1

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-203

AQUA | Input Description

VERT '0103' Y 500 Z 0 EXP 1

SPT 'G1' Y 0 Z "=#G12,2000" MNO 0

! Variable G12 in SOFiMSHC

GAXV 'A2' NAME 'G12' S 0.0 V 2000.00[mm] DV -0.05000 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A2' NAME 'G12' S 10.0000 V 1500.00[mm] DV 0.0 TYPE POLY

Example of a construction reference with perpendicular point:

Figure 3.48: Construction reference with perpendicular point

The point PTD is defined as geometry point G1 outside the polygon and is referenced with G1.
For the definition of the perpendicular, a third point - in this case the opposite polygon point -
has to be selected for REFS. In this example asymmetric cross sections should be generated
with the interpolation. Therefore only one polygon point is referenced.

Since the geometry point G1 shifts upwards with a variable height as a result of the Cartesian
reference the line PT0 - PTD changes. Furthermore, since the default is that the line PT3 - P
is the perpendicular to PT0 - PTD, the polygon point P shifts in the interpolated cross sections.

SECT MNO 1 MRF 2 FSYM NONE BTYP BEAM TITL "master 300 lot"
TVAR 'G13' VAL 0[mm]
POLY TYPE O MNO 1
VERT '0100' Y -250 Z 1000 EXP 1
VERT '0101' Y -500 Z 0 EXP 1
VERT '0102' Y 500 Z 0 EXP 1
VERT '0103' Y 250 Z 1000 EXP 1 REFP '@0102' REFD '@G1' REFS '0100'
SPT 'G1' Y 0 Z "=#G13,2000" MNO 0

! Variable G13 in SOFiMSHC

GAXV 'A3' NAME 'G13' S 0.0 V 2000.00[mm] DV -0.05000 TYPE POLY
GAXV 'A3' NAME 'G13' S 10.0000 V 1500.00[mm] DV 0.0 TYPE POLY

In addition of the examples explained here, more examples showing most of these features are
given with [Link] to [Link] in the example directory [Link].

3-204 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Hint
The offset definitions YM and ZM for SECT and POLY cannot be used as parameters.

3.34.2 FE-Sections
For advanced design tasks like a hot design it is not sufficient to describe the section just by
its outer contour. For such cases it is necessary to us a finite element mesh of the section.
These meshes may be generated by AQUA or may be imported from a secondary database.
The secondary database will contain in general also temperature distribution fields. It is also
possible to clone a section from the same database, which is especially useful for sections
with different reinforcement layouts based on the same thermal master analysis, performed
only once. The defintion of the name ”SECT:nnn” will use a FE-mesh of this section nnn
directly. In that case an import of reinforcements via RF is also possible.

The section will be converted to single integration points given by the center of all QUAD ele-
ments. These may be imported group wise with POLY to specify any construction sequences
or in total if no such definition is made.

As this feature allows the evaluation of all sectional values for any type of section (e.g. sec-
ondary torsion for a solid section) it is the most general type of section definition. All additional
elements (Stress points, reinforcements, shear cuts) are defined as usual.

With the definition of LTAU the unit warping and the shear stress distributions will be saved to
the original database. So it becomes possible to view those results with WING/WINGRAF.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-205

AQUA | Input Description

3.35 CS – Construction Stages

See also: SECT

CS

Item Description Unit Default

NO First active number in − *

construction sequence
TITL Title of construction stage LT32 -
ATIL Last active number in − -
construction sequence
LTEM Load case of a temperature field − -
T Time value of the temperature field sec last

With CS you may specify a cross section for (up to 31) construction stages. All elements
following this record will be added within that stage. The current construction stage will also
contain all the elements of the previous construction stages.

If part of the section is active only temporarily, a value for ATIL may be specified. This is then
the last construction stage where this part is active.

Hint
The omission of cross section elements with ATIL is not recommended because this work-
flow is continuously not supported by all programmes.

The CS-stage records have to be given in monotonic ascending sequence of NO, but for this
case multiple records with the same NO value may be given. However the designation should
be given with the first record of such a CS block.
10 20 21 22 24 30 40 ∞

Figure 3.49: Construction Process

The picture above defines a construction process. As phase 21 has no impact on the section
itself it does not need to be defined. The same holds for any other construction phase like
pre-stress stages. The input scheme is given by:

CS 10 ; black section parts, QGroup 1

CS 20 ATIL 22 ; red section parts, QGroup 2
CS 22 ATIL 24 ; blue section parts, QGroup 3
CS 24 ATIL 39 ; yellow section parts, QGroup 4
CS 30 ; green section parts, QGroup 5

3-206 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

This will generate 6 construction stages:

NO is the total section for the final phase 40, QGroup "‘C040"’
NO.1 is the 1st construction stage, phases 10-19, QGroup "‘C010"’
NO.2 is the 2nd construction stage, phases 20-21, QGroup "‘C020"’
NO.3 is the 3rd construction stage, phases 22-23, QGroup "‘C022"’
NO.4 is the 4th construction stage, phases 24-29, QGroup "‘C024"’
NO.5 is the 5th construction stage, phases 30-39, QGroup "‘C030"’

The definitions of ATIL for phases 20 and 22 will be extended automatically to the next defined
construction stage, only for phase 24 the end value has to be specified explicitly. The transition
to the final stage may be defined either by an explicit construction stage 40 or by the latest
removal of any other phase. There is no generation of intermediate values, a CS 20 ATIL 33
will not generate a construction stage at 34.

The specified QGroups are the primary and secondary groups assigned to the elements in the
secondary database of the section (CTRL STYP FEMX only)

The construction stages are assigned to the individual elements with the group definition of the
analysis program, a construction stage number defined there is inserted between the defined
numbers here. The number NO will be incremented by default. You may want to use larger
gaps to allow prestressing stages to be mixed in. With the construction stages defined in AQUA
as 10, 20 and 30 the selection of stage 25 would use the 20-section and all tendons up to stage
25.

For every construction stage it is also possible to specify with SV for every material a factor
for the elasticity and the shear modulus after the CS record. Further it is possible to specify a
construction phase as hot design phase, if the section is imported with a HYDRA analysis.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-207

AQUA | Input Description

3.36 SV – Additional Cross Section Properties

See also: SECT

SV

Item Description Unit Default

m4 1014
 
IT Torsional moment of inertia -1.0
m2 1012
 
AK Area of Bredt’s box *
YSC Coordinates of the shear center in the LT/ ∗ *
ZSC reference coordinate system LT/ ∗ *
m6 1016
 
CM Warping modulus *
m4 1014
 
CMS Warping shear modulus *
m2 1012
 
AY Shear deformation area y *
m2 1012
 
AZ Shear deformation area z *
AYZ Shear deformation area yz *
LEVY Minimum lever arm for VY [mm] 1011 -
LEVZ Minimum lever arm for VZ [mm] 1011 -

MNO Material number for the following option − *

DEFF effective thickness of sectional part [mm] 1011 2A/U
FACE Factor E-modulus for construction stage − 1.0
FACG Factor G-modulus for construction stage − FACE
AG Additional weight [kN/ m] 1191 0.0

NPLT Plastic tensile axial resistance [kN] 1101 *

NPLC Plastic compressive axial resistance [kN] 1101 *
VYPL Plastic shear y-y resistance [kN] 1102 *
VZPL Plastic shear z-z resistance [kN] 1102 *
MTPL Plastic primary torsional resistance [kNm] 1103 *
MYPL Plastic bending y-y resistance [kNm] 1104 *
MZPL Plastic bending z-z resistance [kNm] 1104 *
kNm2 1105
 
MBPL Plastic bimoment resistance *
MT2P Plastic secondary torsional resistance [kNm] 1103 *

In general, these cross section properties will be computed automatically. You only have to
specify explicit deviations.

AK defines the area of the equivalent hollow cross section according to Bredt. This value
is used for determining the longitudinal reinforcement and the link reinforcement due to tor-
sion. However, in general AK should be defined implicitly by specifying the torsion resisting
reinforcements.

3-208 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

An absolute value (0. or positive) can be input for IT. If a scalar value is input, the moment of
inertia computed by the program is multiplied by a factor. The value 0.5[−] or 50[%] results
in a cross section with 50 percent of the torsional moment of inertia.

YSC and ZSC can define a mandatory centre of rotation or, in case of only one value, a
restraining plane. The literal ’C’ can be used in both cases to set this ordinate to the value of
the center of the elastic centre.

If shear deformations are not to be taken into account, despite a detailed shear stress evalu-
ation, AY, AZ , AYZ and CMS should be set to ”0.” . The value 0.5[−] or 50[%] results in a
cross section with 50 percent of the calculated shear area.

For shear force dimensioning in state II, minimum lever arms can be specified with LEVY and
LEVZ, in order to obtain more economical results (e.g. 0.90d) or cover extreme cases (e.g.
moment=0). Values are definable as absolute values or as factors to the height or width of the
section.

For the analysis of creep and shrinkage effects an effective depth deƒ ƒ is required. This value
is defined by the area of the section A and the length of the periphery U which has air contact
by the formula 2A/U. The air contact ratio may be defined for the vertices of a polygon and for
circles. If not otherwise stated, outer peripheries will have a ratio of 1.0 and inner peripheries
of 0.0. However you may specify the value for every material within a section via record SV
explicitly.

For construction stages it is possible to define with SV MNO two factors for the elasticity and
the shear modulus. They will be mainly used for the evaluation of the sectional values. A
consistent treating in AQB for all effects is still under investigation.

In many practical cases it is recommended that the user defines his own plastic forces and
moments or limits the ones computed by AQUA if special considerations are to be taken into
account. The latter could easily be achieved either by a direct input of the plastic value that
shall directly overwrite the one computed by AQUA, or by defining a fractional part by means of
[ -] resp. [ %] in the frame of the CadInp language, thus scaling the default one. For example,
setting MBPL to 0.8[ -] would result in AQUA using 80% of the originally computed plastic
bimoment. The default for each entry is 1.0[ -] or 100%, i.e. unless explicitly defined by the
user, AQUA would not change the value of a plastic force or a moment.

It is worth noting that only characteristic plastic forces and moments could be defined or altered
in such a way. If so, AQUA will produce a corresponding design value by dividing the input value
by the material safety factor.

If a composite section is present or a section whose material reveals anisotropic behavior

(different yield strengths in tension and compression), the meaning of NPLC and NPLT might
become of importance. In this case, AQUA would use the value of NPLT for the plastic axial
capacity in tension and NPLC for the fully compressed plastic section. For none-composite,
homogenous sections, only the input of NPLC is required and applicable to the entire section.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-209

AQUA | Input Description

3.37 POLY – Polygonal Cross-Section Element / Blockout

See also: SECT, CIRC, VERT, CUT, SPT

POLY

Item Description Unit Default

TYPE Type of polygon LT O

O Polygon via VERT definition
OPY same symmetric w.r.t y-axis
OPZ same symmetric w.r.t z-axis
RECT centric rectangle
with width/height DY/DZ
REC+ positive rectangle
(eccentric position below)
REC- negative rectangle
(eccentric position above)
GRP Group of a FE-Mesh selected with SECT
FEM
MNO Material number (0 = hole) − (SECT)
or the group to be imported for GRP

YM coordinate offset for the polygon [mm] 1011 0

ZM coordinate offset for the polygon [mm] 1011 0
DY Size of the rectangle [mm] 1011 !
DZ Size of the rectangle [mm] 1011 !
SMAX Maximum edge length of polygon [mm] 1011 -
EXP Literal of exposure class for that edge Lt4 -

Unless a REC*-type has been selected, the record POLY must be followed by the input of the
polygon vertices with VERT . The sequence of the polygon (clockwise or counter-clockwise)
has no effect. The polygon will be closed by the program automatically. In case of symmetry,
the polygon is extended by mirroring before being closed.

The use of variables and formulas for interpolation of the cross-section is only possible for
polygons with geometry definitions in record VERT. Variables and formulas are not evaluated,
if symmetry or dimensions of the rectangles DY,DZ are specified.

A hole is automatically created when polygons or circles overlap, a true hole is thus defined by
a polygon or circle with material number 0. The definition of a special inner polygon with the
same material number or the formerly common method of combining several polygons (outer
perimeter and inner perimeters) into one single polygon by making two passes along the same
edge should be avoided.

The input of YM and ZM causes a corresponding shift of the given polygon. The coordinates
of VERT or DVER refer then to the shifted (by YM, ZM) coordinate system. The symmetry data
also refers to the shifted coordinate system. Thu, similar openings can be generated easily.

3-210 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

A rectangle can easily be defined by means of a special type. These define a rectangle with
sides DY and DZ, with its centre or upper or lower midside point at the coordinates YM,ZM.

AQB prints stresses only in the defined polygon or stress points. Thus a coarse sub division
of longer edges might be useful. This can be done with a value SMAX or as an alternate way
with the value PHI at VERT. However in this case it is recommended for symmetrical polygons
to define additional vertices on the symmetry axis to allow a subdivision of the closing edges.
For the REC*-types SMAX is preset to DZ/4.

The exposition class EXP allows the definition of special material parameters (MEXT) to indi-
vidual poygon edges. The value specified here becomes the default for that polygon.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-211

AQUA | Input Description

3.38 VERT – Polygon Vertices in Absolute Coordinates

See also: SECT, POLY, Parametric-Sections

VERT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Designation of the polygon vertex Lt4 *

Y Coordinates of the polygon vertex [mm] 1011 0
Z relative to YM, ZM [mm] 1011 0
R Radius of a circular arc or first radius an ellipse [mm] 1011 -
R2 Second radius of an ellipse [mm] 1011 -
TYPE Type of vertex LT O
O Outer perimeter
TP Intersection of tangents
EXP Literal of extra material constant record MEXT or Lt4/ − *
degree of air contact (0.0 to 1.0) from that point

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFP Reference point Lt8 *
REFD Reference direction point Lt8 *
REFS Reference initial coordinates Lt8 *

NO is used for identification during any output of stresses. If nothing is input, AQUA generates
internal numbers in sequence.

The distances between adjacent polygon vertices must be at least 0.0001 m. The polygon is
defined by the sequence of the vertices, not by their numbers. The number of points is limited
to 255 per polygon.

If a radius is specified, there are two possibilities:

• use of a tangent intersection point with radius or two radii

• only input of a radius or two radii

Tangent Intersection Point with Radius or two Radii

For tangential points defined with TYPE TP a fillet is created at that vertex with the given radius
R. If the second radius R2 is specified, the fillet is elliptical. Without the radius R2 it is a circle.

If the radius R is defined negative, an isosceles chamfer is created instead with the value of R
used as a distance along the edges (see picture below). If R2 is also defined negative, then an
unequal chamfer is generated.

In the variant with two radii for the definition of an ellipse, the radii have to be specified accord-
ing to the direction of rotation of the polygon. In this case, the radius R is the radius before the
polygon point and the radius R2 is the radius after the polygon point.

3-212 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Only this input option of a fillet is possible for a cross section interpolation with references along
an axis.

Figure 3.50: Sign of one radius with TYPE TP

Figure 3.51: Sign of two radii with TYPE TP

Only Input of a Radius

Without thew input TYPE TP a tangential intersection point (with a ’T’ at beginning of the name)
is inserted between this (’E’) and the previously defined vertex (’A’) (see picture below). With
an angle > 120 degree two tangential points (’R’ and ’T’) and an additional midpoint (’S’) are
inserted. An additional start point (’Q’) of rounding is inserted if the radius is less than the
half distance between the original polygon points. The inserted points get the reference of the
original polygon points. For this a new geometry point ’G’ with the original reference is inserted.
Then all new points are referenced to this geometry point.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-213

AQUA | Input Description

Figure 3.52: Adaption Radius to tangent point

If radius R is positive, the area of the polygon will be increased.

In both cases the radius of the inserted points will be adjusted to achieve exactly the same
area as the circular arc respective as the elliptical arc.

3-214 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Figure 3.53: left = without compensation, right = with compensation

red = missing area, blue = compensation area

Thus, a full circle section should be defined via CIRC or an explicit loop with trigonometric
functions.

Non effective areas can be defined by means of NEFF-areas, where parts of the polygons
within those areas become non effective for selected forces by the internal introduction of
deductional polygons.

The sectional values of the total sections are only used for the calculation of the area as well
as the torsional stress and the integral equation solution. All geometrical moments of inertia
are computed based on the effective parts only (refer to the AQB manual). It is to be noted that
the effective width is actually dependent on the load case and the on the purpose of design.

The input definition EXP allows the definition of special material parameters (e.g. air contact,
temperature of environment, cover of reinforcement, ... see MEXT) to individual poygon edges.
The input definition EXP is set at the first point of the [Link] can find further explanations
and examples in our Online Help -> Tutorials

[Link]
cross-sections-general/cross-section-air-mext/cross-section_air-[Link]

Instead of a literal at EXP, only the degree of air contact can be set. For the degree of air
contact of the whole edge the geometric mean value is used. I.e. if one of the two vertices of
an edge has the degree 0.0, the total edge will have this value. The values ’0.0’ and ’1.0’ are
defaults for concrete materials which are redefined in AQUA. Inner edges and holes are get
the value ’0.0’, outer edges are get the value ’1.0’.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-215

AQUA | Input Description

3.39 CIRC – Circular Cross Section Elements

See also: SECT, POLY, Parametric-Sections

CIRC

Item Description Unit Default

NO Designation of the circular element Lt4 *

Y Coordinates of the centre point in the [mm] 1011 0
Z reference coordinate system [mm] 1011 0
R Radius of the circle [mm] 1011 -
MNO Material number (composite sections) − (SECT)
0 hole
EXP Literal of exposure class / Lt4 -
Degree of air contact (0.0 to 1.0)

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFP Reference point for center Lt8 -
REFD Reference direction point Lt8 -
REFS Reference initial coordinates Lt8 -
REFR Reference radius point Lt8 -

R
y, z

+ϕ

Figure 3.54: Circular Cross Section

Internal sequential numbering takes place when nothing is input for NO. NO can be selected
arbitrarily. When CIRC is overlapping another material, a whole of that material is automatically
calculated.

3-216 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.40 CUT – Shear Cuts and Partial Sections

See also: SECT, POLY, CIRC, Parametric-Sections

CUT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Designation of shear cut or partial section Lt3 !

YB Ordinates of the cut segment [mm] 1011 *
ZB [mm] 1011 *
YE [mm] 1011 *
ZE [mm] 1011 *

NS Normal forces perpendicular to shear cut [kN/ m] 1111 0.

MS Moment perpendicular to shear cut [kNm/ m] 1112 0.
1/ m3 1018
 
WTM Torsional resistance for the centre *
1/ m3 1018
 
WTD Additional resistance for the edges *

MNO Material number of the shear cut − (SECT)

MRF Material no of shear reinforcement − (SV)
LAY Shear reinforcement layer − 1
ASUP Minimum shear reinforcement ∗ *

OUT Output options (not used any more) LT MAE

TYPE Type of cut (see remarks) LT *

VYFK Partial factor for shear force VY − *

VZFK Partial factor for shear force VZ − *

INCL Inclination of links w.r.t. bar axis cot|deg 90

BMAX Width of the equivalent hollow section ∗/ LT *
explicit value
EC Definition e.g. for EN 1992-1-1, 6.3.2
DIN Definition for DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA, 6.3.2
and DIN FB 102:2009, [Link] and DIN
1045-1:2008, 10.4.2
LEON Definition e.g. for OEN EN 1992-1-1, 9.3.1
OEN B 4700, 3.4.6
SIA Definition e.g. for SIA 262, [Link]
explanations below
BRED Deductible width due to hollow pipes etc. [mm] 1011 0.
CINT Roughness coefficient of interface − *
MUE Friction coefficient of interface − *
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-217

AQUA | Input Description

Item Description Unit Default

SXE ”crack spacing parameter” für AASHTO ∗ 0

TANA Minimum inclination of truss diagonal − -

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFA Reference point for start point Lt8 -
RFDA Reference direction point for start point Lt8 -
RFSA Reference initial coordinates for start point Lt8 -
REFE Reference point for end point Lt8 -
RFDE Reference direction point for end point Lt8 -
RFSE Reference initial coordinates for end point Lt8 -

With a CUT one specifies a part of the section to be used for shear design and/or the minimum
reinforcement or crack width of a partial section. The input of shear shear cuts is necessary
for the checking of shear stresses in concrete cross sections. Without input for CUT, up to two
axis parallel shear cuts are defined through the elastic centre (see CTRL STYP). As these do
not necessarily pass through the smallest width of the tensile zone, a warning is issued when
the user enters complicated polygons without shear cuts. It is the responsibility of the user to
define enough shear cuts to account for all unfavourable locations within a section.

The TYPE of the cut defines some important properties for the design. The following values
are available:

• ACT Only for the crack width design, cuts off the cracked part
• WEB Web of a cross section
WRED Web with reduced allowed strength
• FLAN Flange of a cross section
FFUL Flange with enhanced strength allowance
• INTE Construction interface
INDE indented shear interface
ROUG rough shear interface
EVEN even shear interface
SMOO smooth (very even) shear interface
The coefficients CINT and MUE are defined in EN 1992 or DIN 1045-1 (2008). For design
according to the old DIN 1045-1 (ch.10.3.6) the value CINT has to be specified with the
value of βct > 1.
• SLAB For special cases (e.g. hollow plates) it is possible to design a cut of any section
like a plate.

In general the definition of WRED / FLAN is expected to describe structured sections, while
WEB / FFUL is defining a compact section. There are some design tasks requiring the knowl-
edge of the minimum web thickness, which is found by scanning the shear cuts of type WEB.

For DIN 1045 (1978) this info is used to allow the shear region 3. However in this case, the

3-218 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

requested minimum height of 30 cm may override a definition here.

For DIN EN1992-1 this info is used to distinguish for the superposition of shear. WEB and
FFUL use a quadratic superposition for open and compact sections as specified in the national
annexe. WRED and FLAN use a linear superposition for closed sections according to original
equation 6.29.

AASHTO 2005 distinguishes for the shear design (5.8.3.) between two alternates depending on
the presence of sufficient minimum shear reinforcement. If less minimum reinforcement should
be provided, a ”crack spacing parameter” has to be specified depending on the maximum
aggregate size ag [ mm] and a maximum distance between longitudinal crack reinforcements
s :
35
se = s < 2000mm (3.147)
g + 16

The definition of the sign of the shear cut, its internal forces and torsional resistances can be
seen in the following figure. The sign of INCL applies to a rotation from the bar axis towards
the normal direction n.

T M
s z
E E A
n
N
A
M

Sign convention Thin wall equivalent

cross section

Figure 3.55: Sign Definitions for Shear Cut

A cut can be defined parallel to the axis by the input of YB or ZB only. In such cases the literal
S can be used for describing the location of the elastic centre.

However, the cut can also be defined by the input of multiple segments each with same identi-
fier NO and two points (YB,ZB) and (YE,ZE). Then every segment may treat a different material
and shear link properties. Intermediate segments not cutting any part of the section are not to
be defined.

In this case some additional rules should be followed:

• A shear cut should always separate a complete part of the section.

• The separated part is on the left of the cut segment for CTRL FACE POS , where left is
taken relative to the direction A-E.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-219

AQUA | Input Description

• The separated part is on the right of the cut segment for CTRL FACE NEG, where right is
taken again relative to the direction A-E.
• It is recommended to separate the simpler part of a section. Holes in the separated parts
as well as any additional other parts should be avoided. They may be properly detected
only if defined in the correct sequence.
• If there is biaxial bending there are two options, see further below!

Figures 3.56, 3.57 and 3.58 show sensible and adequate definitions of shear cuts when there
is predominantly uniaxial bending (load from My + Vz ). In these cases CUT ... VYFK 0 could
also be defined explicitly in shear section definition in order to avoid numerical problems (due
to little biaxial bending).

FACE POS FACE NEG

y y
S S
z z

y y
S S
z z

Figure 3.56: Shear cuts for the web

FACE POS FACE NEG

y y
S S
z z

y y
S S
z z

Figure 3.57: Shear cuts for the outer flange

3-220 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FACE POS FACE NEG

y y
S S
z z

Figure 3.58: Shear cuts for the inner flange

If there is biaxial bending (My + Vz and Mz + Vy ), there are two options.

1. By manually defining one of the two factors VYFK 0 or VZFK 0 a shear cut is clearly
defined for only one load direction:

• CUT. . . VYFK 0 → shear cut only transfers shear forces from Vz

• CUT. . . VZFK 0 → shear cut only transfers shear forces from Vy

Like that numerical problems, which would arise from an area moment of inertia of almost
0 (see next point 2!) are prevented in a simple way. This simplification can be used
therefore with a shear cut definition according to Figure 3.56 (shear cuts in the web) and
3.58 (shear cuts in the central flange) with CUT. . . VYFK 0.

2. The shear cuts have to be defined more elaborately because the user must assure that
the area moment of inertia never becomes "0" (for this neither the lever arm in y-direction
nor in z-direction must become "0"). This is the case when separated parts are always
entirely within one quadrant, which are defined by the main axes.

FACE POS
y
z
S
CUT NO 2 CUT NO 1
>0

>0

S2 S1
CUT NO 2

CUT NO 1

>0 >0

Figure 3.59: Here the distances between the elastic centers of the separated areas perpendicular
to the main axes are always > 0 (lever arms to determine the area moments of inertia).

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-221

AQUA | Input Description

Figures 3.60 and 3.61 show sensible definitions of shear cuts for biaxial bending. The blue and
red shear cuts always consist of two partial cuts with the same number / same name. However,
the layer numbers are defined in such a way that they are the same in all partial shear cuts in
the bottom flange or in the left or right web. In addition, TYPE (here WRED or FLAN) can be
defined explicitly for each partial cut.

FACE POS FACE NEG

y y

z z
CUT NO 2 CUT NO 1 CUT NO 1 CUT NO 2
S S
LAY 3 LAY 1 LAY 1 LAY 3
CUT NO 2 LAY 2

CUT NO 1 LAY 2

CUT NO 1 LAY 2

CUT NO 2 LAY 2
y y

z z
S S
CUT NO 4 CUT NO 3 CUT NO 3 CUT NO 4
LAY 3 LAY 1 LAY 1 LAY 3
CUT NO 4 LAY 2

CUT NO 3 LAY 2

CUT NO 3 LAY 2

CUT NO 4 LAY 2

Figure 3.60: Shear cuts for webs

In Figure 3.60 the question about necessary stirrup reinforcement in the two webs is primarily
interesting. The vertical partial cuts through the bottom flange directly next to the main vertical
axis are only required to keep each separated part within a quadrant (the results/shear flows
in these partial cuts would only be decisive if a load Mz + Vy would predominate). The two red
partial cuts are defined with CUT NO 1. . . LAY 1 (in right web, 1st partial cut) and CUT NO
1. . . LAY 2 (in bottom flange, 2nd partial cut). The two blue partial cuts are defined with CUT
NO 2. . . LAY 2 (in bottom flange, 1st partial cut) and CUT NO 2. . . LAY 3 (in left web, 2nd
partial cut). Since the relevant point for the maximum shear reinforcement is not clear (since
it depends on the load), two shear cuts through each web are examined here as an example.
Similarly for an examination of the web above the main axes further seperated parts might
have to be defined, which would have to lie in the upper quadrants.

3-222 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

FACE POS FACE NEG

y y

z z
S S
CUT NO 6 LAY 2

CUT NO 6 LAY 2

CUT NO 5 LAY 2

CUT NO 5 LAY 2

CUT NO 5 LAY 2

CUT NO 5 LAY 2
CUT NO 6 LAY 2

CUT NO 6 LAY 2
Abbildung 3.54
Figure 3.61: Shear cuts in bottom flange

For shear sections 5 and 6 in Figure 3.61 the question about required reinforcement between
web and bottom flange is interesting. And here as well each separated part always remain
within a quadrant.

Hint
The possibilities shown here for the inner flange can treat a transverse shear Vy only with
the complete methods (CTRL STYP FEM as default or BEM 3).

Additionally for each edge, not only special torsional resistances can be defined for each edge,
but a proportional factor for the shear force as well. This makes it possible to describe outer
dowel joints, reduced web widths, and cuts in multiply connected sections. These factors
specify the portion of the total shear force V·S/I applied to the partial cut. The integral equation
algorithm (CTRL STYP FEM or BEM 3) will establish these factors based on the integrals of
the shear stress along the cuts automatically. For a manual definition the sign is very important
and it has to be assured that the sum of the factors is 1.0. If the center of the separated part
has the same ordinates that the center of the section, no shear can be calculated any more
based on the force method.

BMAX defines whether an equivalent hollow cross section should be used (e.g. for reinforced
concrete cross sections). If the half cut width is greater than BMAX, the found cuts are auto-
matically subdivided into two partial cuts, each of them processing the external width of the
equivalent hollow cross section. For cuts of type WEB or WRED, the automatic division into
two partial cuts is done even if no BMAX has been specified and:

• it is a simple cut with one input part on a simple cross section without any holes
• or the shear flow at both ends of the cut has an opposite direction.

The width of the equivalent hollow section is then set to half the web width.

The default of the width BMAX is derived from the defined data (material type, peripheral
reinforcements, Bredt-Area etc.) and some literals can be specified too:

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-223

AQUA | Input Description

EC The width is taken as the double value of the reinforcement cover, but not shorter
than A/U or the effective wall thickness for hollow sections in accordance with EN
1992-1-1 6.3.2 (1).
DIN The width is taken as the double value of the reinforcement cover, but not larger than
the effective wall thickness for hollow sections in accordance with DIN EN 1992-1-
1/NA 6.3.2, DIN FB 102.
LEON The width is taken with a sixth of the diameter of an inscribed circle in accor-
dance with F. Leonhadt und E. Mönning: Vorlesungen über Massivbau, Erster Teil:
Grundlagen zur Bemessung im Stahlbetonbau, Kapitel 9.3.3, Seite 233-235, but not
shorter than the double value of the reinforcement cover or not larger than the ef-
fective wall thickness for hollow sections in accordance with OEN EN 1992-1-1/NA.
SIA The width is taken to at least an eighth of the diameter of an inscribed circle in
accordance with SIA 262.

The position of the actually inserted torsion reinforcement is checked in this order:

• First AQUA try to determines the distance of the polygon describing the Bredt’s equivalent
cross section to the outer edge of the material.
• If this Ak polygon does not exist, the lines LRF and circles CRF of the torsionally active
longitudinal reinforcement are checked.
• If a perimeter reinforcement CURF is present, the defined value for the cover is taken into
account.

If no torsionally active longitudinal reinforcement is present, BMAX has to be defined explicitly,

if the specification = 2·(c+D/2) is to be fulfilled according to the design code.

If the value BMAX is not specified explicitly, the program tries to determine for unstructured
shear cuts the effective width iteratively according to the specifications of the design code
using the selected literals EC, DIN or SIA.

Since the engineer is free to choose the thickness BMAX according to EN 1992-1-1 or the
National Annex DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA, provided that the reinforcement is inserted only in the
centre, the upper limit A/U or alternatively d/6 should be observed in any case. Analog a
lower limit of 0.4·A/U is reasonable. An average value such as min(d ; 0.75·A/U) seems ideal,
since the choice of the equivalent hollow section with presumed reinforcement arrangements
involves numerous uncertainties.

BMAX will not be preset for steel or timber sections and multiple cuts from several CUT records.
An increase in this value results in a smaller equivalent hollow cross section, thus leading to
greater shear reinforcement but smaller shear stress.

But the width can be defined directly if needed, which might be necessary for very thin open
sections.

Design of the shear reinforcement only takes place for cuts when a genuine or an equivalent
hollow cross section has been defined.

The elastic stress will be calculated completely with the selected analysis method via CTRL
STYP. For the design of concrete the resulting shear flux will be obtained by the integral of the
stresses.

3-224 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

For the torsion the user may prescribe an explicit value with a definition of WTM explicitly. For
the force method or CTRL STYP BEM 1, this value will be preselected via Bredt’s area as
1/(2·AK·tef). Flanges which should not be designed for torsion have to be defined with WTM
0.0.

The maximum stress in a shear cut is only informative in most cases. However, if requested, it
may be prescribed explicitly with WTD.

The effective width for the shear force can be reduced by BRED. This is appropriate, for exam-
ple, when ungrouted ducts weaken the web and the width must be reduced accordingly.

The forces N and M perpendicular to the cut are only used to describe the stress. There will
be no design for bending and normal force with the links as longitudinal reinforcement. Thus a
tensile force may lower the required link area while the total steel area becomes higher.

Attention!
In cracked state the reinforcement is used in the shear checks only when it is situated inside the
separated polygon. In particular, a partial area without reinforcement leads to a shear stress
0.0 if it is in the tensile zone! Therefore we use a minimum shear stress which is taken from
the uncracked state and a reduction factor based on the lever arms.

The individual segments of one cut are treated separately during the design. The extreme
values of reinforcement of every shear cut, which are stored separately for each rank of links,
are always per physical section, the following rules apply:

• If a cut intersects multiple webs of an articulated section, the obtained reinforcement has
to be placed in every web, The total shear link area is n times the printed value for n webs.
• If a cut in a compact section intersects the equivalent hollow section twice, the reinforce-
ment is the double of the most unfavorable segment. This assures, that the total reinforce-
ment is computed by superposition of the shear and torsion components as required by
some design codes.
• Cuts having the same link rank enter the maximum value to the resulting reinforcement.
This value has to be place then in every segment. A typical case are multiple cuts for the
same web referencing the same shear link.
• Cuts having different link ranks enter the results separately for each rank with the corre-
sponding maximum. Different link ranks should thus always be used when different rein-
forcement is to be placed in the individual parts of the cut, e.g. for multiple webs of a hollow
section.

The minimum reinforcements ASUP may be specified in cm2 / m 1021 which is referred to the
 

length or with or in cm2 / m2 1022 or as ratio in [-] which is referred to the length and the width
 

of the cut as specified in most design codes. If not defined, the default according to the design
code will be selected. If ASUP is defined as zero, it will be tried not to use any shear links (slabs
and beams of minor importance). A special minimum reinforcement enlarged by a factor of 1.6
according the Nachrechnungsrichtline resp. DIN_EN 1992-1-1 9.5b or DIN 1045-1 13.2.3 (5)
as ”articulated sections with pretensioned tensile flanges” requires the definition of Literal
’PFLA’ for ASUP. As some design tasks require to distinguish between the minimum and the
provided reinforcements, the definition should specify only the minimum reinforcements.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-225

AQUA | Input Description

Shear in composite cross sections

Special attention should be paid when making shear cuts through composite cross sections.
First, it holds generally that a shear cut should cut through parts with the same material number.
In case a segment cuts through several materials, one should input several cuts with the same
number but different material numbers. On the other side it has to be checked thoroughly, that
all areas not cut directly are associated to the correct side of the cut.

3-226 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.41 PANE – Thin-Walled Cross Section Element

See also: SECT, SPT, Parametric-Sections, Reinforcement

PANE

Item Description Unit Default

NO Designation of the panel element Lt4 *

YB Coordinates of start point [mm] 1011 (YE)
ZB * Default: YE,ZE of the last element [mm] 1011 (YA)
YE Coordinates of the end point [mm] 1011 YB
ZE [mm] 1011 ZB
T Panel thickness [mm] 1011 -
MNO Material number (composite sections) − (SECT)

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFA Reference point for start point Lt8 -
RFDA Reference direction point for start point Lt8 -
RFSA Reference initial coordinates for start point Lt8 -
REFE Reference point for end point Lt8 -
RFDE Reference direction point for end point Lt8 -
RFSE Reference initial coordinates for end point Lt8 -

R Radius mm -
PHI Maximum sector angle degree 15

FIXB Location of clamped edge from start ∗ *

FIXE Location of clamped edge from end ∗ *
TYPE Special Options LT -
NEFF not effective ’NYZ’ (see NEFF), reinforce-
ment keeps effective
NCHK no stress check to be applied
NNCH both options

Basic reinforcement positive in cm2 /m cm2 / m 1021

 
AS -
negative in cm2 cm2 1020
 
-
cm2 / m 1021
 
ASMA Maximum reinforcement -
LAY LT 0
MRF Material number of reinforcement − (SECT)
TORS Torsional action (see Reinforcement) LT ACTI
PASS / ACTI / ADDI
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-227

AQUA | Input Description

Item Description Unit Default

DAS Diameter for crack width [mm] 1023 -

A Distance between the bars [mm] 1011 1[ m]

y , z

ye , ze

Figure 3.62: Thin-walled cross section element

Uniform normal and shear stresses are generally assumed across the thickness of thin-walled
elements. Therefore the moment of inertia about the longitudinal axis (B-E) is zero. The shear
stresses due to torsion, however, are distributed linearly across the thickness. The thickness
is considered likewise for the maximum stress. A mixture of the cross section elements POLY
or CIRC inside a cross section is not permitted.

The transmission of shear is only possible at interconnected elements. The program does not
recognise any penetrations of thin- walled elements. In the determination of shear stresses,
elements are considered to be connected with each other when their coordinates are no further
than 0.5 mm (or snap defined by CTRL SDIV VAL2) apart.

If NO is not specified, then an internal sequential numbering will take place.

If a radius is specified, additional straight elements are generated in order to simulate a circular
arc (180◦ maximum). The aperture angle is defined as less than PHI per segment (Default de-
fined by CTRL HMIN/HTOL). The orientation of the arc is defined by the sign of PHI respective
R. Positive values describe an arc rotating about the positive x-axis.

For a buckling design it is necessary to define the boundary conditions (free, built-in) and to
combine several plates to an integral field. To allow this we have the convention that plates will
be combined if:

- they are connected and do not have a bend

- do not deviate of value ’thickness * shear stiffness’ more than a factor of 1.25 (may be
changed with CTRL FIXL). This also applies to the thickness of the shear connections
(WELD).

3-228 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

- is not interrupted by a special option TYPE NCHK or NNCH

- is not interrupted by a non effective area (NEFF or TYPE NEFF) with a length bigger
than the thickness. Shorter thin-walled elements are interpretated as screw holes.
- do not have stiffeners or shear connections (WELD) at the end points. As stiffener we
declare all plates intersecting with an angle greater than 45 degrees. The length of
the plate has no influence. A stiffener will move the location of the built-in face by the
projection of its thickness to the inner of the plate.

The user may define the built-in face with an explicit value measured from the beginning (FIXB)
or the end (FIXE) respectively, which may be defined by the following rules:

FREE the literal FREE defines a free end

SUPP the literal SUPP defines a supported end
>0 positive values define a support towards the interior of the plate
<0 negative values define a support outside of the plate. This feature is necessary to
describe fields subdivided in individual plates.
OFF the literal OFF or very large values (larger than the length) will deactivate the check.

If the thin-walled elements are cut by non-effective areas "NEFF NYZ" the resulting edges are
assumed to be free ends.
A c/t calculation via "NEFF SIG" does not change the location of the clamped edges.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-229

AQUA | Input Description

3.42 PLAT – Thin-Walled Cross Section Element

See also: SECT, WELD, PROF, SPT, Parametric-Sections

PLAT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of the plate element Lt4 *

YB Coordinates of the start point A in the [mm] 1011 *
ZB reference coordinate system [mm] 1011 *
* Default: YE,ZE of the last element
YE Coordinates of the end point E in the [mm] 1011 YB
ZE reference coordinate system [mm] 1011 ZB
T Plate thickness [mm] 1011 -
MNO Material number (composite sections) − (SECT)

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFA Reference point for start point Lt8 -
RFDA Reference direction point for start point Lt8 -
RFSA Reference initial coordinates for start point Lt8 -
REFE Reference point for end point Lt8 -
RFDE Reference direction point for end point Lt8 -
RFSE Reference initial coordinates for end point Lt8 -

R Radius [mm] 1011 -

PHI Maximum sector angle degree 15

FIXB Location of clamped edge from start [mm] 1011 *

FIXE Location of clamped edge from end [mm] 1011 *
TYPE Special Options LT -
NEFF not effective ’NYZ’ (see NEFF), reinforce-
ment keeps effective
NCHK no stress check to be applied
NNCH both options

Uniform normal and shear stresses are generally assumed across the thickness of thin-walled
elements. Therefore the moment of inertia about the longitudinal axis (A-E) is zero. The shear
stresses due to torsion, however, are distributed linearly across the thickness. The thickness
is considered likewise for the maximum stress. A mixture with section elements POLY or CIRC
is not permitted. A mixture with section elements PROF or WELD is permited, but PROF must
be defined as thin-walled.

The transmission of shear is only possible at interconnected elements. The program does not

3-230 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

recognize any penetrations of thin- walled elements. In the determination of shear stresses,
elements are considered to be connected with each other when their coordinates are no further
than 0.5 mm (or snap defined by CTRL SDIV VAL2) apart.

If NO is not specified, then an internal sequential numbering takes place.

In the case of a variable plate thickness a variable TVAR can be defined for T in order to use it
for the interpolation with a master cross section.

If a radius is specified, additional straight elements are generated in order to simulate a circular
arc (180◦ maximum). The aperture angle is defined as less than PHI per segment (Default de-
fined by CTRL HMIN/HTOL). The orientation of the arc is defined by the sign of PHI respective
R. Positive values describe an arc rotating about the positive x-axis.

yb , zb

ye , ze

Figure 3.63: Thin-walled cross section element

For a buckling design (c/t, section class 4) it is necessary to know the effective length c. This
value is defined for every plate by the location of the supports (FIXB, FIXE), which may be
defined by the following rules:

FREE the literal FREE defines a free end

SUPP the literal SUPP defines a supported end
>0 positive values define a support towards the interior of the plate
<0 negative values define a support outside of the plate. This feature is necessary to
describe fields subdivided in individual plates.
OFF the literal OFF or very large values (larger than the length) will deactivate the check.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-231

AQUA | Input Description

1001
1021

1022
1013
SC 1012 1011
1002

20
20
40 SC 420 40
20 20

Figure 3.64: Support definitions for a subdivided field

PLAT "1011" -250 0 -210 0 T 10 FIXA +0 FIXE -460

PLAT "1012" -210 0 +210 0 T 10 FIXA -40 FIXE -40
PLAT "1013" +210 0 +250 0 T 10 FIXA -460 FIXE +0

If the user does not specify distances explicitly, it will be tried to guess the support condition
and to combine consecutive plates to a single field if the following conditions hold:

- they are connected and do not have a bend

- do not deviate of value ’thickness * shear stiffness’ more than a factor of 1.25 (may be
changed with CTRL FIXL). This also applies to the thickness of the shear connections
(WELD).
- is not interrupted by a special option TYPE NCHK or NNCH
- is not interrupted by a non effective area (NEFF or TYPE NEFF) with a length bigger
than the thickness. Shorter thin-walled elements are interpretated as screw holes.
- do not have stiffeners or welds (WELD) at the end points. As stiffener we declare all
plates intersecting with an angle greater than 45 degrees. The length of the plate has
no influence. A stiffener will move the location of the built-in face via the projection of
its half thickness plus the half minimum thickness of both connected elements (for the
weld seam fillet) to the inner of the plate.

For the automatic determination of the locations of the clamped edge of panel sequences the
panels be aligned the same, if necessary. With different input of the start end end points thus
individual panels are changed in the direction.

3-232 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.43 WELD – Shear Connection

See also: SECT, PANE, PLAT, PROF

WELD

Item Description Unit Default

NO Designation of the element Lt4 *

YB Coordinates of the beginning point in the [mm] 1011 *
ZB reference coordinate system [mm] 1011 *
* Default: YE,ZE of the last element
YE Coordinates of the end point in the [mm] 1011 YB
ZE reference coordinate system [mm] 1011 ZB
T Effective thickness [mm] 1011 -
MNO Material number (composite sections) − (SECT)

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFA Reference point for start point Lt8 -
RFDA Reference direction point for start point Lt8 -
RFSA Reference initial coordinates for start point Lt8 -
REFE Reference point for end point Lt8 -
RFDE Reference direction point for end point Lt8 -
RFSE Reference initial coordinates for end point Lt8 -

This element connects thin-walled section elements PLAT and PROF shear-resistant. It is not
used for the sectional values for bending and normal force. Thus one can describe:

- Longitudinal seams of welded joints (T > 0), with contributing to the torsional moment,
the shear forces and shear deformation areas
- Dowels in composite sections (T < 0)
- Trussed walls (T < 0)

For real welds the equivalent seam thickness is to be used for T. The element is then used for
the determination of the shear stresses in welds.

For bracing walls the effective thickness T is given through the shear stiffness Sd of the frame
divided by the product of the WELD-shear modulus and the length of the shear connection in
the section plane. T = Sd /(G·L)

In the case of a variable effective thickness a variable TVAR can be defined for T in order to
use it for the interpolation with a master cross section.

If NO is not specified, an internal sequential numbering takes place.

The coordinates of the end points must be placed exactly within 0.5 mm (or snap defined by
CTRL SDIV VAL2) to the end points of the corresponding elements.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-233

AQUA | Input Description

Real construction Discretisation in AQUA

PLAT PLAT
1
1
A
A
6 WELD T 6 mm

E E
PLAT 2 PLAT 2

Figure 3.65: Modelling of longitudinal weld

3-234 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.44 PROF – Rolled Steel Shapes

See also: SECT, PLAT, WELD, SPT, Parametric-Sections

PROF

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of the shape / section Lt4 *

TYPE Profile type (see next page) LT IPE
Z1 Identifier of shape − *
Z2 Additional identifier of shape − -
Z3 Additional identifier of shape − -
MNO Material number of shape − (SECT)

ALPH Angle of rotation about reference point Degrees 0

YM Explicit coordinates of the of reference point [mm] 1011 0
ZM depending on the definition REF [mm] 1011 0

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFP Reference point for total shape Lt8 -
REFD Polar direction of reference point Lt8 -
REFS Reference initial coordinates for templates Lt8 -
REFR Reference point for rotation Lt4 -

DTYP Representation − S
T thin-walled
S solid cross section
TP T using positive z ordinates only
SP S using positive z ordinates only
(not available for L, T, Z and SH shapes)
SYM Symmetric options LT -
o-o duplicate symmetrically to origin
y-y duplicate symmetrically to y-axis
z-z duplicate symmetrically to z-axis
QUAD four items (all three options)
YFLP just mirror at the y-axis
ZFLP just mirror at the z-axis
REF Location of shape‘s reference point LT *
C elastic center
SC shear center
Y+Z-/Y-Z-/Z- top right/left/middle
Y+/Y-/M right/left/middle
Y+Z+/Y-Z+/Z+ lower right/left/middle
MATI Material of a filling for hollow sections − 0
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-235

AQUA | Input Description

Item Description Unit Default

VD Explicit definition of height D ∗ -

VB Explicit definition of width B ∗ -
VS Explicit definition of web thickness S ∗ -
VT Explicit definition of flange thickness T ∗ -
VR1 Explicit definition of root radius R1 ∗ -
VR2 Explicit definition of root radius R2 ∗ -
VB2 Explicit defnition of lower width B2 ∗ -
VT2 Explicit lower flange thickness T2 ∗ -
(dimensions are in units, which are stipulated by the
profile type)

BCYZ Explicit definition for a buckling stress curve (see LT *

record SECT)

Record PROF may be entered without a preceding SECT. In that case a section with the given
shape-number NO will be generated. The plastic shear values are determined as the table
values. A faster calculation for a pre-design can be done via input ’CTRL STYP FORC’ which
is generating tabulated values only. These values are not suitable for any really calculation. In
this case do not use this feature.

If the record SECT with a section number is defined before PROF, this behaviour can be mod-
ified for a solid steel profil with CTRL PLAS.

If NO is not specified, internal sequential numbering takes place.

By default profiles are oriented with their legs in the direction of the y and z coordinate axes,
so that the y axis shows the larger moment of inertia. Channels (U-sections) are oriented with
their opening to the right. Angles (L-sections) stand like the letter L.

The value Z1 - Z3 denote the title of a profile as specified in the profile tables. Not all identifiers
Z1 - Z3 always apply depending on the profile type. Only Z1 is generally used for I-profiles,
e.g. for HEB 300 with Z1 300. For L-profiles, Z1 stands for the height, Z2 for the width and
Z3 for the thickness, e.g. L 200x100x10 with Z1 200, Z2 100 and Z3 10. The identifiers to be
specified are marked with an * in the tables below.

Hint
The values Z1 - Z3 are independent of the units and cannot be changed. Deviating
geometries have to be specified with the values VD - VT2.

The actual list of shapes can be printed by an incomplete input. If nothing is selected you will
get a list of possible shapes, if you have selected a shape type you will get the list of all shapes
of that type, if you have selected only partial identifiers you will get the set of matching shapes.

3-236 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.44.1 List of the Tabulated European Shapes

Shape Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

HE I-section with wide flanges EN 10635 * *
e.g. HE 300 M, HE 300 B, HE 400 299
HEAA I-section with parallel flanges EN 10635 *
extra light version, e.g. HEAA 200
HEA I-section with parallel flanges EN 10635 *
wide I-beams, light version, e.g. HEA 300
HEB I-section with parallel flanges EN 10635 *
wide I-beams, normal version, e.g. HEB 200
HEM I-section with parallel flanges EN 10635 *
wide I-beams, heavy version, e.g. HEM 600
HD I-section with parallel flanges EN 10635 *
extra light version, e.g. HSL 100
HP I-section wide flanges columns EN 10635, e.g. HD 320 * *
97.6
HL I-section with wide flanges EN 10635 * *
special large sizes, e.g. HL 1000 AA
HLZ I-section with wide flanges EN 10635 * *
special large sizes, e.g. HLZ 1100 A
IPE I-section with parallel flanges EN 10365 *
IPE 80 to IPE 600
UPE Channels with parallel flanges DIN 1026-2, e.g. UPE *
100
UAP Channels of Arbed Saarstahl NF A45-255, e.g. UAP *
200
CDS Cold manufactured shapes EN 10162, e.g. CDS 100 x * * *
80 x 6
T T-section with inclined web/flange EN 10055, e.g. T 80 *
TB T-section heavy version, e.g. TB 60 *
L Hot formed L-section EN 10056-1
equal-sided, e.g. L 20 x 3 (identifier Z3 at Z2 allowed) * *
unequal, e.g. L 40 x 20 x 4 * * *
CDL Cold formed L-section EN 10162, all identifiers allowed
RHS Hot formed hollow section EN 10210-2
RHSC Cold formed hollow section EN 10219-2
square, e.g. SH/SHC 40 x 40 x 2.6 (identifier Z3 at Z2 * *
allowed)
rectangular, e.g. SH/SHC 100 x 50 x 3.2 * * *
Hint: there are various variations with different radii

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-237

AQUA | Input Description

Shape Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

if needed please specify VR1 and VR2
BAR Round bar EN 10060, e.g. BAR 100 *
CHS Hot manufactured tube EN 10210-1, e.g. WARM 711 x * *
8.0
CHSC Cold manufactured tube EN 10219, e.g. COLD 711 x * *
8.0
BARQ Quadratic steel bar EN 10059, e.g. BARQ 100 *
BARF Flat steel bar EN 10058, e.g. BARF 100 x 10 * *
all dimensions allowed

3.44.2 List of the Tabulated International Shapes

Profile DIN

Shape Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

I I-section with inclined flanges DIN 1025-1 *
I 80 to I 600

U Channels with inclined flange DIN 1026-1, e.g. U 300 *

TB T-section heavy version DIN 1024, e.g. TB 60 *
Z Z-section DIN 1027, e.g. Z 100 *

Shapes of the British Steel

Shape Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

UB Universal Beam Section of British Steel BS 4-1 * * *
UBP Universal Bearing Pile of British Steel BS 4-1 * * *
UC Universal Column Section of British Steel BS 4-1 * * *
RSJ Joists (I-section with inclined flanges) BS 4-1 * * *
HP I-section with parallel flanges BS 4-1 * *
wide shape with uniform thickness, e.g. HP 220 57.2
PFC Universal Bearing Pile of British Steel BS EN 10635 * * *

American Shapes of the AISC

Shape Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

W American W-Shape AISC * *
M American M-Shape AISC * *

3-238 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Shape Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

S American S-Shape AISC * *
HPus American HP-Shape AISC * *
WT halfed W-shapes AISC * *
MT halfed M-shapes AISC * *
ST halfed S-shapes AISC * *
C_us American Channels AISC * *
MCus Miscellaneous Channels AISC * *
L_us American Angles AISC * * *
HSS American rectangular hollow shapes AISC * * *
HSSr American pipes (HSS round) AISC * *

Hint
For all profiles of the AISC in each case two sets of identifiers (values Z1 - Z3) are avail-
able, e.g. identifiers for in. x lb/ft and mm x kg/m

Japanese Shapes

Shape Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

JIS Japanese sections * * *

Indian Shapes

Shape Typ Bezeichnung Z1 Z2 Z3

ISMB Indian MB-shape IS 808 *
ISHB Indian ISHB-shape IS 808 *
ISMC Indian MC-shape IS 808 *
L_is Indian L-shape IS 808 * * *

Australian and New Zealand Shapes

Shape Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

UBas UB-shape AS 3679 * *
UCas UC-shape AS 3679 * *
UBPas UBP-shape AS 3679 * *
PFCas PFC-shape AS 3679 *
CCas CC-shape (cold formed) * * *
L_as EA- and UA-shape AS 3679 * * *

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-239

AQUA | Input Description

Shape Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

Specify thickness as actual value!
CAas CA-shape (cold formed) AS 3679 * * *
SHas SHS- and RHS-shape AS 1163 * * *

Russian Shapes GOST

Shape Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

GOST Russian I-section GOST 8239 *
Bgost Parallel bending section GOST 26020 * *
Kgost Parallel column section GOST 26020 * *
Sgost Parallel high strength section GOST 26020 * *
Wgost Parallel wide flange section GOST 26020 * *
U_gost Russian U-section GOST 8240 *
UP_gost Parallel U-section GOST 8240 *
UE_gost Economic U-section GOST 8240 *
L_gost Russian L-section GOST 8509/8510 * * *

3.44.3 Sheet Pile Shapes

Shapes Type Designation Z1 Z2 Z3

LARS Larssen-U-section from Hoesch, e.g. LARS 603 *
AU Arbed / Arcelor U-section, e.g. AU 17 *
PAL Arcelor cold deformed U-section, e.g. PAL 31 x 40 * *
PAU Arcelor cold deformed U-section, e.g. PAU 24 x 50 * *
PU U-section, e.g. PU 12 *
HOES Hoesch Z-section, e.g. HOES 1705 *
AZ Arbed Z-section, e.g. AZ 28 *
PAZ Arcelor cold deformed Z-section, e.g. PAZ 55 x 70 * *
PZ SkylineSteel Z-section, e.g. PZ 35 *

The geometry of the shapes can be modelled only roughly. The most important data is the
weight of a single pile Z3 in kg/m and a few more dimensions. AQUA will create the locks
as equivalent solid sections such that the total area (based on a weight of 7850 kg/m3) is
achieved. Input of R1 is the half diameter of the lock (U-shapes only), R2 is the angle of the
web against the horizontal length of the wall and B2 may be used to specify the width of the
”upper” flanges. For the sheet piles the input for SYM defines:

none single pile

3-240 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

z-z Wall with 1 m width (locks not fixed)

o-o Wall with 1 m width (locks are fixed, only for U shapes)

3.44.4 Additional Descriptions

Profiles are primarily tabulated geometric types. Exotic shapes may be defined via explicit
values VD to VR2. But you have to specify a basic type of the shape and the normally required
identifiers in any case. If you select non tabulated identifiers (e.g. HEM 172), all explicit
dimension values have to be specified.

Cold formed sections (CDS) may be defined as U, Z, C or OMEGA shapes by defining the
values of the width B and/or the grps T positive or negative:

B
B B<0
T<0 T>0

T2 > 0
B2 B2 > 0

B2

Figure 3.66: Cold Formed Shapes

This input always defines polygons or thin-walled section elements and not any fixed cross
section properties. Therefore the analysis of thin-walled section types is performed with small
deviations from the tabulated cross section values. For torsional values with very thin shapes
with significant fillets, more severe deviations may occur. The default for DTYP is changed to
T, if beforehand a thin walled element in that cross section has been defined. If the profile
is included (oartly or complete) in concrete (also core concrete) a hole in the surrounding
concrete is created automatically unless MREF is specified with zero.

ALPH can rotate the cross section about the x axis. For the rotation of profiles with ALPH, with
the exception of L-, hollow and circular profiles, it is to be noted that the interaction conditions
of the design codes (e.g. Eurocode) refer to standard rolled sections or welded beams with the
same geometry. This means that the possibility of profile rotation means that these proofs are
no longer valid in every case. If it is only a matter of aligning the profiles correctly in the system
(on the beams), it is better to use the rotation of the local coordinate system of the beams.

When nothing is input for REF, the reference point of the shape (YM,ZM) is located at mid-
height for I- and SH-sections, left outside at mid-height for Channels, bottom left outside for
Angles and top middle for T-shapes. For centric beams REF C should be applied as with
the GUI default. The coordinates of these reference points and the angle of rotation may be
defined with reference to other points, but the shape and its size itself may of course not be
influenced by other reference points of.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-241

AQUA | Input Description

The shapes can be coupled with other cross section elements, but then the type of element
must match. Thus thin walled elements (PANE, PLAT, WELD) may be combined only with
DTYP D profiles, while thickwalled elements are allowed with DTYP V profiles, overlapping
definitions with other materials will generate automatic holes. And it must be kept in mind
that the transfer of shear forces for thin walled profiles is only possible at ends, vertices, or at
the centre point (I-sections and Channels). In case of solid cross sections the edges must lie
exactly on top of each other. As can be seen in the following example, the bisected shapes
must therefore be positioned on the outer edge of the other profile’s web.

All solid I profiles and hollow sections (SH, CHS, HSS, HSSr) have preset edge properties that
are necessary for a thermal analysis.

3.44.5 Examples of Thin-walled Profiles

a) Cross girder made out of 4 bisected HEB 400:

SECT 1
PROF 101 HEB 400 ALPH 0 DTYP T
PROF 102 HEB 400 ALPH 90 DTYP T

Figure 3.67: Cross girder made out of 4 bisected HEB 400

b) Cross girder made out of 2 bisected HEA 300:

SECT 1
PROF 101 HEA 300 ZM -145 DTYP TP ALPH 180.
PROF 102 HEA 300 ZM 145 DTYP TP
WELD 200 150 -7 150 7 14
200 -150 -7 -150 7 =

3-242 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Figure 3.68: Cross girder made out of 2 bisected HEA 300

c) 2 216/3.6 pipes with strengthening of 4 mm:

SECT 1
PLAT 101 120 -106.2 120 106.2 3.6 R -106.2
PLAT 101 120 106.2 120 -106.2 3.6 R -106.2
PLAT 102 -120 -106.2 -120 106.2 3.6 R -106.2
PLAT 102 -120 106.2 -120 -106.2 3.6 R -106.2

PLAT 201 120 -110 -120 -110 4.0

PLAT 202 120 110 -120 110 =

!Connections
WELD 300 120 110 120 106.2 6.0
300 -120 110 -120 106.2 =
300 120 -110 120 -106.2 =
300 -120 -110 -120 -106.2 =

Figure 3.69: Double pipe cross section

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-243

AQUA | Input Description

For the combination of solid polygon items, one has to check that the polygon components
are perfectly aligned with each other along their edges, so that the shear connection can be
identified. For the definition of the following section one has to stipulate the exact coordinates
and the exact height of the second divided HEM 1000:

SECT 2 TITLE "Double Cross"

PROF 10 HEM 1000 ALPH 0 YM 0.0 ZM 0.0 DTYP S
PROF 11 HEM 1000 ALPH 90 YM +10.5 ZM 0.0 DTYP SP VD 1008-21
PROF 12 HEM 1000 ALPH 270 YM -10.5 ZM 0.0 DTYP SP VD 1008-21
PROF 13 HEM 500 ALPH 0 YM 0.0 ZM -504.0 DTYP SP
PROF 14 HEM 500 ALPH 180 YM 0.0 ZM 504.0 DTYP SP
PROF 15 HEM 500 ALPH 90 YM 504.0 ZM 0.0 DTYP SP
PROF 16 HEM 500 ALPH -90 YM -504.0 ZM 0.0 DTYP SP

133
132

103134
102

152 112
123 163
104 124 164
S M
154 114
153 113
122 162

105
144106

142
143

Figure 3.70: Double Cross

A defined profile is mirrored three times with SYM QUAD. With the input

PROF 101 L 50 50 8 YM 10 ZM 10 DTYP T SYM QUAD

following cross section combined from the profiles L 50x50x8 results.

3-244 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Figure 3.71: Combined Cross Section

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-245

AQUA | Input Description

3.45 SPT – Geometry and Stress Points

See also: SECT, POLY, Parametric-Sections

SPT

Item Description Unit Default

NO Designation of the point Lt4 *

Y Coordinates of the point in the [mm] 1011 0
Z reference coordinate system [mm] 1011 0
1/ m3 1018
 
WTY Torsional stress tau-xy due to Mt=1 -
1/ m3 1018
 
WTZ Torsional stress tau-xz due to Mt=1 -
1/ m2 1017
 
WVY Shear stress tau-xy due to Vy=1 -
1/ m2 1017
 
WVZ Shear stress tau-xz due to Vz=1 -
SIGY Stress in transverse direction [MP] 1092 -
TEFF Effective thickness [mm] 1011 *
CDYN Notch and loading type LT -
SIGC allowed stress range σ -d(−1) [MP] 1092 *
p
TAUC allowed stress range τ -d(−1) [MP] 1092 σ/ 3
MNO Material number for composite sections − (SECT)
(= 0 if it is a pure geometry point)
FIX Degree of restraint for c/t check − -

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFP Reference point Lt8 -
REFD Reference direction point Lt8 -
REFS Reference initial coordinates Lt8 -

Additional output points for normal and shear stresses or arbitrary geometry points may be
defined with SPT. The design for fatigue is only possible with those points. A stress point
will create its own stress results in the database visible with WinGRAF along a beam or may
be addressed in MAXIMA for the superposition of stresses at that point. For most cases the
evaluation of maximum stresses might be sufficiently performed with all polygon vertices and
the intermediate points of the thin walled elements.

If the user does not select stress points, automatic points may be created controlled by CTRL
SCUT. For construction stages it should be noted, that these points will be generated for the
final section. If those points will be in a non effective part of the section for a single construction
stages, no stresses will be obtained for those points.

The normal stresses can be calculated from the X and Y coordinates using Swain’s formula.

3-246 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

The shear stresses are calculated by the following expressions:

τy = Mt · Wty + Vy · Wy

τz = Mt · Wtz + Vz · Wz (3.148)
r
τ= (τy
2 + τ2 )
z

The stress coefficients will be determined completely for thin walled sections if the stress point
is within a sectional element. If the Integral equations are active for the shear stress (CTRL
STYP BEM) you will get unit shear stress for all polygon vertices and stress points inside a
polygon. For some design tasks an effective width is needed, which will only be provided
automatically for thin walled sections.

For the fatigue design according to DIN 15018/4132 you may also specify literals for item CDYN
indicating the working conditions and notch types (B1W0 to B6K4) as well as explicit allowed
stress values SIGC and TAUC.

For the fatigue design according to DS 804 / DS 805 the notch groups (WI, WII or WIII as well
as KII, KII, KIV, KV, KVI, KVII, KIIX(!), KIX and KX) may be selected only for the design codes
DIN 18800, DIN 1045-2008 and older. SIGC and TAUC are as stress sways the double value
of those of the first row of the tables of appendix 6. Precise defaults are available for S 235
and S 355 (DS 804), smaller class values will be treated according to the formulas of DS 805.

Specifying only SIGC and TAUC will select the check of the absolute stress range as required
for solid sections.

For the stress superposition in MAXIMA, the corners and edge-mid points of the encased
rectangle will be available for all sections without the need of a SPT definition.

For a plate buckling design via a c/t ratio it is necessary to define the effective thickness TEFF
and two stress points with identical identifier describing the end points of the plate. The points
have to be defined at the mid line at the location of the built in effect. In the case of a vari-
able effective thickness a variable TVAR can be defined for TEFF in order to use it for the
interpolation with a master cross section. Following possibilities for FIX are available:

FREE the literal FREE defines a free end

SUPP the literal SUPP defines a supported end
>0 positive values define a support towards the interior of the plate
<0 negative values define a support outside of the plate. This feature is necessary to
describe fields subdivided in individual plates.
OFF the literal OFF or very large values (larger than the length) will deactivate the check.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-247

AQUA | Input Description

3.46 NEFF – Non effective parts

See also: SECT

NEFF

Item Description Unit Default

TYPE Not effective for (any combination from:) Lt8 YZN

N Normal force
Y or MZ y-ordinate (bending Mz)
Z or MY z-ordinate (bending My)
-R Reinforcements
+R Reinforcements are active even if they are
in a non effective part
V without interpolated vertices
SIG automatic based on stresses
YMIN Start ordinate of the NEFF region [mm] 1011 -9999
ZMIN Start ordinate of the NEFF region [mm] 1011 -9999
YMAX End ordinate of the NEFF region [mm] 1011 +9999
ZMAX End ordinate of the NEFF region [mm] 1011 +9999
MNO Material number (no definition = all) − -
WIDT optional thickness of a rectangle [mm] 1011 -
NO Designation of the non effective part Lt4 1

SMIN stress in point (YMIN,ZMIN) [MP] 1092 -

SMAX stress in point (YMAX,ZMAX) [MP] 1092 SMIN

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFI References for the point Lt4 -
RFDI (YMIN,ZMIN) Lt4 -
RFSI Lt4 -
REFA References for the point Lt4 -
RFDA (YMAX,ZMAX) Lt4 -
RFSA Lt4 -

With NEFF it is possible to define parts of polygons or an FE section or a thin walled section
to be non effective for different types of forces or moments. The default NYZ, deactivating all
longitudinal stress components is the correct choice for elements which are not effective at all
(e.g. local buckling). If the non uniform distribution of longitudinal stresses is to be modeled,
the normal force should remain effective. AQB uses the total section for the normal force due
to prestress and all creep and shrinkage evaluations. For the shear stiffness the total section
is used in all cases, but the non effective parts have a constant shear stress due to the non
existing longitudinal stress.

3-248 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

If no information is given for the reinforcement at TYPE, it is active in the non effective part (=
+R). An input +/-R for the reinforcement does not work with th especification DIST NONE for
the distribution of the bars.

For the bending parts it has to be distinguished if the Moment My or the lever z becomes zero
in Swain’s formula. SOFiSTiK uses always the lever, thus MY and MZ are just synonyms for Z
and Y.

In general the implemented method will generate multiple deductional areas if the windows
overlap, so this must be avoided.

For the definition of the NEFF-area it is possible to define the corner points (ymin,zmin) and
(ymax,zmax) of a rectangular window or with a specification of WIDT a rectangle along a line
from (ymin,zmin) to (ymax,zmax).

The NEFF window will create additional polygon vertices for the entries and exits points. This
option may be deactivated with an extra character "‘V"’ appended to the TYPE. For NEFFs
defined within a construction stages this option is always enforced.

For sections of class 4 the procedure in the design code deactivates the non effective areas
beforehand.

357.14

-357.14

Figure 3.72: Stresses at an effective section

This can be facilitated by defining non effective areas in AQUA beforehand allowing a simple
stress check or even an interaction of ultimate forces in AQB.

This reduction (e.g. EN 1993-1-5) is dependent on the stresses and thus in general an iterative
process. AQUA does not use sectional forces to be used for a not yet existing section but an
explicit stress distribution The most simple case is to assume a maximum uniform compressive
stress, just by selecting SMIN without any coordinates. (EN 1993-1-5 4.3 (3))

For uni-axial bending the stress is defined by just two points on the principal axis hitting the
elastic center of the section.

But even for bi-axial bending the stress plane may be defined by just two points if we require
that the stress does not vary perpendicular to the connecting stress defining line. The exact
values may be obtained from an iterative analysis with AQB NSTR.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-249

AQUA | Input Description

SMIN(YMIN,ZMIN)

Figure 3.73: Stress definition with two points on the stress line perpendicular to the neutral line

As the linear stress in any point is defined by:

σ = E · [ε0 + (z − zs ) · ky − (y − ys ) · kz

(3.149)

The stress for two arbitrary points (not required to be within the section) symmetric to the
centroid along the stress line may be taken as
 
σmn (ys −  · kz , zs +  · ky ) = E · ε0 +  · ky2 +  · kz2 (3.150a)
 
σm (ys +  · kz , zs −  · ky ) = E · ε0 −  · ky2 −  · kz2 (3.150b)
r
 = h/ ky2 + kz2 (3.150c)

Accounting for eccentricity acc. EN 1993-1-1 [Link] is done automatically for beams with a
reference axis.

These NEFF are effective for thin walled sections and solid section with defined c/t-stress
points.

This option is not yet available for the section editor.

3-250 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.47 WPAR – Parameters for Wind Loading

See also: SECT, POLY, PROF, WIND

WPAR

Item Description Unit Default

CS Construction stage no − 0
KR Absolute roughness [mm] *
default according to material (MEXT)
ICE Thickness of ice cover or marine growth [mm] 1011 0
TRAF Height of additional area of wind attack due to traffic [mm] 1011 0

YMIN Explicit dimensions of wind attack area [mm] 1011 *

YMAX (* = dimension of section) [mm] 1011 *
ZMIN [mm] 1011 *
ZMAX [mm] 1011 *
YREF Reference point for Windforces [mm] 1011 *
ZREF [mm] 1011 *
REF Default reference point for wind forces LT MID
MID half height or width
SC shear cntre
CW Selection of default wind drag coefficients LT -
EXPL explicit value CWF
CIRC circular
CABL cable/rope section according EN 13001-2
PIPE pipe/rod section according EN 13001-2
RECT rectangular
I double T shape
C channel shape
T T shape
L L shape
CWF factor or explicit drag coefficient − 0
CORN smoothing radius of edges [mm] 1011 0
ALF rotation of drag coefficients [degree] 5 0

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFI Reference point for (YMIN,ZMIN) Lt8 *
RFDI Reference direction point Lt8 *
RFSI Reference initial coordinates for templates Lt8 *
REFA Reference point for (YMAX,ZMAX) Lt8 *
RFDA Reference direction point Lt8 *
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-251

AQUA | Input Description

Item Description Unit Default

RFSA Reference initial coordinates for templates Lt8 *

REFP Reference point for (YREF,ZREF) Lt8 *
REFD Reference direction point Lt8 *
REFS Reference initial coordinates for templates Lt8 *

For the analysis of wind loading you may specify different parameters for construction stages.
This is mainly the wind attack area due to ice, traffic and building extensions. The effectiveness
of these definitions has to be aligned to the selection of reference length in record WIND.

Specifying CW enables default values of the drag coefficients based on literature for some
specific shapes. If neither WPAR nor WIND has been defined and no PROF has been defined,
a rectangular shape will be assumed. For standard circular cross sections with record SCIT or
for a circular cross section with record CIRC, the values for a circular cross section are used
without input.

The reference point of the wind forces will be by default in the geometric midpoint of the section.
Its location relative to the shear center of the section may create extra torsional moments. In
special cases you may even redefine the complete set of wind coefficients. The selected CS-
number is valid for all consecutive stages selected in SOFiLOAD with a group.

Currently the roughness is only used for circular sections.

3-252 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.48 WIND – Coefficients for Wind and Wave Loading

See also: SECT, POLY, PROF, WPAR

WIND

Item Description Unit Default

ALPH Angle for load application (-180≤ α ≤180) Degrees *

or type of derivative: LT
H1, H2, H3, H4, A1, A2, A3, A4
CWY Lateral drag coefficient cd − *
CWZ Vertical lift coefficient cl − *
CWT Torsional moment coefficient cm − *
REF Reference dimension LT HB
B always the width
H always the height
BH H for CWY, B for CWZ, BH for CWT
HB H for CWY, B for CWZ, BB for CWT
WB as B but in rotated reference
WH as H but in rotated reference
WBH as BH but in rotated reference
WHB as HB but in rotated reference
B2H Ratio of width to height − -
required for WHB,WBH,HB,BH and derivativa

CHYD Hydrodynamic coefficient Cm − 2.0

CLAT Transverse driving coefficient − 0.8
S Strouhal number − 0.15
VR0 reduced velocity U/ (ƒ · B) − -
V0 and values of the derivative − -
... with up to 27 pairs per record
VR27 and a last asymptotic velocity − -

The force coefficients are needed for the calculation of wind or wave loads in dependence of the
flow direction. The values CWY, CWZ and CWT may be defined as formulas resp. variables
along a reference axis. For rectangular sections and some steel shapes these values are
known to a certain extend, For circular sections very detailed values are known depending on
the Reynolds number and roughness and available within the programs. But there are some
explicit definitions possible (e.g. cables always with Cd = 1.2). As there are no directional
dependencies in that case, a single record is sufficient and the resulting force is given by the
equation from Morrison:
1 ∂U
Fd = ρ · Cd · B · U2 + ρ · Chyd · A · (3.151)
2 ∂t

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-253

AQUA | Input Description

These force components act always in the flow direction. If a value for cz is specified, this force
is calculated with the absolute value of the cosine, allowing to describe simple cases also with
a single record.

For other section types more complex force coefficients may be needed, defining forces trans-
verse to the flow direction or torsional moments depending on the angle of attack of the flow.
Than CWY to CWT have to be defined depending on an angle. These values have to be stipu-
lated according to an angle sequence. Curves are extended for angles outside the range 0 to
90 or 0 to -180, if they were not defined explicitly for this range. More than a total of 99 values
will not be permitted however. For rectangular sections and standard steel shapes again de-
tailed values are known and available as default. If no values are defined a rectangular section
with the outer bounds is assumed. Defining ECHO WIND FULL will visualize the hydrodynamic
coefficients for all sections.

It is especially important to consider the exact definition of the coefficients, because the liter-
ature often uses very different coefficients. In wind engineering the generally used coordinate
system is to align the y-axis in wind direction and the z-axis vertical to the top:

• The angle for load application is the angle against the (lateral) local y-axis of the cross
section. 0 degrees correspond to an angle from left to right in negative direction of the
y-axis, +90 degrees from below to above in direction of negative z-axis. This definition cor-
responds to the normal designations, yielding forces in negative direction with the positive
signs of the force coefficients.

+ cwz
α < 0° + cwt

y
WI N D α = 0° + cwy

α > 0°
z
Figure 3.74: Angle of attack of wind

• The references WB, WH, WHB and WBH are similar to their counterparts without the W, but
the coefficients CWY and CWZ are in wind direction and transverse upwards as measured
in a wind tunnel. They are converted to the values of the schema mentioned above.

+ cl + cl
+ cm + cm
α < 0° α > 0°

y y
WI N D + cd + cd

z z

Figure 3.75: Blade angle in wind tunnel

• The coefficients are be to determined from wind-tunnel tests or numerical flow simula-
tions. In order to expand the band width with regard to smaller modifications (e.g. ice
arrangement), the flow areas for lateral and vertical flows are recommended to determine
separately. For torsion both dimensions are then used. Thus for the sectional coordinate
System and REF HB it is valid:

3-254 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

py = − q · cy · (zm − zmn)

pz = − q · cz · (ym − ymn)
(3.152)
mt = − q · ct · (ym − ymn)2
pt = − q · ct · (zm − zmn)

These definitions seem to be strange, with an input to REF one can also stipulate either the
height or the width as reference for all coefficients. It has to be stated however, that this will
hamper an interpolation and some of the WPAR effects. If the values are all taken on the width,
a change of the height will not change any wind force. Many values specified in the literature
may be generalized easily if defined with the REF HB or BH. For the dervativa with HB or BH
and a rotation of WHB or WBH the value B2H is required.

For extended analysis it is also possible to define the derivatives according to Scanlan. For
every defined angle up to eight consecutive records with up to 27 data pairs may be defined.

1 z′ Bα ′ z y′ y
 
L
Fm = ρU2 B KH1 + KH2 + K 2 H3 α + K 2 H4 + KH5 + K 2 H6 (3.153)
2 U U B U B

1 z′ Bα ′ z y′ y
 
M 2 2 2 2 2
Fm = ρU B KA1 + KA2 + K A3 α + K A4 + KA5 + K A6 (3.154)
2 U U B U B

1 z′ Bα ′ z y′ y
 
D 2 2 2 2 2
Fm = ρU B KP1 + KP2 + K P3 α + K P4 + KP5 + K P6 (3.155)
2 U U B U B

All these values are thus referenced on the total chord width b. When importing data it has
to be taken care or the fact, that Scanlan used the half chord B and has used other indices
with the P (P1 exchanged with P5 and P4 with P6). Then he used the heave downwards, so
the coefficients H2, H3, A1 and A4 are with opposite signs. Thus some of the values might be
corrected, adjusted or shifted.

The quasi static wind coeffecients and their derivatives may be used to create asymptotic
values of the curves for static loading (K=0). The user may select this asymptotic point by a
last point onyl with VRi.

The printout of the coefficients is done with ECHO WIND FULL in the notation of the Polytec-
nico Milano which provides a better visual control. With ECHO WIND EXTR it is also provided
in the Scanlan notation.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-255

AQUA | Input Description

3.49 LAY – Reinforcement Layers

See also: SECT, RF, LRF, CRF, CURF

LAY

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of layer (0-9) − 0

TID optional text identifier of layer Lt4 -
TYPE Type of layer LT *
MIN Minimum reinforcement (basic reinforce-
ment)
OPT optional reinforcements
SEQ sequential reinforcements
MRF Material number of reinforcement − (SECT)

Longitudinal reinforcements are organized in groups by Layers. For the design all elements of
a single layer will be activated in total to achieve a useful distribution for all layers [Link]
achieve this in a consistent manner, all elements of layer must have the same material and
type and should be activated in the same embedding material and construction stage. This is
achieved easily by specifying a LAY before defining the elements. The definition of a short text
(TID) may be used to clarify the location of the layer for the print. The default for TYPE is MIN
for Layer 0 and 9 for all other layers.

3.49.1 Properties of reinforcement elements

The reinforcement elements and its distribution are defined by means of five parameters. The
diameter should be always defined.

AS is the basic reinforcement value (units see below)

ASMA is the maximum reinforcement in the same unit (if only ASMA is defined, AS
= ASMA will be assumed.)
LAY is the ident of the layer type (M for type MIN, S for type SEQ, Z for type OPT)
and the layer number (0-9).
The default is taken from the preceding LAY record.
D is the diameter of an individual bar, either in [mm]
or as nominal value in the form of a literal:
’5’ is for an US-design code a ’#5’ bar.
A is the distance between the bars or the number of bars.
DIST the distribution of the bars within the element

In general, all reinforcements are saved as single bars to allow unlimited usage of the sections
for non linear design. Several possibilities for the distribution are available via item DIST.

EVEN generates a bar in the middle of all segments, thus all areas have the same
weight.
FULL generates bars at the start and end point and between

3-256 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

INS omits the start and end point.

ADJA omits the end point only.
ADJE omits the start point only.
INSC omits the start point, the end point and all corners of a perimetric reinforce-
ment (CURF).
NONE obsolete. generates a distributed line or circular reinforcement.

The following scheme shows the distribution of the reinforcement bars e.g. in the case of the
partitioning of the line reinforcement in four segments:

B E

EVEN
FULL
INS,INSC
ADJA
ADJE

Figure 3.76: Distribution of bars

FULL INSC

Figure 3.77: Distribution of bars for perimetric reinforcement

With DIST NONE a continuously distributed reinforcement is created. Such reinforcement is

not recommended any more because some effects (eg. non effectivity) are not possible. With
DIST NONE a reinforcement/length is created with AS/A, where A is preset to 1.0. A total
reinforcement value may be obtained for this special case with A=0.0.

In all other cases of DIST the value of A is preset with the maximum reinforcement bar distance
specified in the INI-file, respective a maximum distance of 400 mm. Negative definitions of A
will be taken directly as number of bars.

For the reinforcement area and especially to distinguish the behaviour with an interpolated
section three cases are distinguished, controlled primarily by the definition of a specific unit.

mm2
 
defines the total reinforcement area
mm2 / m
 
defines the grade of reinforcements
[−] defines a factor on the single bar with Diameter D
(Units [o/ o] and [o/ oo] have the same effect)

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-257

AQUA | Input Description

If AS is not defined, the total area of reinforcements will be obtained by the count on the
generated single bars.

The three most important variants of the input of a line reinforcement with reinforcement AS and
the maximum reinforcement ASMA are realized in the cross section editor. The corresponding
inputs for AQUA are:

1. Input of the quantity of the reinforcing bars

LRF 'L1' YB 220. ZB 470. YE -220. ZE 470. LAY1 M1 DIST EVEN D 20 A 4[-]

Over a line length of 440 mm 4 reinforcing bars with the diameter 20 are generated respec-
tively in the middle of the four segments. The reinforcement AS which is to be considered
is used automatically with 12.56 cm2 . The maximum reinforcement ASMA can be input
 

with cm2 .
 

2. Input of the reference length A and of a grade of reinforcements AS,ASMA

LRF 'L2' YB 220. ZB 470. YE -220. ZE 470. LAY M2 DIST EVEN D 20 A 100. $$
AS 28.56[cm2/m]

Over a line length of 440 mm the reinforcement bars with diameter 20 should be consid-
ered respectively in the middle of the corresponding segment using the reference length
A 100 mm. In this case the program determines four segments with a length of 110 mm.
Without an explicit input the program generates automatically 3.14 cm2 per reinforce-
 

ment bar for the reinforcement AS. This corresponds to a grade of reinforcement AS of
28.56 cm2 / m . The maximum reinforcement can be input with cm2 / m .
   

3. Input of the reference lenght A and a total reinforcement area for AS,ASMA

LRF 'L2' YB 220. ZB 470. YE -220. ZE 470. LAY M2 DIST EVEN D 20 A 100. $$
AS 12.56[cm2]

Over a line length of 440 mm with a reference length A of 100 mm a total reinforcement
area of 12.56 cm2 (corresponds to 4 diameter 20) is given for a diameter 20. In this
 

case the progam determines four segments of 110 mm with a reinforcing bar in the middle
of a segment with 3.14 cm2 . The maximum reinforcement can be defined also in cm2 .
   

For the definition of perimetric reinforcements the first variant of the input of the reinforcement
with the quantity of the reinforcing bars is not possible. In the cross section editor the variants
2 and 3 are available for the definition of the reinforcement in analog mode.

3.49.2 Rules for the treatment of layers

The ratios of the layers to each other are controlled by the layer type. There are layers with
the minimum (basic) reinforcement (MIN, M0 - M9) and optional layers (OPT, Z0-Z9). M-layers
have minimum (basic) reinforcement and, in the absence of any other instructions, they are
laid by at least the specified AS values. On the other hand, Z-layers may be not activated at all.
The layer number has no influence on the selection of a particular layer by the dimensioning
program. For ideal sectional values in AQUA only the minimum (basic) reinforcements will be
used.

3-258 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

If, however, processing in the order of the layer numbers is desired, the layer numbers S0 - S9
should be used as a special case. S-layers cannot be used in combination with M- or Z-layers.
As an exception to this rule, however, a minimum (basic) reinforcement can be defined for the
lowest layer by M0.

Each layer is allowed to have only one material number. For the further processing to be
consistent, it is also useful that every one layer lies only in one material number since only
then the right deduction areas or equivalent cross section values can be determined.

Reinforcement with the same layer number is always laid in proportion to the input AS-values.
In general each layer can only be increased to the value where its first reinforcement reaches
its maximum value.

The following principal options are available to the user:

- symmetric reinforcement
Compression and tension reinforcement are defined symmetric with respect to the elas-
tic centre of the cross section and with the same layer number. Minimum (basic) rein-
forcement requires layer type M.
- non-symmetric reinforcement
Compression and tension reinforcement are assigned different layer numbers.

Torsional Longitudinal Reinforcement

The keyword TORS and the literal ACTI/ADDI can be used for each reinforcement element to
indicate that this reinforcement should be used for torsion. This has the following effects:

• During dimensioning, the required torsional longitudinal reinforcement is compared to the

total active (ACTI and ADDI) areas divided by the periphery length and is then made avail-
able with an increase of the involved layers. The torsional reinforcement elements do not
need to have the same layer number (e.g. top/bottom). In case of an increase due to tor-
sion, however, each layer is increased as a whole, including reinforcements not activated
for torsion.
• Only the reinforcements designated with ACTI define the equivalent Bredt’s box with its
area. AQUA establishes itself a reasonable sequence of the elements and checks the
defined area against the cross section area. The result may be checked as shear section
”AKT” in the ResultViewer. If needed you may change it with an explicit value with SVAL
AK.

The effectiveness of the reinforcement is defined either as linearly distributed reinforcement

directly in cm2 /m or in the form of single points with discrete spacing. For the efficiency of the
entire box the entire effective reinforcement is distributed about the entire perimeter. Thus it is
the users responsibility to check that the predetermined distribution is sufficient for the torsional
loading.

Crack Widths
The item AR can be used for each reinforcement element in order to introduce additional
properties for checking the crack width. D specifies already the diameter for which the crack
width must be maintained. AR defines the reference area for a single check of the crack width,
as required for instance by DIN 4227 10.2 Section 3. Here AR defines the reinforcement ratio

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-259

AQUA | Input Description

μ-z by means of:

(AS · ƒ ctor)
μ−z = (3.156)
AR

3-260 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.50 RF – Single Reinforcement

See also: SECT, LAY, LRF, CRF, CURF

RF

Item Description Unit Default

NO Designation of the element Lt4 *

Y Coordinates of the point [mm] 1011 0
Z in the sectional coordinate system [mm] 1011 0

for units and details see Reinforcement

cm2
 
AS Basic reinforcement 1020 -
cm2
 
ASMA Maximum reinforcement 1020 -
LAY Layer LT (LAY)
MRF Material number of reinforcement − (LAY)
TORS Torsional contribution LT PASS
PASS no contribution
ACTI fully active
ADDI partially active
i.e. active but not defining Akt
D Diameter [mm] 1023 -
m2 1012
 
AR Reference area for cracked widths

SIG Prestress (after creep and shrinkage) [MP] 1092 0

TEMP Temperature for hot design degC *

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFP Reference point Lt8 -
REFD Reference direction point Lt8 -
REFS Reference initial coordinates Lt8 -

If a FEM section with a temperature field has been selected, the temperatures TEMP will be
interpolated from that mesh. If the master section is within the same data base, a definition
of RF without coordinates will import all the reinforcements matching the selection criteria
specified wit NO (e.g. "A?" or "*" ).

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-261

AQUA | Input Description

3.51 LRF – Line Reinforcement

See also: SECT, LAY, RF, CRF, CURF

LRF

Item Description Unit Default

NO Designation of the reinforcement line Lt4 *

YB Coordinates of the start point [mm] 1011 *
ZB in the sectional coordinate system [mm] 1011 *
YE Coordinates of the end point [mm] 1011 YB
ZE in the sectional coordinate system [mm] 1011 ZB

for units and details see Reinforcement

cm2 / m
 
AS Basic reinforcement 1020 -
cm2 / m
 
ASMA Maximum reinforcement 1020 *
LAY Layer LT (LAY)
MRF Material number of reinforcement − (LAY)
TORS Torsional contribution LT PASS
PASS no contribution
ACTI fully active
ADDI partially active
i.e. active but not defining Akt
D Diameter [mm] 1023 -
A Reference length for AS and ASMA [mm] 1011 / *
or number of bars [−]
DIST Distribution of bars LT EVEN
AR Reference area for cracked widths [mm] 1011 -

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFA Reference point for start point Lt8 -
RFDA Reference direction point for start point Lt8 -
RFSA Reference initial coordinates for start point Lt8 -
REFE Reference point for end point Lt8 -
RFDE Reference direction point for end point Lt8 -
RFSE Reference initial coordinates for end point Lt8 -

R Radius for arrangement in arc [mm] 1011 -

PHI Angle for arrangement in arc Degrees 15.

The default for YB and ZB are the last defined values of YE and ZE of the previous line rein-
forcement.

3-262 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

b b

Figure 3.78: Line reinforcement

If a radius is input, then single reinforcement points are defined on the arc ( < 180 degree)
above the defined chord. For each segment the aperture angle is set smaller than PHI (default
from CTRL HMIN/HTOL), the orientation of the arc is defined by the sign of PHI or R.

The points are always arranged in the middle of the considered sectors. Hence, the beginning
and the end point of the arc are not reinforcement points. If an angle of 180 degrees is subdi-
vided into 30-degree segments, the single points lie at angles 15, 45, 75 as well as 105, 135
and 165 degrees.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-263

AQUA | Input Description

3.52 CRF – Circular Reinforcement

See also: SECT, LAY, RF, LRF, CURF

CRF

Item Description Unit Default

NO Designation of the reinforcement circle Lt4 *

Y Coordinates of the center of the circle [mm] 1011 0
Z in the sectional coordinate system [mm] 1011 0
R Radius of the reinforcement circle [mm] 1011 -
PHI Angle of central reference point Degrees 0
DPHI Size of the arc Degrees 360

for units and details see Reinforcement

cm2 / m
 
AS Basic reinforcement 1020 -
cm2 / m
 
ASMA Maximum reinforcement 1020 *
LAY Layer LT (LAY)
MRF Materialnumber of reinforcement − (LAY)
TORS Torsional contribution LT PASS
PASS no contribution
ACTI fully active
ADDI partially active i.e. active but not defining
Akt
D Diameter [mm] 1023 -
A Reference length of AS and ASMA [mm] 1011 / *
or number of bars [−]
DIST Distribution of bars LT EVEN
AR Reference area for crack widths [mm] 1011 -

Explanations see Parametric-Sections

REFP Reference point Lt8 -
REFD Reference direction point Lt8 -
REFS Reference initial coordinates Lt8 -
REFR Reference radius point Lt4 -

PHI is required to shift the generated bars to a different angle. It defines the base direction
(PHI: 0 = at the z axis, -90 = at the y axis) With a definition of DPHI an arc of reinforcements is
generated from PHI-DPHI/2 to PHI+DPHI/2. A definition of DPHI 0 will generate a single point
only.

3-264 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Figure 3.79: Circular Reinforcement

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-265

AQUA | Input Description

3.53 CURF – Perimetric Reinforcement

See also: SECT, LAY, RF, LRF, CRF

CURF

Item Description Unit Default

H Inset of reinforcement from perimeter cm/ mm -

EXP Literal of the exposure class Lt -
adds to H the values defined at MEXT with
CNOM+D/2

for units and details see Reinforcement

cm2 / m
 
AS Basic reinforcement 1020 -
cm2 / m
 
ASMA Maximum reinforcement 1020 -
LAY Layer LT (LAY)
MRF Materialnumber of reinforcement − (LAY)
TORS Torsional contribution LT PASS
PASS no contribution
ACTI fully active
ADDI partially active
D Diameter [mm] 1023 -
A Distance of bars [mm] 1011 *
DIST Distribution of bars LT EVEN
AR Reference area for cracked widths [mm] 1011 -

CENT Centring factor − 1000

CURF can be used to define circumferential reinforcement for the last defined polygon. The
distance may be defined by two components, a constant offset H and a variant cover defined
for the material with MEXT CNOM. Any input for EXP will add the value CNOM+D/2 for all
edges. If no CNOM is defined only H is used as true cover.

For the exposition class a match is defined using the wild card rules. Thus if all edges should
be treated a value of "‘*"’ or equivalent has to be specified. Any other definition will create a
reinforcement only for those edges matching the selection criteria. Thus it is possible to define
different reinforcements for different edges. The definitions for the distribution DIST will be
applied for any connected number of edges.

The value of A specifies the maximum distance of the generated single reinforcements. How-
ever, unless DIST INS, INSC or EVEN is specified, at least one reinforcement bar is placed at
each corner. The meaning of AS, ASMA may be pre length, in total or by bar and are controlled
by the unit (eg. mm2 or cm2 / m). If definition of A as number of bars is not possible here. The
use of the line reinforcement LRF with the radius R and the angle PHI is recommended for
polygonal circles instead of the perimetric reinforcement.
Because it is useful for the design method that the centre of reinforcement coincides with the

3-266 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

Figure 3.80: Circumferential reinforcement - Polygon

centre of the cross section, AQUA attempts to change the reinforcement distribution with a
least-square method so that this aim is fulfilled. The sum of the perimetric reinforcement is
kept unchanged, however the reinforcement densities are increased or decreased at the single
edges. With CENT 0.0 or definition of AS as per bar the method can be deactivated.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-267

AQUA | Input Description

3.54 TVAR – Template Variables

See also: SECT

TVAR

Item Description Unit Default

NAME Name of a variable Lt16 !

VAL Value of the variable Lt64 !
SCOP Scope of variable − *
If specified, the variable will be saved to the database
CMNT Comment to the variable Lt32 -

SOFiSTiK variables, defined via STO# are globally valid. The variables LET# are only valid
locally. For more complex tasks like template section generation, it becomes necessary to
define variables valid only within a scope. TVAR allows a very general definition of those
numeric variables within a freely selectable scope. The definition of literals or the definition of
tables or functions is not possible.

TVAR without the definition of a scope saves the value for the current section. Thus the use of
this variable becomes possible for template formulas even if that variable is not defined globally.
Multiple definitions should be used for very special cases only.

Variables used for a section have a complex hierarchy:

• Highest Rank have variables defined along an axis during interpolation along the axis.
• Secondary rank have all variables defined in public scopes (0 to 99999), either with CADINP
and STO# or with TVAR and an explicit scope.
• Finally for all variables the default-value will become effective, which is the value which has
been defined at the time when the section has been created. If no other scope has been
used, this will be the value defined with TVAR for the section. These values are saved with
the section in the database and will be updated with every INTE command.

Variables with TVAR can also be used in formulas, e.g. when interpolating a master cross-
section along an axis. It should be noted that mixing TVAR with other variables can lead
to problems, as the evaluation and interpolation of the TVAR only takes place after the
SOFiMSHC run in a separate AQUA-INTE run. LET# variables must not be used here, as
they only work locally in a program run and are not saved in the database. It is recommended
to input all fixed values of a formula as a numerical value or with a mathematical literal, e.g.
SIN for sine, next to the TVAR.

The input of a formula in the record TVAR is not possible. Formulas have to be defined at the
corresponding cross sectional elements. Example for a variable coordinate z of an polygonal
point with TVAR H:

TVAR 'H' VAL 1000[mm] ! no formula can be analysed here

...
VERT NO 101 Y -500. Z "=#H+100,1200."

3-268 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

For the master cross section in the AQUA run with the cross section definition the coordinate
z is used with 1200 mm = value after the comma. The different heights TVAR H in mm are
defined in SOFiMSHC at GAXV along the axis. In the following interpolation, H+100 mm is
taken into account for each of the interpolated cross-sections.

The name of the variable may be followed by a simple numerical index:

TVAR INC(0) 0.05

TVAR ALF(0) ARC(ATN(+#INC,+1)) SCOP 1
TVAR ALF(1) ARC(ATN(-#INC,-1)) SCOP 1

There is a range of Variables in the Euro-codes allowing to adopt national factors called boxed
values. They are defined in the INI files in general. A survey of the accepted names and
subjects (DESI,COMB etc.) is given in the file [Link].

For special cases, these values may be defined with TVAR. If for example a reduction of the
elasticity modulus for the CALC curve is required, it is possible to specify factors ALF-CE and
GAM-CE :

TVAR "ALF-CE" 0.85 SCOP DESI

TVAR "GAM-CE" 1.25 SCOP DESI

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-269

AQUA | Input Description

3.55 INTE – Interpolation or Variants of Sections

See also: SECT

INTE

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of new section or −/ LT !

ALL Rebuild all interpolated sections
ADD Insert a section definition
NS0 Number of 1st reference section (master) − -
NS1 Number of 2nd reference section −/ LT -
S Interpolation or station value − -
NREF Number of a beam stuctural line or axis id −/ LT -

All sections marked as to be interpolated in the database, will be established if defining INTE
ALL (or INTE 0). If NREF is specified, only sections along this structure line or axis or sec-
ondary axis are treated. The additional specification of S selects only the beam section at this
position for the interpolation. If NREF is not defined, sections are treated along all available
axes.

There are two different types for interpolation of cross sections:

• Linear interpolation between two cross sections whose construction is identical

To avoid interpolation problems, it is recommended to generate the second cross section
by a copy of the first one for the method of the linear interpolation. In Rhino projects,
the formula evaluation is suppressed by the input INTE ALL 4. If two cross sections are
specified, the formula evaluation is suppressed by default. With the input INTE NO ... NS0
... NS1 ... S ... NREF 0, the formula evaluation can be switched on.
• Interpolation of the cross section geometry of a master cross section using reference points
and variables along the axis
This option is available only for customers with a CABD license. For the interpolation along
an axis, only a master cross section is required. Variable points (reference points) are
defined in this section and can be assigned to corresponding variables (TVAR) / axes (pro-
gram SOFiMSHC record GAXV).

It is not possible to mix both variants. In the case of inconsistent definitions AQUA prints a
warning and tries to interpolate with the master cross section.

When performing this action AQUA will use free section numbers above 100 and above the
cross section template for the new sections. These sections are deleted and reassigned if this
procedure is repeated and will be printed in detail only if ECHO SDEF EXTR is given. In the
case of an interpolation with a master cross section, the numbers of the interpolated cross
sections can be influenced as follows:

• The master cross section has to be numbered 100 or greater.

• The interpolated cross sections start then with the number of the master cross section + 1.

3-270 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

E.g. if the master cross section receives the number 200, then the interpolated cross sections
start with number 201.

INTE will change the coordinates either by interpolation with a second section or by variables
along an axis. In a second step all defined reference rules of the master section will be applied.
All non geometric data is taken from the master section. Thus the interpolation between two
sections will not necessarily be identical if the sections are exchanged.

AQUA will check the generated sections against duplicates and may use a section multiple
times. A definition of INTE ALL 1 will suppress this behaviour.

It is also possible to interpolate typed standard sections.

The construction stage numbers of the generated sections may be changed. The definition of
a variable CSI_SELECTi (i=1...9) defines a new construction stage number for the ith construc-
tion phase. All following construction phase will be shifted by the same value if not explicitly
defined with another CSI_SELECTi definition.

Individual sections may be also directly interpolated or derived or inserted in the current sec-
tion. For the elements to be inserted there is:

• Just copy a section definition. For a cross section template currently defined variables
(TVAR) may be evaluated. This method is selected by entering NS0 only.
• You may use linear interpolation between two sections having an identical layout. For this
method two cross section numbers and an interpolation factor S (0 for NS0, 1 for NS1) have
to be stipulated.
• Last but not least you may extrude a cross section template NS0 with reference points along
a general curved axis. This is selected by entering a reference NREF of the structural line
on the axis, the common station value S for all the axes and the reference cross section
NS0.

• If NO is defined positive a new section will be generated.

• If NO is defined as Literal ADD, an already defined or newly interpolated section section will
be inserted within the current section definition. This is especially useful for those cases
where sections exist from a general import and have to be amended with additional data.

When inserting typed standard sections, only the geometric definitions will be inserted into the
current section.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-271

AQUA | Input Description

3.56 IMPO – Import of Data

IMPO

Item Description Unit Default

MAT Number of a material ( ALL = all) −/ LT -

SECT Number of a section ( ALL = all) −/ LT -
FROM Name of a database to read from Lt255 !
TO specify a new section number − -

With the record IMPO you may import materials and sections from a database to the current
project database. The imported sections may obtain a new section number and the first con-
struction stage may be shifted to a different number.

During an import used material data not defined in the target will be added automatically. A
replacement of material data is only done if a MAT definition has been made explicitly.

Imported sections will be always reanalyzed. An import will upgrade material and sectional
data as far as possible.

3-272 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

3.57 EXPO – Ansi Export of Data

EXPO

Item Description Unit Default

MAT Number of a material ( 0 = all) − 0

SECT Number of a section ( 0 = all) − 0
TO Name of a file to write to Lt96 *
PASS Password of the CDB to be exported Lt16 -

With the record EXPO you may export the materials and sections in the database to an input
file for AQUA. This may be useful in special cases. If MAT or SECT is defined negative, then
the export of materials and cross sections is deactivated respectively.

If the filename is not specified the data will be appended to the most recently defined file or a
file with the name project_AQU.DAT is generated.

The units of the values will be set to the current setting of UNIE from record PAGE. The lan-
guage of the new file will be the same as the current CADINP input file.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-273

AQUA | Input Description

3.58 ECHO – Extent of Output

ECHO

Item Description Unit Default

OPT A literal from the following list: LT FULL

MAT Material parameters
SNO Saving options at section
SECT Cross section elements
REFP Generated elements and references
SDEF Cross section values restart
SYST System statistic
PICT Properties of Pictures
IEQ Edges of the topological analysis
WIND Wind coefficients
SPRI Spring characteristic curves
BORE Bore profile values
LCA Life Cycle Assessment values
FULL Select all options, except the SYST option

VAL The extent of the output LT FULL

OFF nothing computed / output
NO no output
YES regular output
FULL extensive output
EXTR extreme output
VAL2 Additional value − -

In case of no ECHO input all options are set to YES (ECHO MAT, SYST and LCA has NO).
The input of the option alone is therefore sufficient for increasing the value to FULL. The record
name ECHO must be entered for every record.

MAT
NO Only name of design code and materials
YES Material constants
FULL Plus stress-strain curves of the materials
EXTR Plus thermal and hydraulic material constants and Life Cycle As-
sessment

3-274 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | AQUA

The ECHO-options may be defined anywhere in the data record, the last definition will be ap-
plied to all sections. However it is possible with a definition of ECHO SNO n1 n2 to remember
the currently active values for the print out of sections n1 to n2.

ECHO SECT allows to select individual items for FULL and EXTR, if these options are not
additional, only the selected elements will be shown.

SECT
YES Overview of cross section values only (SV,PLA 1,LAY)
FULL Plus the most important values for each cross section
(SV,PAR,ADD,PLA 2,LAY,TYPE)
EXTR Plus the individual elements of the cross section added
(SPT,PPT,CIR,PAN,WEL,CUT 2,NEFF,PRF 1,LRF)
SV sectional values of total section
PAR sectional values of partial sections
ADD additional sectional values
PLA Limit forces (1=single, 2=combined)
LAY Reinforcement summary
TYPE Typed section definitions
SPT stress points
PPT polygon vertices
CIR circles
PAN thin-walled elements
WEL welds and dowels
CUT shear cuts (1=cut, 2=points)
NEFF non effective areas
PRF Point reinforcements (1=user, 2=generated)
LRF Linear and circular reinforcements
REF Reference points (always additional)
FEM FEM-Points (always additional)
GEN all generated sectional elements (always additional)
GPRF all generated reinforcement elements (always additional)
SDEF
YES The cross sections which have been input in this calculation run
only
FULL plus the unmodified cross sections in the database
EXTR plus all interpolated sections
SYST
YES Statistics of total sum of sections and masses in the system (only
available for restart)
PICT
NO No pictures to be included
YES Nice pictures with shading

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-275

AQUA | Input Description

FULL Contours including basis static elements

EXTR Detailed picture including labels
With input VAL2 one may switch from the automatic orientation to an explicit
orientation of the sectional coordinate system. For the values from 1 to 4,
the y-axis is aligned to the left-hand side, downwards, to the right-hand side,
upwards. Other values are taken as rotation angle in degrees.
IEQ
NO No additional printout
FULL Detailed printout of the analyzed topology of the section for the
mesh generation or the integral equation method.
WIND only in connection with ECHO SECT
NO No output
YES Values and graphic of explicitly defined wind coefficients
FULL Values and graphic of all wind coefficients (including predefined
SREC,PROF)
EXTR Show the full range of scanlan derivativa
SPRI
NO No output
YES Values and graphic of the spring characteristic curve
BORE
NO No output
YES Table with the bore profile values
LCA
NO No output
YES Table with the Life Cycle Assessment values

3-276 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Description of Output | AQUA

4 Description of Output

4.1 Information about the Design Code

The output begins with the information about the used design code:

Default design code is ... The used design code is output here.
class The class input at NORM CAT is printed here
(e.g. safety class according to the design code).
Altitude above sea level
Wind zone
Snow load zone
Earthquake zone

4.2 Material Properties

Only the material numbers with the material designations are printed with the default ECHO
MAT NO. The tables of material properties are output with ECHO MAT YES.

General Material Properties

No. Material number

Youngs-modulus Elastic modulus for deformation analysis
(DIN 1045-1 Ecm !)
Poisson-Ratio Poisson’s ratio
Shear-modulus Shear modulus
Compression modulus Compression modulus
Weight Specific weight
Weight buoyancy for soil mechanics only
[Link]. Temperature elongation coefficient
Young-modulus E-90 Anisotropic elastic modulus
Poisson Ratio m-90 Anisotropic Poisson’s ratio
Nordic angle Meridian angle of anisotropy
Inclination angle Descent angle of anisotropy
Safetyfactor Material safety
calc strength fy Design strength
ult. strength ft Ultimate strength

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-1

AQUA | Description of Output

Concrete Material

Strength fc Design strength

Nomin. strength fcn Nominal strength (cube or cylinder strength)
Tens. strength fctm Middle tensile strength
5% t. strength fctk Fractile of tensile strength
95% t. strength fctk Fractile of tensile strength
Bond strength fbd
Service strength
Fatigue strength

Steel Material

Yield stress fy Yield point

[Link] val. fyc Compression yield value
Tens. strength ft Tensile strength
[Link] fc Compression strength
Ultim. plast. strain Ultimate strain
relative bond coeff. Relative bond coefficient
EC2 bondcoeff. K1 Bond coefficient K1 from EC2
Hardening modulus
Propotional limit
Dynamic stress range
max. thickness Maximum material thickness
Relaxation at .55ft Relaxation coefficient at 0.55·ft
Relaxation at .70ft Relaxation coefficient at 0.70·ft

Timber Material

Bending strength fm Bending strength

Tensile strength ft,0 Tensile strength in fibre direction
Tensile strength ft,90 Tensile strength vertical to fibre direction
[Link] fc,0 Compressive strength in fibre direction
[Link] fc,90 Compressive strength vertical to fibre direction
Shear strength fv Shear strength
Shear strength fv,T Torsional strength

4-2 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Description of Output | AQUA

Masonry / Brickwork

Compr. strength fc,0 Nominal strength

Compressive strength
Tens. strength ft Tensile strength
Shear strength fv
Adhesional strength
Tensile brick strength

Layered Material (FLAY)

Layer thickness Layer thickness in m

Material No. Material number and material designation

Nonlinear Material

Nonlinear accord. van Mises (viskopl.) (NMAT VMIS)

Yield stress fy
Hardening modulus
Viscosity law
Exponent creep law
Viscosity

Nonlinear accord. Drucker-Prager (NMAT DRUC)

Friction angle
Cohesion
Tensile strength ft
Dilatancy angle
Compressive strength
Ultim. plast. strain Ultimate plastic strain
ultimate frict. angle Ultimate friction angle
ultimate cohesion
Viscosity law
Exponent creep law
Viscosity

Nonlinear accord. Mohr-Coulomb(3D) (NMAT MOHR)

Friction angle

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-3

AQUA | Description of Output

Cohesion
Tensile strength ft
Dilatancy angle
Compressive strength
Ultim. plast. strain Ultimate plastic strain
ultimate frict. angle Ultimate friction angle
ultimate cohesion

Nonlinear accord. Granular Hardening (NMAT GRAN)

Friction angle
Cohesion
Tensile strength ft
Dilatancy angle
Compressive strength
reloading modulus
Exponent
ultimate factor
Reference pressure

Nonlinear accord. Swelling (NMAT SWEL)

Swelling isotropic Isotropic swelling moduus
min. stress limit
equilibrium stress
Viscous retardation

Nonlinear accord. Discrete Fault (NMAT FAUL)

Fault friction angle
Fult cohesion
Fault tens. strength Fault tensile strength
Fault dilatation
Nordic angle
Inclination angle

Nonlinear accord. Rock/2D-Mohr-Coulomb (NMAT ROCK)

Fault friction angle
Fault cohesion
Fault tens. strength Fault tensile strength

4-4 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Description of Output | AQUA

Fault dilatation
Nordic angle
Friction angle
Cohesion
Tensile strength ft
Dilatancy angle
Compressive strength

Nonlinear accord. Gudehus (NMAT GUDE)

Friction angle
Cohesion
Tensile strength ft
Dilatancy angle
Compressive strength
Ultim. plast. strain Ultimate plastic strain
ultimate frict. angle Ultimate friction angle
ultimate cohesion

Nonlinear accord. Lade (NMAT LADE)

Parameter P1
Parameter P2
Tensile strength ft
Parameter P4
Compressive strength
Ultim. plast. strain Ultimate plastic strain
Parameter P7
Parameter P8

Nonlinear accord. Textile-Membrane (NMAT MEMB)

Parameter P1
Parameter P2

The defined stress-strain curves are output by ECHO MAT FULL. With ECHO MAT EXTR, the
standard curves are output as well:

eps (o/oo) Strain in o/oo

sig-m (MPa) Stress-strain for serviceability
sig-u (MPa) Stress-strain for ultimate load

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-5

AQUA | Description of Output

sig-r (MPa) Stress-strain for calculated mean values

E-t (MPa) Tangential elastic modulus at this location
safetyfactor Material safety

The tangential elastic modulus is given in each case for the following range of the stress-strain
curve.

Elastic bedding (record BMAT)

No. Material number

Cs[ kN/m3] Elastic bedding principal direction
Ct[ kN/m3] Elastic bedding transverse direction
ft[ MPa] Tensile strength
fy[ MPa] Yield stress
tan[ -] Friction coefficient
c[ MPa] Cohesion
dil[ -] Dilatancy coefficient
w[ kN/m3] Mass density

Thermal or hydraulic material constants (record HMAT)

No. Material number

TEMP Temperature or pore pressure level
S [ J/Km3] Specific storage coefficient
Kxx[ W/Km] Permeabilities or conductivities
Kyy[ W/Km]
Kzz[ W/Km]

Special materials properties, in particular for edges (record MEXT)

Air contact ratio Values according to the input definition

Nom. cover
Design crack width
Depth of roughness
Envir. temperature

For the creep and shrinkage curves explicitly defined with the record MEXT the corresponding
curves are shown graphically.

4-6 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Description of Output | AQUA

Global warming potential [t/m3] Phases ... (record LCA)

Mat Material number

Classification Material classification
Phases ... Printout of the phases with their values according
to the input definition

4.3 Bedding Profiles

If bedding profiles were entered with the records BORE, BLAY, BBAX, BBLA, then the output
of the values is released with ECHO BORE YES. Where the labels mean the following:

Bore Profile No. Bore profile number with designation

X[ m] Coordinates of the bore place (start point)

Y[ m]
Z[ m]
dX[ -] Direction of the bore profile
dY[ -]
dZ[ -]
a[◦] Rotation angle of the local axis

S[ m] Ordinate along the profile axis

Mat Material number from this ordinate

s[ m] Starting and/or ending depth

K0-a,K1-a,K2-a,K3-a Constants of the foundation profile
M0 Skin friction in kN/m
C0 Maximum skin friction in kN/m
TANR Soil/pile friction angle in degrees
TAND Dilatation angle in degrees
KSIG Lateral pressure value

K0-t,K1-t,K2-t,K3-t Constants of foundation profile in tangential direc-

tion (lateral) in kN/m2
P0,P1,P2,P3 Factors for circumferential variation
Pmax Maximum foundation value at starting and ending
depth in kN/m

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-7

AQUA | Description of Output

4.4 Overview of the Cross Section Values and Types

In the usual case (ECHO SECT YES), an overview of all the cross section properties is output
at the end of each calculation. Where the abbreviations mean the following:

Cross-section static properties

No Cross section number

Mat Material number of the cross section
MNs Material number of the reinforcement
A Cross section area
It Torsional moment of inertia
Ay/Az/Ayz Shear deformation areas
Iy/Iz/Iyz Area moments of inertia
ys/zs Cordinates of the elastic centre
ysc/zsc Coordinates of the shear centre
modulus Elastic and shear moduli
g Specific weight

In case a description was defined (which is the default for standard cross sections), then it is
appended after each cross section number.

After the calculation of the system a summary of the cross section types can be printed then
via a restart and ECHO SYST YES:

Summary of all sections

No. Cross section number

Total Length
Total Weight
max. Length
Title

4.5 Cross Section Properties

If ECHO SECT FULL is defined, a list of additional values is output for each defined cross
section. (cross section moduli, partial cross section areas, etc.).

Following a repetition of the cross section properties from the overview, the principal moments
of inertia and the locations of the principal axes are output.

Cross section properties are also released separately for each material in the case of compos-
ite sections. For cross sections with effective width, the total cross sectional properties of the
unrestricted effective cross section are also released.

4-8 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Description of Output | AQUA

Some analysis methods, eg. a 2nd order theory of a linear calculation of steel structures (see
manual of program STAR2, record GRP, item SECT, page 3-6), require that the stiffness to
be reduced by the safety factors referenced to the reference material. In case the materials
have safety factors, this would result in totally different values for composite cross sections.
Therefore an extra table for the design sectional values is output.

For the detailed output of cross sections it is important to know, if it refers to a restart. This
is because in such a case only the newly defined cross sections get printed out. Even in the
case, however, one can output all the cross sections with ECHO SDEF FULL.

The following data are output in the table of additional cross section properties:

Additional static properties of cross section

alfa-T Thermal expansion coefficient

ymin,ymax Maximum & minimum section coordinates
zmin,zmax (relative to the elastic centre)
hymin,hzmin Minimum lever arm for shear reinforcement
AK Core cross section for computing the torsional re-
inforcement
AB Concrete cross section area for reinforcement ra-
tios
MoL Material number of the link reinforcement
1/WT Maximum shear stress due to torsional moment 1
1/WT2 Maximum shear stress due to secondary torsional
moment MT2=1
1/WVy Maximum shear stress due to shear force VY=1
1/WVz Maximum shear stress due to shear force VZ=1

The table of cross section values for warping contains:

Sectional values for warping

Wmin Minimum value of the unit lateral warping

Wmax Maximum value of the unit lateral warping
CM Warping modulus
CMS Warping shear modulus
ASwyy Warping area integral w·y·y
ASwzz Warping area integral w·z·z
ry Sectional dimension (Iyyy +Iyzz )/Iyy -2ym
rz Sectional dimension (Izzz +Iyyz )/Izz -2zm

The table of the effective static properties and table of the design values of cross section are

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-9

AQUA | Description of Output

printed then:

Effective static properties of cross section

Mat Material number of the cross section

MNs Material number of the reinforcement
A Cross section area
Iy/Iz/Iyz Area moments of inertia
ys/zs Coordinates of the elastic centre
modulus Elastic and shear moduli
g Specific weight

Partial cross sections

Mat Material number of the cross section

MNs Material number of the reinforcement
A Cross section area
It Torsional moment of inertia
Ay/Az/Ayz Shear deformation areas
Iy/Iz/Iyz Area moments of inertia
ys/zs Coordinates of the elastic centre
modulus Elastic and shear moduli
g Specific weight

Design values of cross section

Mat Material number of the cross section

MNs Material number of the reinforcement
A Cross section area
It Torsional moment of inertia
Ay/Az/Ayz Shear deformation areas
Iy/Iz/Iyz Area moments of inertia
ys/zs Coordinates of the elastic centre
modulus Elastic and shear moduli
g Specific weight

The fully plastic internal forces are output for steel or composite sections with STEE reference.

4-10 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Description of Output | AQUA

Design forces and moments

N[ kN] Axial force

Vy[ kN] Shear forces
Vz[ kN]
Mt[ kNm] Torsional moment
My[ kNm] Bending moments
Mz[ kNm]
y[ m] Plastic centre
z[ m]
BUCK Buckling strain curves y and z axis or COMB for
identification of combinations

The table contains the states:

P design values fully plastic

E design values elastic (stress limit reached)

The first line contains the single forces and moments (Points A and B of the interaction dia-
gram).

Np,Rd A

Npm,Rd C

Npm,Rd
D
2
B

Mp,Rd Mm,Rd

Figure 4.1

The plastic forces are then followed by the combined values of point D marked as COMB. (For
most composite cross sections point C of the interaction curve is given by double the value of
the axial force in point D and the same moment as in Point B.)

As long as the tensile and compressive strengths of the material do not match, a second set of
values will be denoted with an inverse sign of the normal force or the moments, whereas shear

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-11

AQUA | Description of Output

force and torsional moments are based only on the different shear strength values.

If prestressed reinforcement has been defined, the internal forces due to prestress are output.

An additional table includes the output of the design data. The values which are printed at
thet-p, thet-y, thet-z and thet-yz are with masses multiplied moments of inertia (= rotational
masses).

Additional Design Data

Mat Material number (only for composite sections)

periphery-O/-I Outer and inner area
deff Effective thickness for creep and shrinkage
t-min Minimum plate thickness in mm
t-max Maximum plate thickness in mm
SMP Weight addition for small parts in percent
thet-p Mass moment of inertiaρ·(Iy +Iz )=ρ·Ip
thet-y ρ·Iy

thet-z ρ·Iz
thet-yz ρ·Iyz

If reinforcement has been defined, then the output for each layer includes the sum of the
input steel areas, the upper and lower limits of the reinforcement, and the elastic centre of the
reinforcement.

Reinforcement global values

Layer Layer number

mS Material number of cross section
mR Material number of reinforcement
area Sum of the input steel areas
lower-A Lower limit of steel areas
= zero for extra positions
= minimum value for M-position
= maximum value of next lower position
in case of sequential position numbering

upper-A Upper limit of steel areas

yL Location of elastic centre of the layer
zL
L-tors Torsional effectiveness

4-12 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Description of Output | AQUA

If the position is laid by a factor of 1.0, the

accounted torsional reinforcement is area/L-tors
(cm2 /m)
N-p Statically determinate prestressing axial force
M-p Statically determinate prestressing moment

4.6 Cross Section Elements

Additionally to the cross section values also the individual elements of the cross sections are
printed as well with ECHO SECT FULL. Most descriptions are already familiar from the input
description. If reference points were defined, then these references are printed with ECHO
REFP FULL in the corresponding tables.

Polygon or Polygon hole

Id Polygon point number

Mat Material number
Neff Non effective flags:
N = normal force
Y = y-ordinate, bending Mz
Z = z-ordinate, bending My
y Coordinates of the polygon
z
r Fillet radius
1/WMy,Mz Inverses of the section moduli for bending
My and Mz (Swain’s formula)
1/WT Shear stress due to torsional moment Mt=1.0
1/WVy,1/WVz Shear stress due to shear force Vy or Vz=1.0
Solid: first row = τy , second row = τz
Thin: first row = 0, second row = τ
W0 Unit warping
exp Exposition class or degree of air contact

Rectangular cross-section/T-beam

H/B Height and width

Ho/Bo Upper heigth/width of the cross section
Aso/Asu Reinforcement above/below
As-type Ditribution type of the reinforcement
Do/Du/Ds Bar diameter above/below/on the side

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-13

AQUA | Description of Output

So/Su/Ss Reinforcement distance above/below/on the side

a/a-min/a-max Distance of bars
B-eff Width of the equivalent hollow section
incl Inclination of shear links
Ass Area of shear links

Circular/annular cross section

Ra Outer radius
Ri Inner radius
Rsa Radius of the outer reinforcement
Rsi Radius of the inner reinforcement
Asa Outer reinforcement
Asi Inner reinforcement
D Diameter of the reinforcement
a Distance of bars

Tube/Cable Cable factors

D Nominal diameter
T Wall thickness for tube
Type Cable type
strands Number of strands
wire Number of wires per strand
W*100 Weight factor
C Sectional or fill factor
K Rupture or cable factor
ke Loss factor
Zr,k/Zr,d Failure load

Following table is printed additionally for cables:

Circular element

Id Designation
Mat Material number
ym Distance of the strand to the overall elastic centre
zm of the cable
R Radius of the strand

4-14 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Description of Output | AQUA

exp Exposition class

Rolled steel Profile designation

D[ mm] Profile height

B[ mm] Profile width
s[ mm] Web thickness
t[ mm] Flange thickness
r[ mm] Radius transition arch web - flange
yr[ mm] Coordinates of the profile reference point
zr[ mm] within the cross section
[ grd] Rotation

Cuts for shear design

Id Section number
Type Type of section
WEB/WRED Web with/without shear region 3
FLAN/FFUL Flange with/without shear region 3
Mat Material number of the partial section
beta Parameter of friction in construction interfaces
mue Friction coefficient of construction interfaces
y-A/z-A Coordinates of the partial section
y-E/z-E
b0/bt Width of section / effective width
1/WTm/1/WTd Reciprocal torsional stress moduli
FVy/FVz Proportion factors for shear force
Ns/Ms Lateral bending internal forces
MoR Material number of the link reinforcement
Lay Layer of the link reinforcement
Asl Minimum link reinforcement
beta inclination of links w.r.t. bar axis

Stress output locations on shear cuts

Id Point designation
Mat Material number
y Coordinates of the point

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-15

AQUA | Description of Output

z
1/WT Shear stress due to torsional moment Mt=1.0
1/WVy/1/WVz Shear stress due to shear force Vy or Vz=1.0
Solid: first row = τy , second row = τz
Thin: first row = 0, second row = τ
sig-t Stress in transverse direction
W0 Unit warping

Construction and Selected Result Points

Id Point designation
Mat Material number
T Temperatur
y Coordinates of the point
z
A Effective area
t Thickness
sigma-t Prestress
1/WMy/1/WMz Inverses of the section moduli for bending
My and Mz (Swain’s formula)
1/WT Shear stress due to torsional moment Mt=1.0
1/WVy/1/WVz Shear stress due to shear force Vy or Vz=1.0
Solid: first row = τy , second row = τz
Thin: first row = 0, second row = τ
W0 Unit warping
sig/tau-dyn Permissible range of steel stresses or notch type

Thin elements or Longitudinal weld

Id Designation
Neff Non effective flags:
N = normal force
Y = y-ordinate, bending Mz
Z = z-ordinate, bending My
Mat Material number
y-A/z-A Coordinates of beginning
y-E/z-E Coordinates of end
t Thickness

4-16 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Description of Output | AQUA

w-B/w-E Unit warping at beginning/end

1/WT/1/WT2 Shear stress due to MT=1.0 or MT2=1.0
1/WVy/1/WVz Shear stress due to VY=1.0 or VZ=1.0
Fix Distance of buckling from end points

Single point reinforcement

Id Designation
Mat Material number of reinforcement
y Coordinates of the reinforcement
z
T Temperature
sigma Prestress
As Base value or minimum reinforcement
As-max Maximum reinforcement
Lay Layer number
D Diameter
a Distance of bars
Ar Reference area for cracked widths
Neff Non effective flags:
N = normal force
Y = y-ordinate, bending Mz
Z = z-ordinate, bending My

Distributed reinforcement or Shear Links

Id Designation
Mat Material number of reinforcement
No Identification number
ya/za Beginning point of the linear reinforcement
ye/ze End point of the linear reinforcement
As Base value or minimum reinforcement
As-max Maximum reinforcement
Lay Layer number
D Diameter
a Distance of bars
Ar Reference area for cracked widths
Dist Distribution of bars

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-17

AQUA | Description of Output

Circular reinforcement

Id Designation
Mat Material number of reinforcement
ym/zm Coordinates of reinforcement centre
R Radius of the circular reinforcement
As Base value or minimum reinforcement
As-max Maximum reinforcement
Lay Layer number
D Diameter
a Distance of bars
Ar Reference area for cracked widths
Dist Distribution of bars

4.7 Wind Coefficients

The parameters of wind loading defined in record WPAR are output as follows (ECHO WIND
YES):

Areas of wind attack

CS Construction stage number

[Link] Relative roughness
iceing Thickness of ice cover
traffic Height of additional area of wind attack due to traf-
fic
y-min Dimensions of wind attack area
y-max
z-min
z-max

The table of wind coefficients is output for steel profiles (record PROF) or in case of an explicit
input with WIND:

Hydrodynamic Coefficients for Wind and Wave Loading

alpha Angle for load application

cw-y Lateral coefficient
cw-z Vertical coefficient
cw-t Torsional coefficient
ref Reference dimension

4-18 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Description of Output | AQUA

c-m Hydrodynamic coefficient

c-lat Transverse driving coefficient
Strohal Strouhal number
a-gallop Galloping-Coefficient

4.8 Integral Equation Method

The output of the analyzed topology of the cross sections for the integral equation method
reads:

Detected Geometry of section for Integral equation system

Reg Region
edge Boundary number
node-a Start node
node-b End node
M area number
MNo Material number
Conn. Hint to a connecting edge
YA, ZA Coordinates at beginning
YE, ZE Coordinates at end

4.9 Spring Characteristic Curves

With SFLA it is possible to define a direct non-linear law for forces or moments for every spring.
It is printed then with ECHO SPRI YES:

Explicit force deformation rule

Number Number of the spring characteristic curve

u[ mm] or [ mrad] Displacement or rotation
or [ o/oo] or [ 1/km] or strain or curvature
Typ the defined TYPE of the line is printed here

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-19

AQUA | Description of Output

4-20 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Bibliography | AQUA

Bibliography

[1] U.J. Wienecke. Zur wirklichkeitsnahen Berechnung von Stahlbeton- und Spannbeton-
stäben nach einer konsequenten Theorie [Link] unter allgemeiner Belastung. Dis-
sertation Technische Hochschule Darmstadt, 1985.
[2] C. Katz. Self-Adaptive Boundary Elements for the Shear Stress in Beams. BETECH 86,
Boundary Element Technology Conference 1986 Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
Cambridge U.S.A., 1986.
[3] D. Schade. Zur Berechnung von Querschnittswerten und Spannungsverteilungen für Tor-
sion und Profilverformungen von prismatischen Stäben mit dünnwandigen Querschnit-
ten. Z. [Link] 11 , 167-173., 1987.
[4] P.W. Rowe. “The stress-dilatancy relation for static equilibrium of an assembly of particles
in contact”. In: Proceedings of the Royal Society of London. Series A. Mathematical and
Physical Sciences 269.1339 (1962), pp. 500–527.
[5] M.M. Maksimović. Mehanika Tla. Gradjevinska knjiga, 1995.
[6] M. Wehnert. “Ein Beitrag zur drainierten und undrainierten Analyse in der Geotechnik”.
PhD thesis. Universität Stuttgart, Institut für Geotechnik, 2006.
[7] M.A. Chrisfield. Non-linear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures. Volume I,
Essentials. Wiley & Sons, 1991.
[8] M.A. Chrisfield. Non-linear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures. Volume II,
Advanced Topics. Wiley & Sons, 1997.
[9] O.C. Zienkiewicz and R.L. Taylor. The Finite Element Method, volume 2. McGraw Hill,
London., 1991.
[10] O.C. Zienkiewicz and I.C. Cormeau. Visco-Plasticity - Plasticity and Creep in Elastic
Solids - a Unified Numerical Solution Approach. In International Journal for Numerical
Methods in Engineering, volume 8, 1974, pp. 821–845.
[11] H.B. Kupfer and K.H. Gerstle. “Behavior of concrete under biaxial stresses.” In: Journal
of the Engineering Mechanics Division 4 (1973), pp. 853–866.
[12] Fédération internationale du Béton. fib Model Code for Concrete Structures 2010. Wil-
helm Ernst & Sohn, Berlin, 2013. ISBN: 978-3-433-03061-5.
[13] R.L. Kondner and J.S. Zelasko. A hyperbolic stress strain relation for sands. Proc. 2nd
Pan. Am. I-COSFE Brazil 1, 1963, pp. 289–394.
[14] J.M. Duncan and C.Y. Chang. Nonlinear analysis of stress and strain in soil. J. Soil Mech.
Found. Div. ASCE 96, 1970, pp. 1629–1653.
[15] O.K. Søreide. “Mixed hardening models for frictional soils”. PhD thesis. Norwegian Uni-
versity of Science and Technology, 2003.
[16] T. Schanz. Zur Modellierung des mechanischen Verhaltens von Reibungsmaterialien.
Habilitationsschrift, Institut für Geotechnik der Universität Stuttgart, 1998.
[17] T. Benz. “Small-strain Stiffness of Soils and Its Numerical Consequences”. PhD thesis.
Universität Stuttgart, Institut für Geotechnik, 2006.
[18] C.S. Desai and J.T. Christian. Numerical Methods in Geotechnical Engineerin. Chapter
2, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1973.
[19] P. Wittke-Gattermann. Verfahren zur Berechnung von Tunnels in quellfähigem Gebirge
und Kalibrierung an einem Versuchsbauwerk. Dissertation RWTH-Aachen, Verlag Glück-
auf, 1998.
[20] W. Wittke. Grundlagen für die Bemessung und Ausführung von Tunnels in quellendem
Gebirge und ihre Anwendung beim Bau der Wendeschleife der S-Bahn Stuttgart. Veröf-

SOFiSTiK 2025 4-21

AQUA | Bibliography

fentlichungen des Institutes für Grundbau, Bodenmechanik, Felsmechanik und Verkehr-

swasserbau der RWTH-Aachen, 1978.
[21] W. Wittke and P. Rissler. Bemessung der Auskleidung von Hohlräumen in quellendem
Gebirge nach der Finite Element Methode. Veröffentlichungen des Institutes für Grund-
bau, Bodenmechanik, Felsmechanik und Verkehrswasserbau der RWTH-Aachen - Heft
2, 1976, pp. 7–46.
[22] Baugrund-Institut. Nichtlineare Stoffgleichungen für Böden und ihre Verwendung bei
der numerischen Analyse von Grundbauaufgaben. Mitteilungen Heft 10 des Baugrund-
Instituts Stuttgart, 1979.
[23] K. Terzaghi. Theoretical Soil Mechanics. Wiley, 1948.
[24] D.M. Potts and L. Zdravković. Finite Element Analysis in Geotechnical Engineering: The-
ory. Vol. 1. Finite Element Analysis in Geotechnical Engineering. Thomas Telford, 1999.
[25] A.W. Skempton. “The pore-pressure coefficients A and B”. In: Géotechnique 4 (4 1954),
pp. 143–147.
[26] A. Verruijt. Grondmechanica. Delftse Uitgevers Maatschappij, 1983.
[27] P.V. Lade. Failure Criterion for Frictional Materials in Mechanics of Engineering Materials.
Chap 20 ([Link],[Link] ed.) Wiley & Sons, 1984.
[28] C. Galliot and R. Luchsinger. “A simple non-linear material model for PVC-coated
polyester fabrics”. In: Tensinews Newsletter 18 (2010).

4-22 SOFiSTiK 2025